Seat Altea Edition 07.09 2009 Hatchback Owner's Manual PDF

1 of 310
1 of 310

Summary of Content for Seat Altea Edition 07.09 2009 Hatchback Owner's Manual PDF

A LT

EA O

W N

ER S

M A

N U

A L

In gl

s 5

P0 01

20 03

D G

(0 7.

09 )

( G

T9 )

5P 00

12 00

3D G

A LT

EA In

gl s

( 07

.0 9)

Portada ALTEA.qxd:Maquetacin 1 1/9/09 13:08 Pgina 3

SEAT S.A. se preocupa constantemente por mantener todos sus tipos y modelos en un desarrollo continuo. Por ello le rogamos que com- prenda que, en cualquier momento, puedan producirse modificaciones del vehculo entregado en cuanto a la forma, el equipamiento y la tcnica. Por esta razn, no se puede derivar derecho alguno basndose en los datos, las ilustraciones y descripciones del presente Manual.

Los textos, las ilustraciones y las normas de este manual se basan en el estado de la informacin en el momento de la realizacin de la impresin. Salvo error u omisin, la informacin recogida en el presente manual es vlida en la fecha de cierre de su edicin.

No est permitida la reimpresin, la reproduccin o la traduccin, total o parcial, sin la autorizacin escrita de SEAT.

SEAT se reserva expresamente todos los derechos segn la ley sobre el "Copyright". Reservados todos los derechos sobre modificacin.

Este papel est fabricado con celulosa blanqueada sin cloro.

SEAT S.A. - Reimpresin: 15.07.09

Portada ALTEA_interior.qxd:maquetacin 1/9/09 13:12 Pgina 1

efully to familiarise yourself with

ll contribute to preserve its value.

s and parts change.

as this should be kept with the

altea_EN Seite 1 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Foreword This Instruction manual and its corresponding supplements should be read car

your vehicle.

Besides the regular care and maintenance of the vehicle, its correct handling wi

For safety reasons, note the information concerning accessories, modification

If selling the vehicle, give all of the onboard documentation to the new owner

vehicle.

altea_EN Seite 2 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Contents 3

shtrays*, cigarette lighter* and electrical

ockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

irst-aid kit, warning triangle, fire extinguisher

uggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ting, Ventilation and Air conditioning . .

eating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

limatic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C-Climatronic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

eneral notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ddress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

afety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

nition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

tarting and stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . .

tart-Stop function* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

anual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

utomatic gearbox* / DSG automatic gearbox .

andbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

arking aid acoustic system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ruise control* (Cruise control - GRA) . . . . . . . .

ctical tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

lligent technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

rakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

nti-lock brake system and traction control M-ABS

ABS and TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

lectronic stabilisation programme (ESP)* . . . .

ing and the environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

unning-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

xhaust gasses purification system . . . . . . . . . .

conomical and ecological driving . . . . . . . . . .

riving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

148

151

152

155

155

157

161

165

167

167

168

169

170

174

177

178

183

185

188

193

193

193

194

195

200

200

201

202

204

altea_EN Seite 3 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Contents

Manual structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Safety First . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Proper sitting position for occupants . . . . . . . . .

Pedal area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Stowing luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Brief Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Why wear seat belts? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Belt tension devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Side airbags* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Curtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Deactivating airbags* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Securing child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Operating instructions . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LPG system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Digital display in the dash panel . . . . . . . . . . . .

Dash panel menus* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Steering wheel controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Radio navigation system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Unlocking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Radio frequency remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Anti-theft alarm system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Sliding/tilting roof* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Lights and visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Windscreen washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Seats and stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

The importance of correct seat adjustment . . . .

Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rear seat bench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Stowage compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A

s

F

L

Hea

H

C

2

G

Driv

A

S

Ig

S

S

M

A

H

P

C

Pra

Inte

B

A

(

E

Driv

R

E

E

D

5

6

7

7

7

10

16

17

19

19

21

24

28

30

30

34

37

41

44

46

46

48

51

55

55

55

57

60

61

68

77

87

87

87

91

95

95

101

102

104

106

108

110

113

113

121

124

125

129

132

132

133

135

137

139

Contents4

altea_EN Seite 4 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Instructions to follow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Ball coupling of towing bracket* . . . . . . . . . . . .

Driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fitting a towing bracket* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cleaning and caring for your vehicle . . . . . . .

General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Vehicle exterior maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Vehicle interior maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Accessories, replacement of parts and

modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Accessories and spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Technical modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Roof aerial* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Mobile telephones and radiotelephones . . . . .

Checking and refilling levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LPG system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Working in the engine compartment . . . . . . . . .

Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Washer fluid and windscreen wiper blades . . . .

Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Wheels and tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

If and when . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tools, tyre repair kit and spare wheel . . . . . . . .

Wheel change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tyre repair kit* (Tyre Mobility System) . . . . . . . .

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Bulb change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Towing and tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

General notes on the technical data . . . . . . .

Outstanding information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Data on fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Checking fluid levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Petrol engine 1.4 63 kW (85 bhp) . . . . . . . . . . .

Petrol engine 1.4 92 kW (125 bhp) . . . . . . . . . .

Petrol engine 1.6 75 kW (102 bhp) . . . . . . . . . .

Petrol engine 1.8 l 118 kW (160 HP) . . . . . . . . .

Diesel engine 1.9 l TDI 66 kW (90 bhp) . . . . . . .

Diesel engine 1.9 l TDI 77 kW (105 bhp) . . . . . .

Diesel engine 2.0 l TDI 103 kW (140 HP) . . . . . .

Diesel engine 2.0l 125 kW (170 bhp) . . . . . . . .

Dimensions and capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

205

205

206

206

207

209

209

210

216

218

218

218

219

219

220

220

221

224

225

226

229

233

235

239

240

243

243

251

251

253

259

261

266

275

278

281

281

281

283

284

284

285

285

286

287

288

289

291

292

293

295

297

299

Manual structure 5

Manual structure What you should know before reading the on-board manual This manual contains a description of the equipment supplied with the

vehicle at the time of press. Some of the equipment hereunder described will

not be available until a later date, or is only available in certain markets.

Because this is a general manual for the ALTEA, some of the equipment and functions that are described in this manual are not included in all types or variants of the model or model year; they may vary or be modified depending on the technical requirements and on the market; this is in no way deceptive advertising.

The illustrations are intended as a general guide, and may vary from the

equipment fitted in your vehicle in some details.

The direction indications (left, right, front, rear) appearing in this manual

refer to the normal forward working direction of the vehicle except when

otherwise indicated.

The equipment marked with an asterisk* is supplied as standard on certain

versions of the model only, it can be supplied as an option on some models,

or else it is only on sale in certain countries.

All registered marks are indicated with . Although the copyright symbol

does not appear, it is a copyrighted mark.

The section is continued on the following page.

This shows the end of the section.

WARNING

Texts preceded by this symbol contain safety information. They warn you of serious dangers, possibly involving accident or injury.

Caution Texts preceded by this symbol draw your attention to a possible risk of

damage to your vehicle.

For the sake of the environment Texts preceded by this symbol refer to relevant points concerning environ-

mental protection.

Note Texts preceded by this symbol contain additional information.

altea_EN Seite 5 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Content6

Content This manual is structured to provide the information you need in an organised

way. The content of this Manual is divided into sections which belong to

chapters (e.g. Air conditioning). The entire manual is divided into five large

parts which are:

1. Safety First Information on the vehicle equipment relating to passive safety such as seat

belts, airbags, seats, etc.

2. Controls and equipment Information about the distribution of controls in the driver position of your

vehicle, about the seat adjustment possibilities, about how to create a suit-

able climate in the passenger compartment, etc.

3. Practical tips Advice relating to the driving, caring and maintenance of your vehicle and

certain problems you can solve yourself.

4. Technical Data Figures, values and the dimensions of your vehicle.

5. Alphabetic index At the end of this manual there is a detailed alphabetical index, this will help

you to rapidly find the information you require.

altea_EN Seite 6 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Safe driving 7

Safety Fir Technical Data

s a part of the occupant protection

the risk of injury in the event of acci-

he safety of your passengers in danger. In the

ty equipment may reduce the risk of injury. The

f the safety equipment in your SEAT:

e front and rear side seats,

e front seats,

r the front seats,

eat backrests,

straints*,

ts for child seats in the rear side seats with the

straints,

e position and non-use position,

n.

ned above works together to provide you and

t possible protection in the event of accidents.

not neither help you nor your passengers if you

altea_EN Seite 7 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Safety First

Safe driving

Brief introduction

Dear SEAT Driver

Safety first!

This chapter contains important information, tips, suggestions and

warnings that you should read and consider for both your own safety

and for your passengers safety.

WARNING

This manual contains important information concerning the driver's and passengers' handling of the vehicle. The other booklets in the on board manual also contain further information that you should be aware of for your own safety and for the safety of your passengers.

Ensure that the onboard documentation is kept in the vehicle at all times. This is especially important when lending or selling the vehicle to another person.

Safety equipment

The safety equipment i

system and can reduce

dent.

Never put your safety and t

event of an accident, the safe

following list includes most o

three-point seat belts,

belt tension limiters for th

belt tension devices for th

belt height adjustment fo

front airbags,

side airbags in the front s

curtain airbags,

crash-active front head re

ISOFIX anchorage poin

ISOFIX system,

height-adjustable head re

head restraints with in-us

adjustable steering colum

The safety equipment mentio

your passengers with the bes

But this safety equipment can

Safe driving8

gers in the rear seats always have the

-use position page 14.

adjust the head restraints according to

propriate child seats and properly

age 46.

ing position. Instruct your passengers

r sitting position. page 10.

ecurely. Instruct your passengers also to

roperly page 19.

fety?

determined by your driving style and

of all occupants.

sible for yourself and your passengers.

r driving safety is affected by any circum-

self as well as others on the road ,

be distracted from the traffic around you,

lephone conversations.

riving ability is impaired (e.g. by medica-

d speed limits.

altea_EN Seite 8 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

or they are sitting in an incorrect position or do not properly adjust or use this

equipment.

Therefore, information is provided about why this equipment is so important,

how it protects you, what you have to consider when using it and how you and

your passengers can achieve the greatest possible benefit from the safety

equipment fitted. This manual includes important warnings that you and your

passengers should note in order to reduce the risk of injury.

Safety is everyone's business!

Before every trip

The driver bears the responsibility for his passengers and the

operational worthiness of the vehicle.

For your own safety and the safety of your passengers, always note

the following points before every trip:

Ensure that the vehicle's lights and turn signals operate flaw-

lessly.

Check tyre pressure.

Ensure that all windows provide a clear and good view of the

surroundings.

Securely restrain all parcels page 17.

Make sure that no objects can interfere with the pedals.

Adjust front seat, head restraint and mirrors properly according

to your size.

Ensure that the passen

head restraints in the in

Instruct passengers to

their height.

Protect children with ap

applied seat belts p

Assume the correct sitt

also to assume a prope

Fasten your safety belt s

fasten their seat belts p

What affects driving sa

Driving safety is largely

the personal behaviour

As a driver, you are respon

When your concentration o

stance, you endanger your

for this reason:

Do not allow yourself to

e.g. by passengers or te

Never drive when your d

tion, alcohol, drugs).

Observe traffic laws an

Safe driving 9

Safety Fir Technical Data

altea_EN Seite 9 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Always reduce your speed as appropriate for road, traffic and

weather conditions.

When travelling long distances, take breaks regularly - at least

every two hours.

If possible, avoid driving when you are tired or are in tension.

WARNING

When driving safety is impaired during a trip, the risk of injury and acci- dents increases.

Safe driving10

reduce the risk of injury in the event of an

he following adjustments for the driver:

el so that there is a distance of at least

ering wheel and the centre of your chest

rwards or backwards so that you are able

, brake and clutch pedals to the floor with

angled .

ch the highest point of the steering

nt so that its upper edge is at the same

head, or as close as possible to the same

head fig. 2.

upright position so that your back rests

Fig. 2 Proper head restraint position for driver

altea_EN Seite 10 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Proper sitting position for occupants

Proper sitting position for driver

The proper sitting position for the driver is important for a

safe and relaxed driving.

For your own safety and to

accident, we recommend t

Adjust the steering whe

25 cm between the ste

fig. 1.

Move the driver's seat fo

to press the accelerator

your knees still slightly

Ensure that you can rea

wheel.

Adjust the head restrai

level as the top of your

level as the top of your

Move the backrest to an

completely against it.

Fig. 1 The proper distance between driver and steering wheel

Safe driving 11

Safety Fir Technical Data

for front passenger

st sit at least 25 cm away from the

airbag can provide the greatest

he event that it is triggered.

reduce the risk of injury in the event of an

the following adjustments for the front

ger seat back as far as possible .

n upright position so that your back rests

int so that its upper edge is at the same

head, or as close as possible to the same

r head page 13.

otwell in front of the front passenger seat.

securely page 19.

e passenger airbag in exceptional circum-

ow to adjust the front passenger's seat, see

tion of the front passenger can lead to severe

altea_EN Seite 11 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Fasten your safety belt securely page 19.

Keep both feet in the foot well so that you have the vehicle under

control at all times.

Adjustment of the driver's seat page 132.

WARNING

An incorrect sitting position of the driver can lead to severe injuries.

Adjust the driver's seat so that there is at least 25 cm distance between the centre of the chest and the centre of the steering wheel page 10, fig. 1. If you are sitting nearer than 25 cm, the airbag system cannot protect you properly.

If your physical constitution prevents you from maintaining the minimum distance of 25 cm, contact a qualified workshop. The workshop will help you decide if special specific modifications are necessary.

When driving, always hold the steering wheel with both hands on the outside of the ring at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions. This reduces the risk of injury when the driver airbag is triggered.

Never hold the steering wheel at the 12 o'clock position, or in any other manner (e.g. in the centre of the steering wheel). In such cases, if the airbag is triggered, you may sustain injuries to the arms, hands and head.

To reduce the risk of injury to the driver during sudden braking manoeu- vres or an accident, never drive with the backrest tilted far back! The airbag system and seat belts can only provide optimal protection when the back- rest is in an upright position and the driver is wearing his or her seat belt properly. The further the backrests are tilted to the rear, the greater the risk of injury due to incorrect positioning of the belt web or to the incorrect sitting position!

Adjust the head restraint properly to achieve optimal protection.

Proper sitting position

The front passenger mu

dash panel so that the

possible protection in t

For your own safety and to

accident, we recommend

passenger:

Move the front passen

Move the backrest to a

completely against it.

Adjust the head restra

level as the top of your

level as the top of you

Keep both feet in the fo

Fasten your safety belt

It is possible to deactivate th

stances page 25.

For detailed information on h

page 135.

WARNING

An incorrect sitting posi injuries.

Safe driving12

the correct position page 14.

ot well in front of the rear seat.

securely page 19.

d restraint system when you take children

6.

ear seat are not sitting properly, they could

properly in order to achieve maximum protec-

e optimal protection when backrests are in an sengers are wearing their seat belts properly. are not sitting in an upright position, the risk itioning of the belt web increases.

altea_EN Seite 12 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Adjust the front passenger seat so that there is at least 25 cm between your breastbone and the dash panel. If you are sitting nearer than 25 cm, the airbag system cannot protect you properly.

If your physical constitution prevents you from maintaining the minimum distance of 25 cm, contact a qualified workshop. The workshop will help you decide if special specific modifications are necessary.

Always keep your feet in the footwell when the vehicle is moving; never rest them on the instrument panel, out the window or on the seat. An incor- rect sitting position exposes you to an increased risk of injury in case of a sudden braking or an accident. If the airbag is triggered, you could sustain severe injuries due to an incorrect sitting position.

To reduce the risk of injury to the front passenger in events such sudden braking manoeuvres or an accident, never travel with the backrest tilted far back! The airbag system and seat belts can only provide optimal protection when the backrest is in an upright position and the front passenger is wearing his or her seat belt properly. The further the backrests are tilted to the rear, the greater the risk of injury due to incorrect positioning of the belt web or to the incorrect sitting position!

Adjust the head restraint properly in order to achieve maximum protection.

Correct sitting position for passengers in the rear seats

Passengers in the rear seats must sit up straight, keep their

feet in the foot well s and wear their seat belts properly.

To reduce the risk of injury in the event of a sudden braking

manoeuvre or an accident, passengers on the rear bench seat must

consider the following:

Adjust the headrest to

Keep both feet in the fo

Fasten your safety belt

Use an appropriate chil

in the vehicle page 4

WARNING

If the passengers on the r sustain severe injuries.

Adjust the head restraint tion.

Seat belts can only provid upright position and the pas If passengers on the rear seat of injury due to incorrect pos

WARNING (continued)

Safe driving 13

Safety Fir Technical Data

properly in order to achieve maximum

int so that its upper edge is at the same

head or as close as possible to the same

r head and, at the very least, at eye level

page 132.

restraints removed or improperly adjusted injuries.

d restraints could result in death in the event of

d restraints also increase the risk of injury d driving or braking manoeuvres.

t always be adjusted according to the

d into their seats during a rear end collision. The

e backrest activates the crash-active head

hich moves rapidly forwards and upwards at the

duces the distance between the occupant's

reducing the risk of head injuries such as brain

altea_EN Seite 13 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Correct adjustment of front seat head restraints

Properly adjusted head restraints are an important part of

passengers protection and can reduce the risk of injuries in

most accident situations.

Adjust the head restraint

protection.

Adjust the head restra

level as the top of your

level as the top of you

fig. 3 and fig. 4.

Adjusting the head restraints

WARNING

Travelling with the head increases the risk of severe

Incorrectly adjusted hea a collision or accident.

Incorrectly adjusted hea during sudden or unexpecte

The head restraints mus passenger's height.

Headrests in use*

Vehicle occupants are presse

resulting body pressure on th

restraint* on the front seat, w

same time. This movement re

head and the head rest, thus

trauma.

Fig. 3 Properly adjusted head restraint viewed from the front

Fig. 4 Properly adjusted head restraint viewed from the side

Safe driving14

ar seat head restraints

restraints are an important part of the

can reduce the risk of injuries in

s

Fig. 5 Head restraints in correct position

Fig. 6 Head restraint position warning label

altea_EN Seite 14 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

WARNING

Travelling with the head restraints removed or improperly adjusted increases the risk of severe injuries.

Incorrectly adjusted head restraints could result in death in the event of a collision or accident.

Incorrectly adjusted head restraints also increase the risk of injury during sudden or unexpected driving or braking manoeuvres.

The head restraints must always be adjusted according to the passenger's height.

Note The crash-active head restraints* could also be triggered if a vehicle occupant

applies a high level of pressure on the backrest (e.g. by falling back into the

seat when entering the vehicle) or if pressure is applied to a front seat head

restraint from the rear. This accidental activation is, however, not dangerous

as the crash-active head restraints will return to the original position immedi-

ately and are thus once again ready.

Correct adjustment of re

Properly adjusted head

occupant protection and

most accident situation

Safe driving 15

Safety Fir Technical Data

itting positions

ition can lead to severe injuries to

timal protection only when the belt webs

ncorrect sitting positions substantially

tion of seat belts and increase the risk of

t web position. As the driver, you are

occupants, especially children.

o assume an incorrect sitting position in

lling .

amples of sitting positions that could be

The list is not complete, but we would like to

.

icle is in motion:

,

r to the rear,

sh panel,

h,

e of a seat,

w,

a window,

dash panel,

surface of a seat,

altea_EN Seite 15 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Rear outer seat head restraints

The rear outer seat head restraints have 3 positions.

Two positions for use page 14, fig. 5. In these positions, the

head restraints are used normally, protecting passengers along

with the rear seat belts.

And one position for non-use.

To fit the head restraints in position for use, pull on the edges

with both hands in the direction of the arrow.

Centre rear head restraint

The centre head restraint only has two positions, in-use (head

restraint up) and non-use (head restraint down).

WARNING

Under no circumstances should the rear passengers travel while the head restraints are in the non-use position. See the warning label located on the rear side fixed window page 14, fig. 6.

Do not swap the centre rear head restraint with either of the outer seat rear head restraints.

Injury risk in case of an accident!

Caution Note the instructions on the adjustment of the head restraints page 133.

Examples of incorrect s

An incorrect sitting pos

occupants.

Seat belts can provide op

are properly positioned. I

reduce the protective func

injury due to incorrect bel

responsible for all vehicle

Never permit anyone t

the vehicle while trave

The following list contains ex

dangerous for all occupants.

make you aware of this issue

Therefore, whenever the veh

Never stand in the vehicle

never stand on the seats,

never kneel on the seats,

never tilt your backrest fa

never lean against the da

never lie on the rear benc

never sit on the front edg

never sit sideways,

never lean out of a windo

never put your feet out of

never put your feet on the

never put your feet on the

Safe driving16

e pedal must be pressed down thoroughly in

port your feet properly and give you a good

n can lead to critical situations while driving.

e driver footwell. An object could move into al operation. In the event of a sudden driving

ill not be able to operate the brake, clutch or ident!

r side

used which can be securely fastened

ot impair operation of the pedals.

ats are securely fastened during the trip

pedals .

ve the pedals clear and which are secured to

ou can obtain suitable floor mats from a quali-

r floor mats are fitted in the footwells.

d, an accident may occur. Risk of serious inju-

s are always securely attached.

altea_EN Seite 16 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

never travel in a foot well,

never travel on a seat without wearing the seat belt,

never carry any person in the luggage compartment.

WARNING

Every incorrect sitting position increases the risk of severe injuries.

Sitting in an incorrect position exposes the occupants to severe injuries if airbags trigger, by striking a passenger who has assumed an incorrect sitting position.

Before the vehicle moves, assume the proper sitting position and main- tain it throughout the trip. Before every trip, instruct your passengers to assume the proper sitting position and to maintain it during the trip page 10, Proper sitting position for occupants.

Pedal area

Pedals

The operation of all pedals must never be impaired by objects

or floor mats.

Ensure that you can always press the accelerator, brake and

clutch pedals unimpaired to the floor.

Ensure that the pedals can return unimpaired to their initial posi-

tions.

Use only floor mats which leave the pedal area free and can be securely

fastened on the foot well.

If a brake circuit fails, the brak

order to stop the vehicle.

Wear suitable shoes

Always wear shoes which sup

feeling for the pedals.

WARNING

Restricting pedal operatio

Never place objects on th the pedal area and impair ped or braking manoeuvre, you w accelerator pedal. Risk of acc

Floor mats on the drive

Only floor mats may be

in the foot well and do n

Ensure that the floor m

and do not obstruct the

Only use floor mats which lea

prevent them from slipping. Y

fied dealership. Fasteners* fo

WARNING

If the pedals are obstructe ries.

Ensure that the floor mat

Safe driving 17

Safety Fir Technical Data

he luggage compartment and secure them on

traps to secure heavy objects.

res or accidents, loose objects can be thrown upants or passers-by. This increased risk of ed if a loose object is struck by an inflating cts can be transformed into missiles. Risk of

tre of gravity may shift when transporting ct the vehicle's handling and lead to an acci-

ial to adjust your speed and driving style nts.

axle loads or allowed maximum weight. If the wed total weight is exceeded, the driving char- y change, leading to accidents, injuries and

unattended, especially when the tailgate is nto the luggage compartment closing the door in trapped without help and there is a mortal

lay in or around the vehicle. Close and lock doors when you leave the vehicle. Before you that there are no adults or children in the

ers in the luggage compartment. Every belted in page 19.

altea_EN Seite 17 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Never lay or fit floor mats or other floor coverings over the original floor mats. This would reduce the pedal area and could obstruct the pedals. Risk of accident.

Stowing luggage

Loading the luggage compartment

All luggage and other loose objects must be safely secured in

the luggage compartment.

Unsecured objects which shift back and forth could impair the

driving safety or driving characteristics of the vehicle by shifting the

centre of gravity.

Distribute the load evenly in the luggage compartment.

Lay and stow heavy luggage as far forward as possible in the

luggage compartment.

Stow heavy luggage as low as possible in the luggage compart-

ment.

Secure heavy objects to the fitted fastening rings page 18.

WARNING

Loose luggage and other objects in the boot could cause serious inju- ries.

Always stow objects in t the fastening rings.

Use suitable specialist s

During sudden manoeuv forward, injuring vehicle occ injury will be further increas airbag. If this happens, obje fatal injury.

Please note that the cen heavy objects; this may affe dent. Therefore, it is essent accordingly, to avoid accide

Never exceed the allowed allowed axle load or the allo acteristics of the vehicle ma damage to the vehicle.

Never leave your vehicle open. Children could climb i behind them; they will rema risk.

Never allow children to p both the tailgate and all the lock the vehicle, make sure vehicle.

Never transport passeng passenger must be properly

WARNING (continued) WARNING (continued)

Safe driving18

her objects are secured to the fastening rings ed retaining cords, injuries could result in the or accidents.

age or other objects from flying forward, ning cords which are secured to the fastening

on the fastening rings.

altea_EN Seite 18 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Note Air circulation in the vehicle helps reduce fogging of the windows. Used

air escapes through ventilation slits in the side trim of the luggage compart-

ment. Ensure that the ventilation slits are never covered.

Straps for securing the load to the fastening rings are commercially

available.

Fastening rings*

There can be four fastening rings in the boot for fastening

luggage and other objects.

Always use suitable and undamaged straps to secure luggage

and other objects to the fastening rings in Loading the

luggage compartment on page 17.

Pull up the fastening rings to attach the straps.

During a collision or an accident, even small and light objects can build up so

much energy that they can cause very severe injuries. The amount of kinetic

energy depends on the speed of the vehicle and the weight of the object.

The most significant factor, however, is the speed of the vehicle.

Example: An object weighing 4.5 kg is lying unsecured in the vehicle. During

a frontal collision at a speed of 50 km/h, this object generates a force corre-

sponding to 20 times its weight. That means that the effective weight of the

object increases to about 90 kg. You can imagine the severity of the injuries

which might be sustained if this projectile strikes an occupant as it flies

through the passenger compartment. This increased risk of injury will be

further increased if a loose object is struck by an inflating airbag.

WARNING

If pieces of baggage or ot with inappropriate or damag event of braking manoeuvres

To prevent pieces of lugg always use appropriate retai rings.

Never secure a child seat

Seat belts 19

Safety Fir Technical Data

ble seats must never be transported in your

ehicle must properly fasten and wear the seat eat. Children must be protected with an appro- .

*

as a reminder to the driver to fasten

e:

securely.

rs to fasten their seat belts properly before

ng a child seat according to the child's

itched on, the warning lamp on the instru-

driver has not fastened his/her seat belt, and a

vehicle is driven at more than 30 km/h for 90

ion

altea_EN Seite 19 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Seat belts

Brief Introduction

Before driving: remember your seat belt!

Wearing a seat belt properly can save your life!

In this chapter you will learn the importance of wearing seat belts,

how they work and how to properly fasten, adjust and wear them.

Read and consider all the information as well as the warnings in

this chapter.

WARNING

If seat belts are worn incorrectly or not at all, the risk of severe injuries increases.

Properly worn seat belts can reduce severe injuries in case of sudden braking manoeuvres or accidents. For safety reasons, you and your passen- gers must always wear the seat belts properly while the vehicle is moving.

Pregnant women or people with physical disabilities must also use seat belts. Like all other passengers, these people can also sustain severe inju- ries if they are not wearing their seat belts properly.

Number of seats

Your vehicle has five seats, two on the front part and three on the rear part.

Each seat is equipped with a three-point seat belt.

WARNING

More people than availa vehicle.

Every passenger in the v belt belonging to his or her s priate child restraint system

Seat belt warning lamp

The warning lamp acts

the seat belt.

Before starting the vehicl

Fasten your safety belt

Instruct your passenge

driving off.

Protect children by usi

height and weight.

After the ignition has been sw

ment panel lights up1) if the

warning signal is heard if the

seconds.

1) Depending on the model vers

Seat belts20

altea_EN Seite 20 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

The warning lamp* is switched off if the driver seat belt is fastened while

the ignition is switched on.

Seat belts 21

Safety Fir Technical Data

aws of physics work in the case of a head-on

ts moving fig. 7 there is a certain amount of

rgy, both in the vehicle and in the occupants.

y depends on the speed of the vehicle and the

passengers. The higher the speed and the

energy there is to be released in an accident.

owever, is the speed of the vehicle. If the speed

km/h, for example, the kinetic energy is multi-

ur example are not restrained by seat belts, the

gy has to be absorbed at the point of impact

50 km/h, the forces acting on bodies in a colli-

nne (1000 kg). At greater speed these forces are

belts are not attached to the vehicle. In a

ve forward at the same speed their vehicle was

Fig. 8 The vehicle hits the wall: the occupants are not wearing seat belts

altea_EN Seite 21 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Why wear seat belts?

Physical principles of frontal collisions

In the event of a frontal collision, a large amount of kinetic

energy must be absorbed.

It is easy to explain how the l

collision: When a vehicle star

energy known as kinetic ene

The amount of kinetic energ

weight of the vehicle and its

greater the weight, the more

The most significant factor, h

doubles from 25 km/h to 50

plied by four.

Because the passengers in o

entire amount of kinetic ener

fig. 8.

Even at speeds of 30 km/h to

sion can easily exceed one to

even higher.

Passengers not wearing seat

frontal collision, they will mo

Fig. 7 Vehicle about to hit a wall: the occupants are not wearing seat belts

Seat belts22

acting on the body in a collision are so great

oneself with one's hands. In a frontal collision,

wn forward and will make violent contact with

, windscreen or whatever else is in the way

stitute for the seat belts. When triggered,

al protection. All passengers (including the

roperly during the trip. This will reduce the risk

of an accident regardless of whether an

not.

ered only once. To achieve the best possible

always be worn properly so that you will be

h no airbag is deployed.

passengers to wear seat belts properly, as they

ward violently in an accident. Rear passengers

anger not only themselves but also the front

Fig. 10 The unbelted rear passenger is thrown forward violently, hitting the driver wearing a seat belt.

altea_EN Seite 22 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

travelling just before the impact. This example applies not only to frontal acci-

dents, but to all accidents and collisions.

The danger of not using the seat belt

The general belief that the passengers can protect them-

selves with their hands in a minor collision is false.

Even at low speeds the forces

that it is not possible to brace

unbelted passengers are thro

the steering wheel, dashboard

fig. 9.

The airbag system is not a sub

airbags provide only addition

driver) must wear seat belts p

of severe injuries in the event

airbag is fitted for the seat or

Note that airbags can be trigg

protection, the seat belt must

protected in accidents in whic

It is also important for the rear

could otherwise be thrown for

who do not use seat belts end

occupants fig. 10.

Fig. 9 A driver not wearing a seat belt is thrown forward violently.

Seat belts 23

Safety Fir Technical Data

n seat belts before every trip, even when "just

wear their seat belts as well. Accident statistics

aring seat belts is an effective mean of substan-

ry and improving the chances of survival in a

e, properly worn seat belts improve the protec-

e event of an accident. For this reason, wearing

in most countries.

pped with airbags, the seat belts must be

airbags, for example, are only triggered in some

rbags will not be triggered during minor frontal

ns, rear collisions, rolls or accidents in which the

e in the control unit is not exceeded.

wear your seat belt and ensure that your

eir seat belts properly before you drive off!

using seat belts

rrectly, they can reduce the risk of

elt as described in this booklet.

lts can be fastened at all times and are not

incorrectly or not at all, the risk of severe inju- rotection from seat belts can be achieved only

altea_EN Seite 23 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Seat belts protection

Passengers not wearing seat belts risk severe injuries in the

event of an accident.

Properly worn seat belts hold the vehicle occupants in the correct sitting posi-

tions and substantially reduce the kinetic energy in the event of an accident.

Seat belts also help to prevent uncontrolled movements that could lead to

severe injuries. In addition, properly worn seat belts reduce the danger of

being thrown from the car.

Passengers wearing their seat belts correctly benefit greatly from the ability

of the belts to absorb kinetic energy. The front part of your vehicle and other

passive safety features (such as the airbag system) are also designed to

absorb the kinetic energy released in a collision. Taken together, all these

features reduce the releasing kinetic energy and consequently, the risk of

injury.

Our examples describe frontal collisions. Of course, properly worn seat belts

substantially reduce the risk of injury in all other types of accidents. This is

why it is so important to faste

driving around the corner".

Ensure that your passengers

have shown properly that we

tially reducing the risk of inju

serious accident. Furthermor

tion provided by airbags in th

a seat belt is required by law

Although your vehicle is equi

fastened and worn. The front

frontal accidents. The front ai

collisions, minor side collisio

airbag trigger threshold valu

Therefore, you should always

passengers have fastened th

Safety instructions on

If seat belts are used co

injury in an accident.

Always wear the seat b

Ensure that the seat be

damaged.

WARNING

If the seat belts are worn ries increases. The optimal p if you use them properly.

Fig. 11 Driver wearing the seat belt properly: is secured by the belt in sharp braking

Seat belts24

damaged seat belt yourself. The seat belts ified in any way.

ean, otherwise the retractors may not work

nt and rear occupants are locked into

its full protection if the belt web is not

Fig. 12 Belt buckle and latch plate of seat belt

altea_EN Seite 24 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Fasten your seat belt before every trip - even when driving in town. The other passengers must also wear the seat belt, otherwise they may be danger of injury!

The seat belt cannot offer its full protection if the belt web is not posi- tioned correctly.

Never allow two passengers (even children) to share the same seat belt.

Keep both feet in the foot-well in front of your seat as long as the vehicle is in motion.

Never unbuckle a seat belt while the vehicle is in motion. Risk of fatal injury.

The belt webbing must never be twisted while it is being worn.

The belt webbing should never lie on hard or fragile objects (such as glasses or pens, etc.) because this can cause injuries.

Do not allow the seat belt to be damaged or jammed, or to rub on any sharp edges.

Never wear the seat belt under the arm or in any other incorrect posi- tion.

Loose, bulky clothing (such as an overcoat over a jacket) impairs the proper fit and function of the belts, reducing their capacity to protect.

The slot in the seat belt buckle must not be blocked with paper or other objects, as this can prevent the latch plate from engaging securely.

Never use seat belt clips, retaining rings or similar instruments to alter the position of the belt webbing.

Frayed or torn seat belts or damage to the connections, belt retractors or parts of the buckle could cause severe injuries in the event of an acci- dent. Therefore, you must check the condition of all seat belts at regular intervals.

Seat belts which have been worn in an accident and stretched must be replaced by a qualified workshop. Renewal may be necessary even if there is no apparent damage. The belt anchorage should also be checked.

Do not attempt to repair a must not be removed or mod

The belts must be kept cl properly page 217.

Seat belts

Seat belt adjustment

The seat belts for the fro

position by a latch.

The seat belt cannot offer

positioned correctly.

WARNING (continued) WARNING (continued)

Seat belts 25

Safety Fir Technical Data

ximum protection only when they are

Fig. 13 Correct belt web and head restraint posi- tions, viewed from front

Fig. 14 Correct belt web and head restraint posi- tions, viewed from side

altea_EN Seite 25 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Adjust the seat and head restraint correctly.

To fasten the belt, take hold of the latch plate and pull it slowly

across your chest and lap.

Insert the latch plate into the buckle for the appropriate seat and

push it down until it is securely locked with an audible click

page 24, fig. 12.

Pull the belt to ensure that the latch plate is securely engaged in

the buckle.

The seat belts are equipped with an automatic retractor on the shoulder

strap. Full freedom of movement is permitted when the shoulder belt is pulled

slowly. However, during sudden braking, during travel in mountains or bends

and during acceleration, the automatic retractor on the shoulder belt is

locked.

The automatic belt retractors on the front seats are fitted with belt tension

devices page 28.

WARNING

An incorrectly worn seat belt web can cause severe injuries in the event of an accident.

The seat belts offer best protection only when the backrests are in an upright position and the seat belts have been fastened properly.

Never put the latch plate in the buckle of another seat. If you do this, the seat belt will not protect you properly and the risk of injury is increased.

If an occupant is incorrectly belted in, the belt cannot protect him or her properly. An incorrectly positioned belt web can cause extremely severe injuries.

Always engage the retractor lock when you are securing a child seat in group 0, 0+ or 1 page 46.

Seat belt position

Seat belts offer their ma

properly positioned.

Seat belts26

also fasten their seat belts properly

he unborn child is for the mother to

rly at all times during the pregnancy.

imum protection only when the belt web

age 25.

d head restraint correctly page 10.

pull the belt evenly across your chest and

the pelvis fig. 15.

to the buckle for the corresponding seat

it is securely locked with an audible click

hat the latch plate is securely engaged in

Fig. 15 Positioning seat belts during pregnancy

altea_EN Seite 26 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

The following features are available to adjust the seat belt in the shoulder

region:

belt height adjustment for the front seats.

front seat height adjustment*.

WARNING

An incorrectly worn seat belt web can cause severe injuries in the event of an accident.

The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie on the centre of the shoulder, never across the neck. The seat belt must lie flat and snugly on the torso page 25, fig. 13.

The lap part of the seat belt must lie across the pelvis, never across the stomach. The seat belt must lie flat and snugly on the pelvis page 25, fig. 14. Pull the belt tight if necessary to take up any slack.

Read and observe the warnings page 23.

Pregnant women must

The best protection for t

wear the seat belt prope

The seat belt provides max

is properly positioned p

Adjust the front seat an

Holding the latch plate,

as low as possible over

Insert the latch plate in

and push it down until

.

Pull the belt to ensure t

the buckle.

Seat belts 27

Safety Fir Technical Data

hand so that it rolls up easily and the trim

hile the vehicle is in motion. If you do, you ng severe or fatal injuries.

height

rs can be used to adjust the position

houlder.

the front seats can be used to adjust the

shoulder.

Fig. 17 Location of the belt height adjuster

altea_EN Seite 27 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

WARNING

An incorrectly worn seat belt web can cause severe injuries in the event of an accident.

For pregnant women, the lap part of the seat belt must lie as low as possible over the pelvis, never across the stomach, and always lie flat so that no pressure is exerted on the abdomen.

Read and observe the warnings page 23.

Seat belt release

The seat belt must not be unfastened until the vehicle has

come to a standstill.

Press the red button on the belt buckle fig. 16. The latch plate

is released and springs out .

Guide the belt back by

is not damaged

WARNING

Never unbuckle a seat belt w increase the risk of sustaini

Adjusting the seat belt

Seat belt height adjuste

of the seat belt at the s

The seat belt adjuster for

proper belt position at the

Fig. 16 Removing latch plate from buckle

Seat belts28

es

sion device

, the seat belts on the front seats are

upants are equipped with belt tension devices.

nsion devices during severe head-on, lateral

seat belt is being worn. This retracts and

ng the forward motion of the occupants.

triggered only once.

ot be triggered in the event of a light frontal,

hicle overturns, or in situations where no large

rear of the vehicle.

are triggered, a fine dust is produced. This is

ion of fire in the vehicle.

ments must be observed when the vehicle or

scrapped. A qualified workshop is familiar with

pleased to pass on the information to you.

belt tension devices

omponents of the seat belts that are installed

you work on the belt tension devices or remove

when performing other repair work, the seat

sequence may be that, in the event of an acci-

function incorrectly or not at all.

altea_EN Seite 28 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Press the upper part of the shoulder belt guide and hold it in this

position page 27, fig. 17.

Move the shoulder belt guide up or down until you have adjusted

the seat belt page 25.

After adjusting, pull the shoulder belt sharply to check that the

catch on the shoulder belt guide is engaged securely.

Incorrectly fastened seat belts

Incorrectly worn seat belts can cause severe injuries.

Seat belts can provide optimal protection only if the belt web is

properly worn. The seat belts must be fastened exactly in the order

described in this chapter. An incorrect sitting position impairs

substantially the protection a seat belt offers and can lead to severe

or fatal injuries. The risk of severe or fatal injuries is especially

increased when a deploying airbag strikes an occupant who has

assumed an incorrect sitting position. As driver, you are responsible

for all vehicle occupants, especially children. Therefore:

Never permit anyone to assume an incorrect sitting position in

the vehicle while travelling .

WARNING

An incorrectly worn seat belt increases the risk of severe injuries.

Before every trip, instruct your passengers to adjust their seat belts properly and to wear them during the trip.

Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the use of seat belts page 23.

Belt tension devic

Function of the belt ten

During a frontal collision

retracted automatically.

The seat belts for the front occ

Sensors will trigger the belt te

and rear collisions only if the

tightens the seat belts, reduci

The belt tension device can be

The belt tension devices will n

side or rear collision, if the ve

forces act on the front, side or

Note If the belt tension devices

normal and it is not an indicat

The relevant safety require

components of the system are

these regulations and will be

Service and disposal of

The belt tension devices are c

in the seats of your vehicle. If

and install parts of the system

belt may be damaged. The con

dent, the belt tension devices

Seat belts 29

Safety Fir Technical Data

altea_EN Seite 29 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

So that the effectiveness of the belt tension device is not reduced and that

removed parts do not cause any injuries or environmental pollution, regula-

tions, which are known to the qualified workshops, must be observed.

WARNING

If repairs are not carried out by a professional, or if the belt tension devices are used incorrectly, the risk of severe or fatal injuries increases. The belt tension devices may fail to trigger or may trigger in the wrong circumstances.

Never attempt to repair, adjust, remove or install parts of the belt tension devices or seat belts.

The belt tension device and seat belt including its automatic retractor cannot be repaired.

Any work on the belt tension devices and seat belts, including the removal and refitting of system parts in conjunction with other repair work, must be performed by a qualified workshop only.

The belt tension devices will only provide protection for one accident and must be changed it they have been activated.

Airbag system30

t critical or fatal injuries on the occupant. This

possible distance between yourself and the

t airbags can completely deploy when trig-

m protection.

at will trigger an airbag are: the type of acci-

d the speed of the vehicle.

red depends primarily on the vehicle deceler-

ollision and detected by the control unit. If the

during the collision and measured by the

specified reference values, the front, side

be triggered. Take into account that the visible

in an accident, for whatever reason, is not an

gs had been triggered.

orrectly or assuming an incorrect sitting posi- al injuries.

hildren, who are not properly belted can s if the airbag is triggered. You should always years of age on the rear seat. Never transport are not restrained or the restraint system is

, size or weight.

at belt, if you lean forward or to the side while rect sitting position, there is a substantially increased risk of injury will be further an inflating airbag.

y from an inflating airbag, always wear the .

altea_EN Seite 30 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Airbag system

Brief introduction

Why wear a seat belt and assume the correct sitting position?

For the inflating airbags to achieve the best protection, the

seat belt must always be worn properly and the correct sitting

position must be assumed.

For your own safety and the safety of the passengers, please ensure

the following before driving:

Always wear the seat belt properly page 19.

Adjust the driver's seat and the steering wheel correctly

page 10.

Adjust the front passenger seat correctly page 11.

Adjust the head restraint correctly page 13.

Use the correct child restraint system to protect children in your

vehicle page 46.

The airbag is deployed at high speed in fractions of a second. If you have an

incorrect seating position at the time the airbag is deployed, it could cause

you critical injuries. Therefore, it is essential that all passengers in the vehicle

assume a correct sitting position while travelling.

A sharp braking before an accident may cause a passenger not wearing a seat

belt to be thrown forward into the area of the deploying airbag. In this case,

the inflating airbag may inflic

also applies to children.

Always maintain the greatest

front airbag. This way, the fron

gered, providing their maximu

The most important factors th

dent, the angle of collision an

Whether the airbags are trigge

ation rate resulting from the c

vehicle deceleration occurring

control unit remains below the

and/or curtain airbag will not

damage in a vehicle involved

indication as to why the airba

WARNING

Wearing the seat belt inc tion can lead to critical or fat

All occupants, including c sustain critical or fatal injurie transport all children up to 12 children in the vehicle if they not appropriate for their age

If you are not wearing a se travelling or assume an incor increased risk of injury. This increased if you are struck by

To reduce the risk of injur seat belt properly page 19

Airbag system 31

Safety Fir Technical Data

ger airbag can strike the rear-facing child seat gainst the door, the roof or the backrest.

tances, it is necessary to transport a child in a front passenger seat, it is absolutely essential ng safety measures:

enger airbag page 44, Deactivating

e approved by the child seat manufacturer for seat with front or side airbag.

instructions given by the child seat manufac- fety instructions page 46, Child safety.

ling the child seat, push the front passenger rds so that the greatest possible distance to ag is ensured.

s prevent the front passenger seat from being .

nt passenger seat must be in an upright

g and belt tension device system

itors the airbag and belt tension

ll airbags and belt tension devices in the

ts and wiring connections.

altea_EN Seite 31 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Always properly adjust the front seats.

The danger of fitting a child seat on the front passenger seat

Rear-facing child seats must never be used on the front

passenger seat when the front passenger airbag is enabled.

An enabled front airbag on the front passenger side is potentially a major

danger to a child. The front passenger seat is life threatening to a child if

he/she is transported in a rear-facing child seat. You should always transport

all children up to 12 years of age on the rear seat.

If a rear-facing child seat is secured to the front passenger seat, an inflating

airbag can strike it with such great force that critical or fatal injuries may

result.

Therefore we strongly recommend you to transport children on the rear seats.

That is the safest place for children in the vehicle. Alternatively, the front

passenger airbag can be disabled with a key-operated switch page 44.

When transporting children, use a child seat appropriate to the age and size

of each child page 46.

For those vehicles that do not include a key lock switch to turn the airbag off,

an Authorised Service Centre must be consulted.

WARNING

If a child seat is secured to the front passenger seat, the risk to the child of sustaining critical or fatal injuries in the event of an accident increases.

Never secure a rear-facing child seat to the front passenger seat if the front passenger airbag is enabled. The child can suffer critical or fatal inju- ries when the front passenger airbag is triggered.

An inflating front passen and hurl it with great force a

If, under special circums rear-facing child seat on the that you observe the followi

Disable the front pass airbags*.

The child seat must b use on a front passenger

Follow the installation turer and observe the sa

Before properly instal seat completely backwa the front passenger airb

Ensure that no object pushed completely back

The backrest of the fro position.

Warning lamp for airba

This warning lamp mon

device system.

The warning lamp monitors a

vehicle, including control uni

WARNING (continued) WARNING (continued)

Airbag system32

nd disposal of the airbags

are installed in various places in your vehicle.

m or remove and fit parts of the system when

parts of the airbag system may be damaged.

, in the event of an accident, the airbag inflates

at all.

nts must be observed when the vehicle or

scrapped. The specialist workshops and the

miliar with these requirements.

ut by a professional, or if the airbags are used or fatal injuries is increased. The airbags may in the wrong circumstances.

hing on the steering wheel hub or the soft unit on the passenger side of the dashboard, y them in any way.

ch any objects such as cup holders or tele- aces covering the airbag units.

el or dash panel, you may use only a dry or a r clean the dash panel and the airbag module ining solvents. Solvents cause the surface to triggered, disintegrating plastic parts could

djust, remove or install parts of the airbag

stem or removal and installation of the airbag (such as repairs to the steering wheel) should fied workshop. Qualified workshops have the

ation and qualified personnel.

altea_EN Seite 32 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Monitoring of airbag and belt tension device system

Both the airbag and belt tension device systems operation is constantly

monitored electronically. Each time the ignition is switched on, the warning

lamp lights for several seconds and the display in the instrument panel*

shows AIRBAG / TENSIONER.

The system must be checked when the warning lamp :

does not light up when the ignition is switched on,

after the ignition is switched on, it turns off after 4 seconds,

it turns off and then lights up again after the ignition is switched on,

lights up or flashes while the car is moving.

In the event of a malfunction, the warning lamp remains on continuously. In

addition, depending on the malfunction, a fault message appears in the

display of the combi-instrument for approx. 10 seconds and a short acoustic

signal is given. In this event, you should have a qualified workshop check the

system immediately.

If any of the airbags are de-activated by the Authorised Service Centre, the

indicator lights for several seconds more after the verification and will turn off

if there is no fault.

WARNING

If there is a malfunction, the airbag and belt tension device system cannot properly perform its protective function.

If a malfunction occurred, have the system checked immediately by a qualified workshop. Otherwise, in the event of an accident, the airbag system and belt tension devices may not be triggered, or may not be trig- gered correctly.

Repairs, maintenance a

The parts of the airbag system

If you work on the airbag syste

performing other repair work,

The consequence may be that

incorrectly or does not inflate

The relevant safety requireme

components of the airbag are

Vehicle disposal centres are fa

WARNING

If repairs are not carried o incorrectly, the risk of severe fail to inflate, or could inflate

Do not cover or stick anyt plastic surface of the airbag and do not obstruct or modif

It is important not to atta phone mountings to the surf

To clean the steering whe water-moistened cloth. Neve surface with cleansers conta become porous. If the airbag cause substantial injuries.

Never attempt to repair, a system.

Any work on the airbag sy components for other repairs be performed only by a quali necessary tools, repair inform

Airbag system 33

Safety Fir Technical Data

altea_EN Seite 33 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

We strongly recommend you to go to a qualified workshop for all work on the airbag system.

Never attempt to alter the front bumper or the body.

The airbags provide protection for just one accident; replace them once they have deployed.

WARNING (continued)

Airbag system34

is located in the steering wheel fig. 18 and

ger is located in the instrument panel

ed by the word AIRBAG.

elts, the front airbag system gives the front

on for the head and chest in the event of a

e 37, Safety notes on the frontal airbag

ction of restraining the occupants, the seat

ront passenger in a position where the airbags

ion in a frontal collision.

stitute for seat belts, but it is an integral part

e safety system. Please bear in mind that the

ffectively when the occupants are wearing their

djusted the head restraints properly. Therefore,

e seat belts at all times, not only because this

ntries, but also for your safety page 19,

bag system are:

onitoring system (control unit),

ag with gas generator) for the driver and front

ash panel insert page 31.

s monitored electronically. The airbag warning

onds every time the ignition is switched on

if the warning lamp

ignition is switched on page 31,

ed on, it turns off after 4 seconds,

up again after the ignition is switched on,

he car is moving.

altea_EN Seite 34 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Front airbags

Description of front airbags

The airbag system is not a substitute for the seat belts.

The front airbag for the driver

the airbag for the front passen

fig. 19. Airbags are identifi

In conjunction with the seat b

occupants additional protecti

severe frontal collision pag

system.

In addition to their normal fun

belts also hold the driver and f

can provide maximum protect

The airbag system is not a sub

of the vehicle's overall passiv

airbag system can only work e

seat belts correctly and have a

it is most important to wear th

is required by law in most cou

Brief Introduction.

The main parts of the front air

an electronic control and m

the two front airbags (airb

passenger,

a warning lamp in the d

The airbag system operation i

lamp will light up for a few sec

(self-diagnosis).

There is a fault in the system

does not light up when the

after the ignition is switch

it turns off and then lights

lights up or flashes while t

Fig. 18 Driver airbag located in steering wheel

Fig. 19 Front passenger airbag located in dash panel

Airbag system 35

Safety Fir Technical Data

bags

the risk of head or chest injury.

d so that the airbags for the driver and front

severe frontal collision.

e front, curtain and side airbags may be trig-

, the airbags fill with a propellant gas and

d front passenger fig. 20. The fully deployed

movement of the front occupants and help to

e head and the upper part of the body.

ag allows the controlled escape of the propel-

uts pressure on the bag. Thus, the head and

tected by the airbag. After the collision, the

r the front occupants to see forward.

d extra protection in an accident, the airbags

idly (within thousandth of a second). A fine dust

Fig. 20 Inflated front airbags

altea_EN Seite 35 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

The front airbag system will not be triggered if:

the ignition is switched off,

there is a minor frontal collision,

there is a side collision,

there is a rear-end collision,

the vehicle turns over.

WARNING

The seat belts and airbags can only provide maximum protection if the occupants are seated correctly page 10, Proper sitting position for occupants.

If a fault has occurred in the airbag system, have the system checked immediately by a qualified workshop. Otherwise, during a frontal collision the system may fail to trigger, or not trigger correctly.

Operation of frontal air

Inflated airbags reduce

The airbag system is designe

passenger are triggered in a

In certain types of accident th

gered together.

When the system is triggered

deploy in front of the driver an

airbags cushion the forward

reduce the risk of injury to th

The special design of the airb

lant gas when an occupant p

chest are surrounded and pro

airbag deflates sufficiently fo

In order to provide the desire

have to deploy extremely rap

Airbag system36

. 21 Airbag covers reacting when the front airbags triggered

altea_EN Seite 36 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

may develop when the airbag deploys. This is normal and it is not an indica-

tion of fire in the vehicle.

Airbag covers when the frontal airbags are triggered

The airbag covers fold out of the steering wheel and dash panel when the

driver and front passenger airbags deploy fig. 21. The airbag covers

remain connected to the steering wheel or the dash panel.

Fig are

Airbag system 37

Safety Fir Technical Data

ags

t a substitute for the seat belts.

ated in the driver seat and front passenger seat

side airbags are located in the rear wheel

are identified by the text AIRBAG in the upper

n the rear wheel housing lining.

the side airbag system gives the front seat occu-

or the upper body in the event of a severe side

notes on the operation of the side airbag

rbags reduce the risk of injury to passengers on

the body facing the impact. In addition to their

the occupants in a collision, the seat belts also

Fig. 22 Side airbag in driver seat

altea_EN Seite 37 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Safety notes on the frontal airbag system

If you use airbags correctly, they can considerably reduce the

risk of injury in many kinds of accident.

WARNING

It is important for the driver and front passenger to keep a distance of at least 25 cm from the steering wheel or dash panel. If the minimum distance is not observed then the airbags do not correctly protect the vehicle occupants; risk of fatal injuries! In addition, the front seats and head restraints must always be positioned correctly for the height of the occupant.

If you are not wearing a seat belt, if you lean forward or to the side while travelling or assume an incorrect sitting position, there is a substantially increased risk of injury. This increased risk of injury will be further increased if you are struck by an inflating airbag.

Never let a child travel on the front seat without an appropriate restraint system. If the airbag is triggered in an accident, children can sustain serious or fatal injuries from the airbag as it inflates page 46, Child safety.

The deployment space between the front passengers and the airbags must not in any case be occupied by other passenger, pets and objects.

The airbags provide protection for just one accident; replace them once they have deployed.

It is also important not to attach any objects such as cup holders or telephone mountings to the surfaces covering the airbag units.

Do not attempt to modify components of the airbag system in any way.

Side airbags*

Description of side airb

The airbag system is no

The front side airbags are loc

backrests fig. 22. The rear

housing lining. The locations

region of the backrests and i

Together with the seat belts,

pants additional protection f

collision page 40, Safety

system.

In a side collision, the side ai

the front seats to the areas of

normal function of protecting

Airbag system38

door panels have been removed or if the ly fitted.

the loudspeakers in the door panels have les left by the loudspeakers have been

enings are closed or covered if loudspeakers in the interior door panels.

e doors should be made in a qualified author-

s can only provide maximum protection if the ly page 10, Proper sitting position for

he airbag system, have the system checked orkshop. Otherwise, during a side collision, r, or not trigger correctly.

altea_EN Seite 38 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

hold the passengers in the front seats and the outer rear seats in a position

where the side airbags can provide maximum protection.

The airbag system is not a substitute for seat belts, but it is an integral part

of the vehicle's overall passive safety system. Please bear in mind that the

airbag system can only work effectively when the occupants are wearing their

seat belts. Therefore, it is most important to wear the seat belts at all times,

not only because this is required by law in most countries, but also for your

safety page 19, Brief Introduction.

The side airbag system will not be triggered if:

the ignition is switched off,

there is a minor side collision,

there is a frontal collision,

there is a rear-end collision,

the vehicle turns over.

The main parts of the airbag system are:

an electronic control and monitoring system (control unit),

The front side airbags in the backrests of the front seats and the rear side

airbags in the lining of the rear wheel housing.

a warning lamp in the dash panel insert page 31.

The airbag system operation is monitored electronically. The airbag warning

lamp will light up for approx. 4 seconds every time the ignition is switched on

(self-diagnosis).

WARNING

In a side-on collision, the side airbags will not work, if the sensors do not correctly measure the pressure increase on the interior of the doors, due to air escaping through the areas with holes or openings in the door panel.

Never drive the vehicle if the interior panels have been removed.

Never drive if the interior panels have not been correct

Never drive the vehicle if been removed, unless the ho correctly closed.

Always check that the op or other equipment are fitted

Any work carried out to th ised workshop.

The seat belts and airbag occupants are seated correct occupants.

If a fault has occurred in t immediately by a qualified w the system may fail to trigge

WARNING (continued)

Airbag system 39

Safety Fir Technical Data

ag allows the controlled escape of the propel-

uts pressure on the bag. Thus, the head and

tected by the airbag.

altea_EN Seite 39 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Function of side airbags

Inflated airbags can reduce the risk of head or chest injury in

many side impact collisions.

In some side collisions the side airbag is triggered on the impact side of the

vehicle fig. 23.

In certain types of accident the front, curtain and side airbags may be trig-

gered together.

When the system is triggered, the airbag is filled with propellant gas.

In order to provide the desired extra protection in an accident, the airbags

have to deploy extremely rapidly (within thousandth of a second). A fine dust

may develop when the airbag deploys. This is normal and it is not an indica-

tion of fire in the vehicle.

The fully deployed airbags cushion the movement of the occupants of the

front seats and the outer rear seats and help to reduce the risk of injury to the

upper body.

The special design of the airb

lant gas when an occupant p

chest are surrounded and pro

Fig. 23 Inflated side airbag on left side of vehicle

Airbag system40

incorrect sitting position, they expose them- f injury in the event of an accident. This is ild is travelling on the front passenger seat gered in an accident; this could have critical us injury or death page 46, Child safety.

ag system or removal and installation of the repairs (such as removal of the front seat) a qualified workshop. Otherwise, faults may m operation.

components of the airbag system in any way.

s are managed through sensors located in the ensure the correct functioning of the side and rs nor the door panels should be modified in kers). If the front door is damaged, the airbag

ly. All work carried out on the front door must hop.

altea_EN Seite 40 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Safety notes on the operation of the side airbag system

If airbags are used correctly, they can considerably reduce the

risk of injury in side impact collisions.

WARNING

If you do not wear a seat belt, if you lean forward, or are not seated correctly while the vehicle is in motion, you are at a greater risk of injury if the side airbag system is triggered in an accident.

In order for the side airbags to provide their maximum protection, the prescribed sitting position must always be maintained with seat belts fastened while travelling.

Occupants of the outer seats must never carry any objects or pets in the deployment space between them and the airbags, or allow children or other passengers to travel in this position. It is also important not to attach any accessories (such as cup holders) to the doors. This would impair the protection offered by the side airbags.

The built-in coat hooks should be used only for lightweight clothing. Do not leave any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets.

Great forces, such as hard blows or kicks, must not be exerted upon the backrest bolster because the system may be damaged. In this case, the side airbags would not be triggered.

Under no circumstances should protective covers be fitted over the driver seat or front passenger seat unless the covers have been expressly approved for use in your vehicle. Because the airbag is triggered from the side of the backrest, the use of non-approved seat covers would obstruct the side airbag, seriously reducing the airbag's effectiveness page 218, Accessories, replacement of parts and modifications.

Any damage to the original seat upholstery or around the seams of the side airbag units must be repaired immediately by a qualified workshop.

The airbags provide protection for just one accident; replace them once they have deployed.

When children assume an selves to an increased risk o particularly the case if the ch and the airbag system is trig consequences including serio

Any work on the side airb airbag components for other should only be performed by occur during the airbag syste

Do not attempt to modify

The side and head airbag interior of the front doors. To head airbags neither the doo any way (e.g. fitting loudspea system may not work correct be made in a qualified works

WARNING (continued)

Airbag system 41

Safety Fir Technical Data

untries, but also for your safety page 19,

airbag system are:

monitoring system (control unit),

gs with gas generator) for the driver, front

n the rear seats,

dash panel insert page 31.

is monitored electronically.

ll not be triggered

ff,

g. 24 Location of left curtain airbag

altea_EN Seite 41 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Curtain airbags

Description of curtain airbags

The airbag system is not a substitute for the seat belts.

The curtain airbags are located on both sides in the interior above the doors

fig. 24 and are identified with the text AIRBAG.

In conjunction with the seat belts, the curtain airbag system gives the occu-

pants additional protection for the head and upper body in the event of a

severe side collision page 42, Safety notes on the operation of the

curtain airbag system.

The airbag system is not a substitute for seat belts, but it is an integral part

of the vehicle's overall passive safety system. Please bear in mind that the

airbag system can only work effectively when the occupants are wearing their

seat belts correctly and have adjusted the head restraints properly. Therefore,

it is most important to wear the seat belts at all times, not only because this

is required by law in most co

Brief Introduction.

The main parts of the curtain

an electronic control and

the curtain airbags (airba

passenger and passengers o

a warning lamp in the

The airbag system operation

The curtain airbag system wi

the ignition is switched o

Fi

Airbag system42

e curtain airbag is triggered on the impact side

e front, side and curtain airbags may be trig-

the airbag is filled with propellant gas. In the

rs the side windows and door pillars.

extra protection in an accident, the airbags

ly (within thousandth of a second). A fine dust

deploys. This is normal and it is not an indica-

hion the movement of the front occupants and

y to the upper body.

ag allows the controlled escape of the propel-

ts pressure on the bag. Thus, the head and

tected by the airbag.

ration of the curtain airbag system

tly, they can considerably reduce the

ds of accident.

gs to provide their maximum protection, the ust always be maintained with seat belts

ad air bag must be disconnected in those ger compartment separation screen. See an make this adjustment.

altea_EN Seite 42 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

there is a frontal collision,

there is a rear-end collision,

if the vehicle rolls,

during a minor side collision,

WARNING

If a fault has occurred in the airbag system, have the system checked imme- diately by a qualified workshop. Otherwise there is a danger that during a collision, the system may fail to trigger, or not trigger correctly.

Function of curtain airbags

Fully inflated airbags reduce the risk of head or chest injury in

a side collision.

During some side collisions th

of the vehicle fig. 25.

In certain types of accident th

gered together.

When the system is triggered,

process, the curtain bag cove

In order to provide the desired

have to deploy extremely rapid

may develop when the airbag

tion of fire in the vehicle.

The fully deployed airbags cus

help to reduce the risk of injur

The special design of the airb

lant gas when an occupant pu

chest are surrounded and pro

Safety notes on the ope

If you use airbags correc

risk of injury in many kin

WARNING

In order for the side airba prescribed sitting position m fastened while travelling.

For safety reasons, the he vehicles fitted with a passen Authorised Service Centre to

Fig. 25 Deployed curtain airbags

Airbag system 43

Safety Fir Technical Data

altea_EN Seite 43 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

There must be no other persons, animals or objects between the occu- pants of the outer seats and the deployment space of the curtain airbags so that the curtain airbag can deploy without restriction and provide the greatest possible protection. Therefore, sun blinds which have not been expressly approved for use in your vehicle may not be attached to the side windows page 218, Accessories, replacement of parts and modifica- tions.

The built-in coat hooks should be used only for lightweight clothing. Do not leave any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets. Please, do not hang the clothes on coat hangers.

The airbags provide protection for just one accident; replace them once they have deployed.

Any work on the curtain airbag system or removal and installation of the airbag components for other repairs (such as removal of the roof lining) should only be performed by a qualified workshop. Otherwise, faults may occur during the airbag system operation.

Do not attempt to modify components of the airbag system in any way.

The side and head airbags are managed through sensors located in the interior of the front doors. To ensure the correct functioning of the side and head airbags neither the doors nor the door panels should be modified in any way (e.g. fitting loudspeakers). If the front door is damaged, the airbag system may not work correctly. All work carried out on the front door must be made in a qualified workshop.

WARNING (continued)

Airbag system44

g is deactivated, this means that only the

d. All the other airbags in the vehicle

airbag

in the key operated switch in the glove

fig. 26.

lamp OFF on the instrument panel

en the ignition is switched on .

irbag

in the key-operated switch in the glove

fig. 26.

Fig. 27 Warning lamp for deactivated passenger airbag in centre console

altea_EN Seite 44 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Deactivating airbags*

Disabling front passenger airbag

If you fit a rear-facing child seat to the front passenger seat,

the front passenger airbag must be de-activated.

When the passenger airba

frontal airbag is deactivate

remain functional.

Disabling front passenger

Switch the ignition off.

Turn the ignition switch

box to the position OFF

Check that the warning

fig. 27 remains lit wh

Enabling front passenger a

Switch the ignition off.

Turn the ignition switch

box to the position ON

Fig. 26 In the glovebox: key for enabling and disa- bling front passenger airbag

Airbag system 45

Safety Fir Technical Data

er the front passenger airbag will deploy all your passengers of this.

key to activate / deactivate the passenger front ront airbag will be activated / deactivated. The on the passenger side will remain active.

altea_EN Seite 45 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Check that the warning lamp on the instrument panel does

page 44, fig. 27 not light up when the ignition is switched on

.

WARNING

The driver is responsible for the proper position of the key-operated switch.

You should deactivate the front passenger airbag only when, in excep- tional cases, you have to use a rear-facing child seat page 46, Child safety

Never install a child seat facing backwards (or rear-facing) on the front passenger seat unless the front passenger airbag has been disabled. This represents a risk of fatal injuries to the child! However, if it is necessary in exceptional circumstances to transport a child in a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat, you must always disable the front passenger airbag.

As soon as the child seat is no longer needed on the front passenger seat, enable the front passenger airbag again.

Only deactivate the passenger airbag when the ignition is off, other- wise a fault may occur in the airbag system, this will create a danger that in case of an accident, the airbag does not deploy properly or does not deploy at all.

When the passenger airbag is deactivated, if the warning lamp AIRBAG OFF is not continuously lit up when the front passenger airbag is disabled, there may be a fault in the airbag system:

Have the airbag system inspected immediately by a qualified work- shop.

Do not use a child seat on the front passenger seat! The front passenger airbag could be triggered despite the fact that there is a fault in the system and, as a result, a child could sustain serious or fatal inju- ries.

It is predictable wheth during an accident! Warn

When using the ignition airbag, only the passenger f side airbag and head airbag

WARNING (continued)

Child safety46

together with the on-board documentation,

instructions manual.

altea_EN Seite 46 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Child safety

Brief introduction

Introduction

Statistics show that children are generally safer on the rear

seat than on the front passenger seat.

We recommend that children under 12 years of age are transported on the

rear seats. Children travelling on the rear seat must use a child restraint

system or the seat belts provided, depending on their age, height and

weight. For safety reasons, the child restraint system should be installed in

the centre of the rear seat or behind the front passenger's seat.

The physical laws involved and the forces acting in a collision apply also to

children. page 21, Why wear seat belts?. But unlike adults, children do

not have muscle and bone structures fully developed. This means that chil-

dren are subject to a greater risk of injury.

To reduce this risk, children must always use special child restraint systems

when travelling in the vehicle.

We recommend the use of child safety products from the SEAT Genuine Acces-

sories Program, which includes systems for all ages made by Peke2).

These systems have been especially designed and approved, complying with

the ECE-R44. regulation.

Follow the manufacturer's instructions and observe any statutory require-

ments when installing and using child seats. Always read and observe

page 47, Safety notes on using child seats.

We recommend you to include

the manufacturer's Child Seat

2) Not for all countries

Child safety 47

Safety Fir Technical Data

bies on your lap, this can result in potentially

transported in a vehicle without being properly eel on a seat while travelling. In an accident,

ugh the vehicle, causing possibly fatal injuries her passengers.

proper sitting position when the car is moving, greater risk of injury in the event of sudden accident. This is particularly important if the t passenger seat and the airbag system is trig- could cause serious injury or even death.

protect your child!

ised child alone on a child seat or in the

nditions, it may become extremely hot or cold be fatal.

an 1.5 metres tall must not wear a normal seat t system, as this could cause injuries to the uring a sudden braking manoeuvre or in an

bbing to become twisted or jammed, or to rub

lts can cause injuries even in a minor collision uvres.

aximum protection only when the belt web is 24, Seat belts.

py a child seat page 48, Child seats.

altea_EN Seite 47 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Safety notes on using child seats

Proper use of child seats substantially reduces the risk of

injury in an accident!

As the driver, you are responsible for any children you transport in

your vehicle.

Protect your children by properly using appropriate child seats

page 48.

Always ensure that the belt webbing is properly positioned

according to the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the

child seat.

When travelling, do not allow children to distract you from traffic.

Take breaks regularly during long trips. Take a break at least

every two hours.

WARNING

Never install a child seat facing backwards (or rear-facing) on the front passenger seat unless the front passenger airbag has been disabled. This could lead to a risk of potentially fatal injuries to the child! However, if it is necessary, in exceptional cases, to transport a child in the front passenger seat, the front passenger airbag must always be disabled page 44, Deactivating airbags*. If the passenger seat has a height adjustment option, move it to the highest position.

For those vehicles that do not include a key lock switch to turn the airbag off, an Authorised Service Centre must be consulted.

All passengers, especially children, must assume the proper sitting position and be properly belted in while travelling.

Never hold children or ba fatal injuries to the child!

Never allow a child to be secured, or to stand up or kn the child could be flung thro to themselves and to the ot

If children assume an im they expose themselves to braking manoeuvre or in an child is travelling on the fron gered in an accident; as this

A suitable child seat can

Never leave an unsuperv vehicle.

Depending on weather co inside the vehicle. This can

Children who are less th belt without a child restrain abdominal and neck areas d accident.

Do not allow the belt we on any sharp edges.

Incorrectly worn seat be or in sudden braking manoe

The seat belt provides m properly positioned page

Only one child may occu

WARNING (continued)

Child safety48

ats

a correctly adjusted seat belt can

child.

t 9 months old and 10 kg in weight the most

aring in the illustration fig. 28.

ut 18 months old and 13 kg in weight the most

aring in the illustration.

tructions and observe any statutory require-

ing child seats.

together with the on-board documentation,

instructions manual.

ormation and warnings concerning the use of notes on using child seats on page 47.

Fig. 28 A group 0 rear- facing child seat fitted on the rear seat.

altea_EN Seite 48 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Child seats

Categorisation of child seats into groups

Use only child seats that are officially approved and suitable

for the child.

Child seats are subject to the regulation ECE-R 44. ECE-R. It means that:

Economic Commission for Europe Regulation

The child seats are grouped into 5 categories:

Group 0: Children up to 10 kg

Group 0+: Children up to 13 kg

Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg

Group 2: from 15 to 25 kg

Group 3: from 22 to 36 kg

Child seats that have been tested and approved under the ECE R 44 standard

bear the test mark on the seat (the letter E in a circle with the test number

below it).

Group 0 and 0+ child se

A suitable child seat and

help you to protect your

Group 0: For babies from abou

suitable seats are those appe

Group 0+: For babies from abo

suitable seats are those appe

Follow the manufacturer's ins

ments when installing and us

We recommend you to include

the manufacturer's Child Seat

WARNING

Read and always observe inf child seats in Safety

Child safety 49

Safety Fir Technical Data

ats

d a correctly adjusted seat belt can

r child.

tructions and observe any statutory require-

ing child seats.

e together with the on-board documentation,

t instructions manual.

weighing between 15 and 25 kg are best

ats together with properly adjusted seat belts.

eighing between 22 and 36 kg but less than 1.5

by seat cushions with head restraints together

fig. 30.

Fig. 30 Forward-facing child seat installed on rear seat.

altea_EN Seite 49 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Group 1 child seats

A suitable child seat and a correctly adjusted seat belt can

help you to protect your child.

Child seats using the ISOFIX system or seats in which the child faces the

rear of the car are most appropriate for babies and small children weighing

between 9 and 18 kg.

Follow the manufacturer's instructions and observe any statutory require-

ments when installing and using child seats.

We recommend you to include together with the on-board documentation,

the manufacturer's Child Seat instructions manual.

WARNING

Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the use of child seats in Safety notes on using child seats on page 47.

Group 2 and 3 child se

A suitable child seat an

help you to protect you

Follow the manufacturer's ins

ments when installing and us

We recommend you to includ

the manufacturer's Child Sea

Group 2 child seats

Children under 7 years of age

protected by group 2 child se

Group 3 child seats

Children over 7 years of age w

metres tall are best protected

with properly worn seat belts

Fig. 29 A category 1 forward-facing child seat fitted on the rear seat.

Child safety50

altea_EN Seite 50 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

WARNING

The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie approximately on the centre of the shoulder, never across the neck or the arm. The seat belt must lie close to the upper part of the body. The lap belt part must lie across the pelvis, not across the stomach, and always fit closely. Pull the belt tight if necessary to take up any slack page 24, Seat belts.

Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the use of child seats in Safety notes on using child seats on page 47.

Child safety 51

Safety Fir Technical Data

n must be secured in the vehicle with a r age, weight and size.

facing backwards (or rear-facing) on the front ront passenger airbag has been disabled. This the child! However, if it is necessary, in excep- hild in the front passenger seat, the front ys be disabled page 44, Deactivating t to its highest position, in case it has this

information and warnings concerning the use ty notes on using child seats on page 47.

h the ISOFIX system

FIX system can be secured quickly,

rear outer seats using the system

Fig. 31 ISOFIX securing rings

altea_EN Seite 51 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Securing child seats

Ways to secure a child seat

A child seat can be secured differently on the rear seat and on

the front passenger seat.

You can secure a child seat to the rear seat or front passenger seat in the

following ways:

Child seats in groups 0 to 3 can be secured with a seat belt.

Child seats for groups 0, 0+ and 1 with the ISOFIX system can be

secured without fastening seat belts, using the ISOFIX and page 51

securing rings.

U: Suitable for universal approved restraining systems for use in this age

category (universal retention systems are those fitted using the adult

seat belt).

*: Move the passenger seat as far to rear as possible, as high as possible

and always deactivate the airbag.

L: Suitable for retention systems using the ISOFIX anchors

WARNING

When travelling, childre restraint system suitable fo

Never install a child seat passenger seat unless the f could cause fatal injuries to tional cases, to transport a c passenger airbag must alwa airbags* and move the sea adjustment.

Read and always observe of child seats in Safe

Securing child seat wit

The child seat with ISO

easily and safely on the

Category Weight

Seat locations

Front passen- ger

Rear outer Rear centre

Group 0 <10 kg U* U/L U

Group 0+ <13 kg U* U/L U

Group 1 9-18 kg U* U/L U

Group 2 / 3 15-36 kg U* U U

Child safety52

altea_EN Seite 52 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

When removing or fitting the child seat, please be sure to follow the

manufacturer's instructions.

Move the seat as far to rear as it will go.

Press the child seat onto the ISOFIX retaining rings until the

child seat can be heard to engage securely.

Pull on both sides of the child seat to ensure that it is secure.

Two ISOFIX retaining rings are fitted on each rear seat. In some vehicles, the

rings are secured to the seat frame and, in others, they are secured to the rear

floor. The access to ISOFIX rings is between the rear back rest and the seat.

Child seats with ISOFIX mountings are available in your Authorised Service

Centres.

WARNING

The retaining rings are designed only for use with ISOFIX child seats.

Never secure child seats without the ISOFIX system, retaining belts or objects to the fastening rings this can result in potentially fatal injuries to the child.

Ensure that the child seat is secured correctly to the ISOFIX anchors.

53

Safety Fir Technical Data

altea_EN Seite 53 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

54

Fig. 3

altea_EN Seite 54 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

2 Instrument panel

Cockpit 55

Safety Fir Technical Data

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

tivated front passenger airbag . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

nsole:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

nt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

itch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

lever* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

losing the front windows . . . . . . . . .

157

161

136

44

30

139

178

144

95

195

82

185

148

130

174

183

118

169

167

226

108

altea_EN Seite 55 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Operating instructions

Cockpit

Overview

Overview of the instrument panel

This overview will help you to familiarise yourself with the

controls and displays.

Door release lever

Light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Lighting control for instrument and control lighting . . . . . . . .

Headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Air vent

Turn signal and main beam lever and cruise control system* .

Controls on the steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Dash panel:

Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Indication lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Horn (works only when the ignition is on)/ and driver front

airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Windscreen wiper and windscreen wash lever and operation of

the multi-function display* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Left seat heating button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Controls for

Heating* and ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Climatic* . . . . . . . . .

Climatronic* . . . . . .

Radio/Navigator*

Right seat heating butto

Indication lamp for deac

Front passenger airbag

Glove compartment leve

Gear shift lever . . . . . .

Cup holder compartmen

Controls on the centre co

Central locking . . . .

ESP . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tyre pressure control*

Park Pilot* . . . . . . . .

Cigarette lighter / Soc

Wing mirror adjustme

Start-Stop* . . . . . . .

Handbrake . . . . . . . . . .

Hazard warning light sw

Pedals

Ignition lock . . . . . . . . .

Steering column control

Handle for releasing the

Button for opening and c

A1

A2 113

A3 117

A4 117

A5

A6 120, 188

A7 87

A8

57

61

77

A9

30

A10

125, 63

A11 136

A12

155

A13

A14

A15

A16

A17

A18

A19

A20

A21

A22

A23

A24

A25

A26

A27

Cockpit56

altea_EN Seite 56 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Safety switch* for the rear windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Control* for opening and closing the rear windows . . . . . . . . .

Note Some of the items of equipment listed here are fitted only on certain

models/model years or are optional extras.

A28 108

A29 108

Cockpit 57

Safety Fir Technical Data

g. 33 Detailed view of instrument panel: Dash panel

altea_EN Seite 57 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Instruments

Instrument overview

The instruments display the vehicle operating status.

Detailed view of instrument panel: Dash panel

Fuel gauge page 58

Multi-function display page 61

Engine coolant temperature gauge page 58

Rev counter page 59

Time adjustment button / trip recorder reset button page 59

Speedometer page 59

Fi

A1

A2

A3

A4

A5

A6

Cockpit58

ture display

ngine coolant temperature.

heavy engine loads fig. 35.

the needle should be in the middle section of

y also rise when the engine is working hard,

peratures. This is no cause for concern as long

light up and no warning* text appears on the

, fig. 49 will light up if the needle is in the

arning appears on the dash panel display4).

e model.

Fig. 35 Dash panel: engine coolant tempera- ture gauge

A2

altea_EN Seite 58 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Fuel gauge and reserve indicator

Dash panel: fuel gauge

The fuel tank has a capacity of approx. 55 litres.

When the needle reaches the reserve zone fig. 34 (arrow), the warning

lamp will light and an acoustic signal will sound reminding the driver to refuel. At this point there are still about 7 litres of fuel in the tank.

The following text appears on the dash panel display3) PLEASE REFUEL [XXX]*

Engine coolant tempera

This gauge shows the e

Needle in cold zone

Avoid high engine speeds and

Needle in normal zone

In normal driving conditions,

the scale. The temperature ma

especially at high outside tem

as the warning lamp does not

dash panel display.

Needle in warning zone

The warning lamp* page 77

warning zone. The following w

3) Depending on the version of the model.

Fig. 34 Dash panel: fuel gauge

4) Depending on the version of th

AA

AB

AC

Cockpit 59

Safety Fir Technical Data

nvironment rs early will help you to save fuel and minimise

d with a digital odometer and a trip counter, in

display.

the instructions shown on page 200 should

k*

ted in the dash panel display.

page 57, fig. 33 clockwise until the

our. The hour will flash. To change the

.

lockwise to the second click to set the

ill flash. To change the minutes, press the

A5

altea_EN Seite 59 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Stop the car and switch off the engine. Check the coolant level page 233

.

Even if the coolant level is correct do not continue driving. You should obtain

technical assistance.

WARNING

When working in the engine compartment, always observe the safety warn- ings page 226.

Caution Accessories in front of the air inlet reduce the cooling effect of the coolant. At

high outside temperatures and high engine loads, there is a risk of the

engine overheating.

Rev counter

The rev. counter displays the engine speed in revolutions per

minute.

The start of the red zone page 57, fig. 33 indicates the maximum

engine speed operating at service temperature. However, it is advisable to

change up a into a higher gear, move the selector lever to D or lift your foot

off the accelerator before the needle reaches the red zone.

Caution The rev counter needle must never enter the red zone on the scale. Risk of

engine damage.

For the sake of the e Changing up into higher gea

engine noise.

Speedometer

The speedometer is equippe

addition to a service intervals

During the running-in period,

be followed.

Setting the digital cloc

The digital clock is loca

Turn the setting knob first click to set the h

hour, press the button

Turn the setting knob c

minutes. The minutes w

button.

A4

Cockpit60

den warning buzz is heard, lamp lights up

is means that there is a fault in the LPG system.

er, press the switch . Take the vehicle

heck the LPG system.

inflammable substance. It may cause severe

avoid any risk of fire or explosion.

in a closed area (for example in a garage), ate ventilation, either natural or mechanical, vent of a leak.

. 36 Centre console: gas system control warning ts and switch.

A2

GAS A1

altea_EN Seite 60 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

LPG system*

LPG gauge

LPG system filler level display

The LPG tank in the spare wheel well has a capacity of 39 litres at an

outside temperature of 15C. page 221, Refuelling with LPG.

The level of LPG in the tank is shown by the five control lights fig. 36

and . It varies with the outside temperatures.

When the LPG tank is full, the blue lights come on and as the level goes

down the blue lights go out. When the level reaches the reserve, the lamp,

, comes on.

When the LPG tank is empty, a long warning buzz is heard. Warning lamp

comes on and warning lamps flash slowly. To switch off the warning

buzzer, press the switch . Refill with LPG at the earliest opportunity.

If while driving with LPG, a sud

and lamps flash quickly, th

To switch off the warning buzz

to a specialised workshop to c

WARNING

LPG is a highly explosive and burns and other injury.

Due care must be taken to

When parking the vehicle make sure that there is adequ to neutralise the LPG in the e

Fig ligh

AA

AB

AA

AB

A2

AA

GAS A1

AA

Cockpit 61

Safety Fir Technical Data

the dash panel

ng or information texts)

panel shows, amongst other things,

corder as well as the selector lever

age 59. On the right of the display: Selector

the automatic gearbox*. The current position of

gear which is engaged (for Tiptronic)* is high-

le service interval display*.

Fig. 37 Detail of the dash panel insert: screen with different indicators

altea_EN Seite 61 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Note The values shown in the average fuel consumption and the fuel remaining

displays on the MFA display 5) on the dash panel insert are approximate value

only.

Please check the fuel level on the petrol tank fuel level indicator on the

dash panel page 58.

If frequent short journeys are made, especially when the outside temper-

ature is low, the vehicle will tend to run on petrol more often than on LPG.

Therefore, the petrol tank may empty before the LPG tank.

Digital display in

Display (without warni

The display in the dash

the mileage and trip re

position.

Digital clock display p

lever position display for

the selector lever or the

lighted.

Ambient temperature.

Distance display or flexib

5) Optional equipment

A1

A2

A3

Cockpit62

play*

ve fuel.

el. If you are driving in the correct gear, a dot

display. If you are not in the correct gear, an

ear display indicating whether you should

ice Interval Display

isplay registers the total amount of distance

rs the short journeys. The last digit indicates

ecorder counter may be reset by holding down

ig. 33 for a few seconds.

Fig. 39 Gear display

A6

altea_EN Seite 62 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Displayed categories*

The display on the dash panel shows the mileage and trip

recorder as well as the selector lever position.

Clock: Setting the time. On the right of the display: Selector lever posi-

tion display for the automatic gearbox*. The current position of the

selector lever or the gear which is engaged (for Tiptronic) is highlighted.

There are optional and automatic displays in this field.

Optional indicators: e.g. those on the multi-function display (MFD)

Automatic indicators: Information texts and warnings.

Menus providing further information and which can be used to make

diverse settings are also shown: Dash panel menus

Ambient temperature.

Distance display or flexible service interval display.

Recommended gear dis

This display helps to sa

Use the gear display to save fu

will be shown next to the gear

arrow will appear next to the g

change up or down.

Mileage display or Serv

Distance display

The left-hand counter in the d

covered by the vehicle.

The right-hand counter registe

steps of 100 metres. The trip r

the reset button page 57, f

Fig. 38 Digital display in the dash panel

A1

A2

A3

A4

Cockpit 63

Safety Fir Technical Data

tion display (MFD)*

lay (MFD) shows you information on

nsumption.

Fig. 40 Rocker buttons A and B. Steering wheel controls.

Fig. 41 Digital display in the dash panel

altea_EN Seite 63 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Service interval display

A Service pre-warning will appear in the mileage displays if a service is due

soon. A spanner symbol appears and the display km with the distance

that can be driven until the next service appointment is due. The display will

change after approximately 10 seconds. A clock symbol appears and the

number of days until the service appointment should be carried out. The

following message is shown in the dash panel display: SERV. IN... KM OR... DAYS. The service message will disappear approximately 20 seconds after

the ignition is switched on or the engine is running. The normal display can

be resumed by pressing the reset button on the trip counter or by pressing the

rocker switch of the MFI fig. 40 .

With the ignition switched on, you can call up the current service message by

pressing the trip counter reset knob for 2 seconds.

An overdue service is indicated by a minus sign in front of the mileage or day

information.

Display with multi-func

The multi-function disp

the journey and fuel co

AB

Cockpit64

nction display (MFD)*

llowing displays in the multi-function display

switch fig. 42 on the windscreen wiper

Fig. 42 Rocker buttons A and B. Steering wheel controls.

Fig. 43 Digital dash panel display: average fuel consumption indi- cator.

AB

altea_EN Seite 64 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

The multi-function system uses two automatic memories: 1 - Actual memory and 2 - Total memory. The selected memory will be shown

in the upper right-hand corner of the display.

Selecting a memory

When the ignition is on, briefly press button page 63, fig. 40

on the windscreen wiper lever to change from one memory to

another or press button on the steering wheel controls

page 63, fig. 40.

Resetting a memory

Select the memory that you would like to reset.

Hold down button on the windscreen wiper lever or button

on the steering wheel controls for at least 2 seconds.

The trip memory 1 collects the travel and consumption rates from the

moment the ignition is switched on until it is switched off. If the journey is

continued within two hours of switching off the ignition, the new values will

be added to the existing trip recorder memory. The memory will automatically

be deleted if the journey is interrupted for more than two hours.

The total memory 2 collects the trip data for any number of individual jour-

neys (even if the ignition is switched off for longer than two hours) up to a

total of 19 hours and 59 minutes travel time or 1999 km distance travelled.

The memory will automatically be deleted if one of the named values is

reached.

Displays in the multi-fu

You can switch between the fo

(MFD) by operating the rocker

lever.

AA

AA

AA AA

Cockpit 65

Safety Fir Technical Data

sing the figures for tank content and current fuel

ar the vehicle can travel using the same condi-

l consumption

n will be shown page 64, fig. 43 after a

0 metres has been travelled. Dashes will appear

The display will be updated every 5 seconds

. The amount of fuel used will not be shown.

fuel consumption

rent fuel consumption in litre/km whilst the

hour when the vehicle is in a stationary position

e how your driving style affects fuel consump-

ends from -45C to +58C. At temperatures

al symbol is displayed and a warning sounds

re than 20 km/h (ice warning). This symbol will

d remains lit until the exterior temperature rises

ready lit.

speed, enter the speed indicator mode and

the display remembers the indicated speed. If

ed, a warning text is displayed on the screen 6)

.

ressing the button (Reset).

ion, the message on the screen may vary and may be

speed indication or by a speed message.

AA

altea_EN Seite 65 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Memory displays

Driving speed

Journey duration

Average speed

Distance

Distance to empty (the distance you can travel with the remaining fuel)

Average fuel consumption

Current fuel consumption

Ambient temperature display

Speed warning

km/h - Driving speed

Driving speed is digitally shown on the display.

min - Journey duration

The display shows the amount of time which has elapsed since the ignition

was switched on.

The maximum display value in both memories is 19 hours and 59 minutes.

The memory will automatically be deleted once this value has been reached.

km/h - Average speed

The average speed will be shown after running a distance of approximately

100 metres. Dashes will appear in the display until that time. The display will

be updated every 5 seconds while the vehicle is in motion.

km - Distance travelled

The display shows the distance travelled since the ignition was switched on.

The maximum display value in both memories is 1,999 km. The memory will

automatically be deleted once this value has been reached.

Km - Fuel range

The fuel range is calculated u

consumption. It shows how f

tions as a reference.

litre/100 km - Average fue

The average fuel consumptio

distance of approximately 10

in the display until that time.

while the vehicle is in motion

ltr/100 km or ltr/hr - Current

The display will show the cur

vehicle is in motion or in litre/

with the engine running.

Using this display you can se

tion page 202.

Ambient temperature display

The measurement margin ext

lower than +4C, an ice cryst

if the vehicle is moving at mo

flash for about 10 seconds an

above +4C or 6C if it was al

Set speed indicator

When driving at the required

press the button (Reset),

the indicated speed is exceed

and a warning signal sounds

This may be deactivated by p

6) Depending on the model vers

represented by flashing of the

AA

Cockpit66

warning or information texts, faults are indi-

ng lamps.

y 1 (red)

he warning lamp will flash or light up and will

ible warnings. This is a danger warning. Stop

ne. Check the fault and correct it. Obtain profes-

.

etected at the same time, the symbols will be

or about 2 seconds at a time and will continue

display for the duration of a priority 1 warning

g reports (red)

ith the warning text STOP BRAKE FLUID AKE FAULT SERVICE MANUAL.

e warning text STOP SEE COOLANT SERVICE

l with the warning text STOP ENGINE OIL UAL.

y 2 (yellow)

e warning lamp lights up, and is accompanied

nction should be checked as soon as possible.

altea_EN Seite 66 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

The speed may be altered using the rocker switch in steps of 5 km/h

within 5 seconds of the initial memory value.

WARNING

There could be black ice on the road surface even if the snowflake symbol is not shown. You should, for this reason, not rely exclusively on this display - Risk of accident!

Note When the vehicle is stationary or travelling at very low speeds, the tempera-

ture displayed may be slightly higher than the actual ambient temperature as

a result of the heat radiated from the engine.

Warning or information text in the display

Faults are shown in the display with warning lamps and

warning/information reports.

The system runs a check on certain components and functions when the igni-

tion is switched on and while the vehicle is moving. Functional faults are indi-

cated by symbols with warnings and information texts in the display. An

audible warning is given in certain cases.

Warning symbols

There are red warning symbols (priority 1) and yellow warning symbols

(priority 2)

Information text

In addition to warning messages given on a fault, you will receive information

in the display on procedures or will be asked to carry out certain tasks.

Note In the case of screens without

cated exclusively by the warni

Warning reports, Priorit

If one of these faults occurs, t

be accompanied by three aud the car and switch off the engi

sional assistance if necessary

If several priority 1 faults are d

displayed one after the other f

until the fault is corrected.

No menus will be shown in the

report.

Examples of priority 1 warnin

Brake system symbol w

SERVICE MANUAL or STOP BR

Coolant symbol with th

MANUAL.

Engine oil pressure symbo

PRESSURE LOW! SERVICE MAN

Warning reports, Priorit

If one of these faults occurs, th

by one audible warning. The fu

AB

Cockpit 67

Safety Fir Technical Data

altea_EN Seite 67 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

If several priority 2 warning reports are detected at the same time, the

symbols are displayed one after the other for about 2 seconds at a time. After

a set time, the information text will disappear and the symbol will be shown

as a reminder at the side of the display.

Priority 2 warning reports will not be shown until all Priority 1 warning

reports have been dealt with!

Examples of priority 2 warning reports (yellow):7)

Fuel warning light with the information text PLEASE REFUEL.

Windscreen washer fluid symbol with the information text REFILL WINDSCREEN WASHER FLUID. Refill the windscreen washer tank

page 235.

7) Depending on the version of the model.

Cockpit68

ing will be used as an example of how to

ood idea if you are, for example, using

suited for the top speed of the vehicle.

th the MFD lever

or two seconds to return to main menu

y be necessary to repeat this operation

displayed.

uration with the MFD lever

m the menu, press the upper or lower end

e selected option is displayed between

also be a triangle on the right.

tion.

Fig. 45 Steering wheel controls: button A to confirm the menu selec- tion and switch B to change the menu

altea_EN Seite 68 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Dash panel menus*

Example of menu use

All the menus on the dash panel may be used according to

the following procedure. The dash panel menus may vary

according to the version of the model.

The setting of a speed warn

use the menus. This is a g

winter tyres which are not

1. Open the main menu wi

Switch the ignition on.

Hold down button f

from other menu. It ma

until the main menu is

2. Open the menu Config

To choose an option fro

of the rocker switch. Th

two lines and there will

Select menu Configura

Fig. 44 Windscreen wiper lever: button A to confirm the menu selection and rocker switch B to change the menu

AB

Cockpit 69

Safety Fir Technical Data

uipment one or more of these menus will be

f menu displayed

ent set speed is displayed

s will be shown if the function is deactivated.

nction is activated or deactivated

value increases by 10 km/h

value decreases by 10 km/h

u Winter tyres is closed and the last dis-

enu is shown.

altea_EN Seite 69 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Press button on the windscreen wiper lever. The Configura- tion menu is opened.

2. Access the Configuration menu with the steering wheel controls

To access the Configuration menu, press button

page 68, fig. 45 until the menu is displayed. Now you are in

this menu.

3. Open the main menu Winter tyres

Select option Winter tyres using switch .

Press button . The menu Winter tyres is opened.

4. Program a speed limit warning

Use switch to select the menu entry +10 km/h or -10 km/h

and press button to either increase or decrease the set speed.

5. To activate and deactivate the speed limit warning

Use switch to select the menu point On / Off and press the

button to switch the speed warning on or off. If the speed

warning is deactivated, three dashes will be displayed ---

6. To close the menu Winter tyres

In the menu select Back.

The function Winter tyres sends an optical and an acoustic signal when the

vehicle reaches the set speed.

Example menu Winter tyres

Note For electronic and vehicle eq

displayed.

AA

AC

AB

AA

AB

AB

AB

On the display Winter tyres

Function Name o

X km/h The curr

or --- or dashe

On / Off If the fu

+10 km/h The set

-10 km/h The set

Back The men

played m

Cockpit70

t button for at least 2 seconds. It may

this operation until the main menu is

in menu

m the menu, press the upper or lower end

e selected option is displayed between

ct the entry.

68

Function

the multi-function display (MFD): Multi-

isplay (MFD)

t station will be shown when the radio is

on.

is only available if the vehicle is fitted with a

n system. The navigation system must be

on. When the route guidance is activated, the

rows and proximity bars are displayed. The

similar to that of the Navigation system.

e guidance is not activated, the direction of

pass) and the name of the street along

are driving are shown.

AB

altea_EN Seite 70 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Main menu

The menu provides access to the different display functions

(only with the MFD lever).

Open main menu

Switch the ignition on.

Press and hold the ejec

be necessary to repeat

displayed.

Select a menu from the ma

To choose an option fro

of rocker switch . Th

two horizontal lines.

Press button to sele

Example of menu use page Fig. 46 Windscreen wiper lever (MFD): button A to confirm the menu selec- tion and rocker switch B to change the menu

Fig. 47 Digital dash panel display: Main menu

Main menu

Multi-function display

Change to

function d

Audio The curren

switched

Navigation This menu

navigatio

switched

turning ar

display is

If the rout

travel (com

which you

AB

AA

Cockpit 71

Safety Fir Technical Data

menu (MFD)

lay (MFD) shows you information on

nsumption.

FD) has two automatic memories: 1 - Trip y. The selected memory is shown on the upper

lay fig. 48 at all times.

ay menu

display menu from the main menu page 70

on the windscreen wiper lever or the multifunc-

ory to another, briefly press button

ge 68 on the windscreen wiper lever or the

ion lever page 68, fig. 45 page 68 while

n.

Fig. 48 Multifunction display (MFD) dash panel display.

AA

OK

altea_EN Seite 71 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Note For electronic and vehicle equipment one or more of these menus will be

displayed.

Multi-function display

The multi-function disp

the journey and fuel co

The multifunction display (M

memory and 2 - Total memor right hand section of the disp

Open the multifunction displ

Select the Multifunction and press the button

tion lever*.

Selecting a memory

To change from one mem

page 68, fig. 44 pa

button on the multifunct

the ignition is switched o

Telephone This menu is only available if the vehicle is fitted with a

telephone mounted by the manufacturer: Fixed tele-

phone installation

Vehicle condition This menu displays current warning or information

texts: Vehicle status menu

This option flashes when one of these texts is dis-

played.

Configuration This option allows the time, the speed warning when

using winter tyres, units, language, independent heat-

ing, the Light and visibility menu and the Convenience

menu to be reset.

OK

Cockpit72

displays are shown on the dash panel display

function Display Data from the Configuration

ted or deactivated individually by marking the

he button on the windscreen wiper lever or

eel*.

t of time which has elapsed since the ignition

both memories is 19 hours and 59 minutes.

be deleted once this value has been reached.

100km or l/h

nt fuel consumption in mpg whilst the vehicle

hen the vehicle is in a stationary position with

how your driving style affects fuel consump-

km

will be shown after a distance of approximately

. Dashes will appear in the display until that

ted every 5 seconds while the vehicle is in

ed will not be shown.

ing the figures for tank content and current fuel

r the vehicle can travel using the same condi-

OK

altea_EN Seite 72 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Resetting a memory

Select the memory where you wish to erase the values.

Hold down button on the windscreen wiper lever or the button on

the multifunction* steering wheel for at least 2 seconds.

The journey memory 1 collects the travel and consumption data from the

moment the ignition is switched on until it is switched off. If the journey is

continued within two hours of switching off the ignition, the new values will

be added to the existing trip recorder memory. The memory will automatically

be deleted if the journey is interrupted for more than two hours.

The total journey memory 2 collects the journey data for any number of indi-

vidual journeys (even if the ignition is switched off for longer than two hours)

up to a total of 19 hours and 59 minutes travel time or 1999 km distance

travelled. The memory will automatically be deleted if one of the named

values is reached.

Memory indications

The following data can be viewed on the multifunction display using the

rocker switch page 68, fig. 44 page 68 on the windscreen wiper

lever or by pressing button or page 68, fig. 45 on the multifunction

steering wheel*.

Duration

Current fuel consumption

Average fuel consumption

Distance to empty (the distance you can travel with the remaining fuel)

Distance

Average speed

Digital display of speed8)

Speed warning to --- km/h

Personal selection of display

The driver can establish which

as required:

Select the submenu Multi menu page 74.

The displays can be activa

required option and pressing t

the multifunction steering wh

Duration in h and min

The display shows the amoun

was switched on.

The maximum display value in

The memory will automatically

Current fuel consumption in l/

The display will show the curre

is in motion or in litres/hour w

the engine running.

Using this display you can see

tion page 167.

Average consumption in l/100

The average fuel consumption

100 metres has been travelled

time. The display will be upda

motion. The amount of fuel us

Fuel range in km

The fuel range is calculated us

consumption. It shows how fa

tions as a reference.

8) It is not possible to see whether the alternative speed display is activated.

AA OK

AB

Cockpit 73

Safety Fir Technical Data

he road surface even if the snowflake symbol r this reason, not rely exclusively on this

ent panels; therefore the multifunction display

nary or travelling at very low speeds, the

e slightly higher than the actual ambient

heat radiated from the engine.

ion steering wheel* do not have buttons on the

ultifunction display can only be controlled from

tion steering wheel*.

ing or information texts

enu

cle status from the main menu: Main

n on the windscreen wiper lever

on the multifunction steering wheel*

il the Vehicle Status menu is displayed.

nd information texts: Information and warning

automatically disappear from the screen after a

Vehicle status menu.

OK AA

altea_EN Seite 73 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Distance travelled in km

The display shows the distance travelled since the ignition was switched on.

The maximum display value in both memories is 1999 km. The memory will

automatically be deleted once this value has been reached.

Average speed in km/h

The average speed will be shown after a distance of approximately 100

metres has been travelled. Dashes will appear in the display until that time.

The display will be updated every 5 seconds while the vehicle is in motion.

Digital display of speed

The dash panel display gives the speed in digital format8) .

Speed warning to --- km/h

This function may help you to keep within the speed limits. Press the

button on the windscreen wiper lever or the multifunction steering wheel*

to select the current speed. The dash panel display gives the selected speed,

for example, Speed warning 120 km/h. You have five seconds to reset the

speed between 30 km/hand 250 km/h using rocker switch or buttons

or on the multifunction steering wheel*. Press the button or wait five

seconds until the speed is stored and the warning is activated. If the set

speed is exceeded, an acoustic signal is heard and a warning message is

displayed until the speed is reduced to at least 4 km/h below the stored

speed. The function is switched off by pressing the button again. Speed warning --- km/h is now displayed on the dash panel.

Ambient temperature display

The measurement margin ranges from -40C (-40F) to +50C (+125F). At

outside temperatures below +4C (+39.2F), a snowflake symbol (ice

warning) appears in addition to the outside temperature display. This symbol

flashes for a few seconds and remains lit until the outside temperature rises

above +6C (+42.8F).

WARNING

There could be black ice on t is not shown. You should, fo display - Risk of accident!

Note There are different instrum

may vary.

When the vehicle is statio

temperature displayed may b

temperature as a result of the

Vehicles with a multifunct

windscreen wiper lever. The m

the buttons on the multifunc

Vehicle status menu

This menu shows warn

Open Vehicle Condition m

Select the option Vehi menu and press butto

page 70, fig. 46 or

Press button or

page 68, fig. 45 unt

Priority 2 warning messages a

messages on the screen will

time and will be stored in the

OK

AA

AB

OK

OK

Cockpit74

equipment one or more of these menus will be

this menu it is it possible to alter the vehicle

g settings.

ours and minutes of the clock and the naviga-

ystem can be changed. Choose between 12 or

ur format and change to summer time.

enu allows the setting of a speed at which an

l and acoustic warning will be given by the

. You can use this function, for example, if

ve fitted winter tyres which are not suited for

p speed of your vehicle. Please see the sec-

Wheels and tyres.

isplay texts and the navigation system texts

seen in different languages.

ption allows you to select the units for dis-

g temperature, fuel consumption values and

ces.

ash panel also displays the speed in another

nt unit of measurement (mph or km/h) to that

on the speedometer.

lt service messages and reset service interval

y here.

anufacturer's predefined values for the func-

of this menu are restored.

turns to the main menu

ver is used (MFD).

altea_EN Seite 74 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

The warning and information texts may be viewed in this menu. If there is no

warning or information message, the option Vehicle status is not displayed.

If there are several messages, each one is shown for a few seconds.

Example of menu use page 68.

Note If there are no warning messages, this menu is not available.

Configuration menu

This menu is used to make the settings for the vehicle func-

tions.

Open Configuration menu

Select the option Configuration from the main menu: Main

menu and press button page 68, fig. 44 on the wind-

screen wiper lever or

Press button or on the multifunction steering wheel*

page 68, fig. 45 until the Configuration menu is displayed.

Example of menu use page 68

Note For electronic and vehicle

displayed.

Displayed on the screen

Function

Multifunction dis- play data.

This menu is used to establish the data in the multi-

function display menu to be displayed on the dash

panel page 71

Convenience This menu allows you to make the settings for the

convenience functions in the vehicle.

OK AA

Lights and visibility From

lightin

Time The h

tion s

24-ho

Winter tyres The m

optica

system

you ha

the to

tion

Settings: Language The d

can be

Units This o

playin

distan

Aux. Speed The d

differe

given

Inter Service Consu

displa

Manufacturer's set- tings

The m

tions

Backa) This re

a) Only of the windscreen wiper le

Cockpit 75

Safety Fir Technical Data

uipment one or more of these menus will be

Function

door: Individual unlocking activated.

. locking: the doors are automatically locked

the vehicle is travelling at more than approx

/h.

unlock: the doors are unlocked when the key is

ved from the ignition.

ing and closing electric windows: this deter-

s whether to open or close all the windows

the vehicle is unlocked or locked. The open

ion can also be activated for the driver's door

chronised adjustment is selected, when the

r's side wing mirror is adjusted, the passenger

mirror is also moved.

anufacturer's predefined values for the func-

of this menu are restored.

returns to the Configuration menu

altea_EN Seite 75 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

SEAT dealers are able to programme other functions or change the

existing functions depending upon the vehicle equipment.

The Configuration menu is only accessible when the vehicle is at a

standstill.

Convenience menu

From this menu it is it possible to alter the vehicle conven-

ience settings.

Open menu Convenience

Choose the option Configuration from the main menu and press

the button page 68, fig. 44on the windscreen wiper

lever.

Press button or on the multifunction steering wheel*

page 68, fig. 45 until the Configuration menu is displayed.

Choose the option Convenience from the main menu and press

the button on the windscreen wiper lever.

Example of menu use page 68 Note

For electronic and vehicle eq

displayed.

OK AA

AA

Displayed on the screen

Open door One

Auto

when

15 km

Auto

remo

Elec. window control Open

mine

when

funct

only.

Wing mirror adjust. If syn

drive

wing

Manufacturer's set- tings

The m

tions

Back This

Cockpit76

ipment one or more of these menus will be

altea_EN Seite 76 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Lights and visibility menu

From this menu it is it possible to alter the vehicle lighting

settings.

Open Lights and visibility Menu

Select the option Configuration from the main menu: Main

menu and press button page 68 on the windscreen

wiper lever or

Press button or on the multifunction steering wheel*

page 68, fig. 45 until the Configuration menu is displayed.

Select the option Lights & visibility from the menu and press

button on the windscreen wiper lever.

Example of menu use page 68

Note For electronic and vehicle equ

displayed.

Displayed on the screen

Function

Coming Home/ Leaving Home

This option permits the adjustment of the time dur-

ing which the headlamps remain lit after the vehicle

is locked, and also permits the function to be con-

nected and disconnected

Indicator conf. The comfort indicator function can be activated or

deactivated here. With the comfort mode activated,

the indicator will blink at least three times when

turned on.

Manufacturer's set- tings

The manufacturer's predefined values for the func-

tions of this menu are restored.

Back This returns to the Configuration menu

OK AA

AA

Cockpit 77

Safety Fir Technical Data

g. 49 Dash panel with warning lamps. Some of the ms of equipment listed here are fitted only on certain

odels/model years or are optional extras.

altea_EN Seite 77 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Warning lamps

Overview of the warning lamps

The warning lamps indicate a number of different functions and possible faults.

Fi ite m

Cockpit78

g lamps and warning messages can result in mage to your vehicle.

ive page 84

ke applied

fluid level or

e system

page 83

ressure page 84

rol system switched on page 84

ndicator page 84

anical steering page 84

emission control system page 85

electronic stabilisation pro-

P) or the TCS is working or

lit: ESP malfunction or off

page 85

page 168

elector lever lock (automatic page 86

mobiliser page 86

f warning and control lamps Further infor-

mation

altea_EN Seite 78 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

WARNING

Failure to observe warnin serious personal injury or da

Item Symbol Meaning of warning and control lamps Further infor-

mation

Fuel level / reserve page 79

Coolant level / coolant temperature page 79

Rear fog light switched on page 80

Turn signals in operation page 80

Engine fault (petrol engine) page 80

Glow plug system for diesel engine page 80

Main beam switched on page 81

Pollen accumulation in the diesel

engine particulate filter page 81

ABS system fault page 81

Windscreen washer fluid level page 82

Alternator fault page 82

Fasten seat belts! page 19

Tyre pressure page 82

Airbag or belt tension device system

fault or airbag disabled

page 28

page 31

A1

A2

A3

A4

A5

A6

A7

A8

A9

A10

A11

A12

A13

Bulb defect

Parking bra

or low brake

fault in brak

Engine oil p

Cruise cont

Door open i

Electromech

Fault in the

If flashing: gramme (ES

deactivated

If it remains

Automatic s

gearbox)

SAFE Electronic im

Item Symbol Meaning o

A14

A15

A16

A17

A18

A19

A20

A21

A22

Cockpit 79

Safety Fir Technical Data

rature

s up if the coolant temperature is too

vel is too low.

not go out again after a few seconds.

p or flashes while the vehicle is moving, while

ls are emitted.

olant level is too low or the coolant temperature

following message10): CHECK COOLANT age 233.

erature gauge. The coolant temperature is too

warning area on the dial. Stop the vehicle, it for it to cool down. Check the coolant level.

he overheating may be caused by a malfunction

radiator fan fuse and have it replaced if neces-

again after driving on for a short distance, stop gine off. Contact an Authorised Service Centre

following message11): STOP CHECK COOLANT

he model.

he model.

altea_EN Seite 79 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

The risk of an accident increases if your vehicle breaks down. Use a warning triangle to draw the attention of other road users in order to prevent danger to thirds.

The engine compartment is a dangerous area! Before you open the bonnet to work on the engine or in the engine compartment, you must switch the engine off and allow it to cool to reduce the risk of scalding or other kind of injuries. Read and observe the relevant warnings page 226.

Note The appropriate warning lamp for a fault will light up in vehicles without

warning or information texts in the display.

In vehicles with warning or information texts on the screen, the appro-

priate warning lamp for a fault will light up and a warning or information text

will also appear on the screen.

Fuel level / reserve

This symbol lights up to indicate that the fuel tank under the

reserve level.

It lights up when only 7 litres of fuel remain in the tank. Also, an audible warning is given. This serves as a reminder to fill up with fuel at the earliest

opportunity page 220.

The dash panel displays the following message9): PLEASE REFUEL!.

Coolant Level* / tempe

The warning lamp light

high or if the coolant le

There is a fault if:

The warning symbol does

The warning lamp lights u

three acoustic warning signa

This means that either the co

is too high.

Coolant temperature too high

The dash panel displays the

INSTRUCTIONS MANUAL p

First look at the coolant temp

high if the needle is over the

switch the engine off and wa

If the coolant level is correct, t

of the radiator fan. Check the

sary page 261.

If the warning lamp lights up

the vehicle and switch the en or a qualified workshop.

Coolant level too low

The dash panel displays the

INSTRUCTIONS MANUAL.

9) Depending on the version of the model.

WARNING (continued)

10) Depending on the version of t 11) Depending on the version of t

Cockpit80

icators page 120.

itors the engine management system

nic Power Control) lights up when the ignition

e lamp is working properly. It should go out

nic engine management system while you are

l light up. Stop the vehicle and seek technical

ine fault

up to show that the glow plugs are

there is an engine fault.

while the glow plugs are preheating. When the

gine should be started straight away.

e management system while you are driving,

. Take the vehicle to an Authorised Service

d have the engine checked.

altea_EN Seite 80 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

First look at the coolant temperature gauge. If the needle is in the normal

range, top up with coolant at the earliest opportunity .

WARNING

If your vehicle is immobilised for any technical reasons, move it to a safe distance from traffic. Turn the engine off, turn the hazard lights on and place the warning triangle.

Never open the bonnet if you can see or hear steam or coolant escaping from the engine compartment. Risk of scalding. Wait until you can no longer see or hear escaping steam or coolant.

The engine compartment is a dangerous area! Before carrying out any work in the engine compartment, switch off the engine and allow it to cool down. Always note the corresponding warnings page 226.

Rear fog light

This warning lamp lights up when the rear fog light is switched on . Further

information page 113.

Turn signals

The warning lamp flashes when the indicators are in opera-

tion.

Depending on which indicator is operating, either the left or right indi-

cator lamp flashes. Both warning lamps will flash at the same time when the

hazard warning lights are switched on.

If any of both indicators fails, the warning lamp will start flashing twice faster

than normal.

Further information on the ind

Engine management*

This warning lamp mon

for petrol engines.

The warning lamp (Electro

is switched on to show that th

once the engine is started.

If there is a fault in the electro

driving, this warning lamp wil

assistance.

Glow plug system / Eng

The warning lamp lights

preheating. It flashes if

Warning lamp is lit

The warning lamp lights up

warning lamp goes off, the en

Warning lamp flashes

If a fault develops in the engin

the glow plug lamp will flash Centre as soon as possible an

Cockpit 81

Safety Fir Technical Data

(ABS)

monitors the ABS.

light up for a few seconds when the ignition is

after the system has run through an automatic

s not light up when the ignition is switched on.

ot go out again after a few seconds.

p when the vehicle is moving.

d in the normal way (except that the ABS control

ase take the vehicle to a qualified workshop as

information on the ABS see the page 193.

e ESP* warning lamp will also light up.

ights up together with the brake warning lamp

ult in the ABS function, but also a possible fault

et, read and observe the warnings on e engine compartment.

p should light up together with the ABS ehicle immediately and check the brake fluid e 239, Brake fluid. If the fluid level has ark you must not drive on. Risk of accident. .

correct, the fault in the brake system may have he ABS system. This could cause the rear

altea_EN Seite 81 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Main beam headlights

This warning lamp lights up when the main beams are on.

The warning lamp is switched on once main beams are on or once the

headlight flasher is operating.

Further information page 120.

Soot accumulation in the diesel engine particulate filter

If the indicator lights you may help the filter clear itself by driving in the

appropriate manner.

To do this, drive about 15 minutes in 4th or 5th gear (automatic gearbox: S

gear range) at a speed of 60 km/h, with the engine running at approximately

2000 rpm. In this way, the pollen build up in the filter is burned. When

cleaning is successful, the indicator turns off.

If the indicator is not deactivated, bring the vehicle to a specialised work-

shop to repair the fault.

WARNING

Always drive according to the road weather conditions, the terrain and traffic. Driving recommendations should never lead to illegal manoeuvres in surrounding traffic.

The diesel engine particulate filter may reach extremely high tempera- tures; it should not enter into contact with flammable materials under- neath the vehicle. Failure to comply could result in fire.

Anti-lock brake system

A warning lamp system

The warning lamp should

switched on. It goes out again

test sequence.

There is a fault in the ABS if:

The warning lamp doe

The warning lamp does n

The warning lamp lights u

The vehicle can still be brake

function will not function). Ple

soon as possible. For further

If a fault occurs in the ABS, th

Brake system fault

If the ABS warning lamp l

, this indicates not only a fa

in the brake system .

WARNING

Before opening the bonn page 226, Working in th

If the brake warning lam warning lamp , stop the v level in the reservoir pag dropped below the MIN m Obtain technical assistance

If the brake fluid level is been caused by a failure of t

Cockpit82

l system controls the tyre speed and

of each tyre.

wheel revolutions and with this information,

ing the ESP sensors. If the diameter of a wheel

icator lights . The wheel diameter changes

t.

ged.

because of a load.

under more pressure (for example, driving with

.

now chains.

tted.

n

Fig. 50 Centre console: tyre monitor system button

altea_EN Seite 82 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

wheels to lock quickly when you brake. This could cause the rear to break away. Risk of skidding. Stop the vehicle and seek technical assistance.

Washer fluid

This warning lamp lights up to indicate that the windscreen

washer level is too low.

This serves as a reminder to fill up the reservoir at the earliest opportunity

page 235

The following message is shown on the dash panel display*12): REFILL WINDSCREEN WASHER FLUID.

Alternator

This warning lamp signals a fault in the alternator.

The warning lamp lights up when the ignition is switched on. It should go

out when the engine has started running.

If the warning lamp lights up while driving, the alternator is no longer

charging the battery. You should immediately drive to the nearest qualified

workshop.

You should avoid using electrical equipment that is not absolutely necessary

because this will drain the battery.

Tyre pressure

The tyre pressure contro

the frequency spectrum

The tyre monitor 13) compares

the diameter of each wheel us

changes, the tyre monitor ind

when:

Tyre pressure is insufficien

The tyre structure is dama

The vehicle is unbalanced

The wheels of one axle are

a trailer or on extreme slopes)

The vehicle is fitted with s

The emergency wheel is fi

12) Depending on the version of the model.

WARNING (continued)

13) Depending on the model versio

Cockpit 83

Safety Fir Technical Data

rake

s up if the handbrake is applied, if the

o low or if there is a fault in the brake

up if

with the handbrake on, the following message

l display 14): HANDBRAKE ON. Also, an audible

oo low page 239.

following message14): STOP BRAKE FLUID

ake system.

following message14): BRAKE SYSTEM FAULT

p together with the anti-lock brake system

et, read and observe the warnings on

p does not go out, or if it lights up when l page 239, Brake fluid in the reservoir is

p the vehicle and do not drive on. Obtain tech-

he model.

altea_EN Seite 83 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

The wheel on one axle is changed.

Tyre pressure adjustment

Following the modification to tyre pressure or after changing one or more

wheels, the button page 82, fig. 50 must be kept pressed while the igni-

tion is on until an acoustic signal is heard and the warning lamp goes out.

If the wheels are under excessive load (for example, driving with a trailer or

heavy load), the tire pressure must be increased to the recommended value

for a full load (see the sticker on the inside of the fuel flap). If the tyre monitor

system button is pressed down, the new tyre pressures are confirmed.

The tyre pressure monitor indicator lights up

If the tyre pressure of one or more wheels is much lower than the value set by

the driver, then the tyre control warning lamp lights up .

The tyre pressure monitor indicator flashes

If the tyre pressure indicator flashes, this indicates a fault. Go to the nearest

specialist workshop.

WARNING

When the tyre pressure indicator lights, reduce speed immediately and avoid any sudden manoeuvre or braking. Stop when possible, and check the tyre pressure and status.

The driver is responsible for correct tyre pressure. For this reason, tyre pressure must be regularly checked.

Under certain circumstances (for example, in a sports situation, in winter conditions or on a dirt track) the tyre monitor indicator may light or function incorrectly.

Note If the battery is disconnected, the yellow indicator lights up after turning

the ignition on. This should turn off after a brief journey.

Brake system* / handb

The warning lamp light

brake fluid level falls to

system.

This warning lamp lights

If the handbrake is on.

If you drive faster than 6 km/h

will appear on the dash pane

warning is given.

If the brake fluid level is t

The dash panel displays the

INSTRUCTION MANUAL.

If there is a fault in the br

The dash panel displays the

INSTRUCTIONS MANUAL.

This warning lamp can light u

warning lamp.

WARNING

Before opening the bonn page 226.

If the brake warning lam driving, the brake fluid leve too low. Risk of accident. Sto nical assistance.

14) Depending on the version of t

Cockpit84

llowing message16): STOP ENGINE OIL NUAL.

the oil level is correct, do not drive on. The

le speed. Obtain technical assistance.

s on when the cruise control system

when the cruise control system is switched on.

ntrol system page 188.

s or tailgate*

e of the doors or the tailgate is open.

o off when all the doors are closed correctly.

he ignition is switched off. It should go off

ehicle is locked.

g, the level of steering assistance depends on

e steering angle.

e model.

altea_EN Seite 84 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

If the brake warning lamp lights up together with the ABS warning lamp , the control function of the ABS could be out of action. This could cause the rear wheels to lock quickly when you brake. This could cause the rear to break away. Risk of skidding. Stop the vehicle and seek technical assistance.

Bulb defect

The warning lamp lights up when a bulb in the vehicle's exte-

rior lighting is defective.

The warning lamp lights up when a bulb in the vehicle's exterior lighting

(e.g. left-hand main beam) is defective.

The dash panel displays the following message15): LEFT FULL BEAM FAULTY.

Engine oil pressure

This warning lamp indicates that the engine oil pressure is

too low.

If this warning symbol starts to flash, and is accompanied by three audible warnings, switch off the engine and check the oil level. If the oil level is too

low, add more engine oil page 229.

The dash panel displays the fo

PRESSURE INSTRUCTIONS MA

If the symbol flashes although

engine must not even run at id

Cruise control system*

The warning lamp come

is switched on.

The warning lamp lights up

Further notes on the cruise co

Indicator for open door

This indicator lights if on

The warning light should g

The system also works when t

approx. 15 seconds after the v

Power steering system*

For vehicles with power steerin

the vehicle's speed and on th

15) Depending on the version of the model.

WARNING (continued)

16) Depending on the version of th

Cockpit 85

Safety Fir Technical Data

g driving which has reduced the quality of the

be fault). Reduce speed and drive carefully to

op to have the engine checked.

t displayed in the dash panel display : EXHAUST

programme (ESP)*

itors the electronic stabilisation

ABS, EDL and TCS. This also includes the brake

tic cleaning of the brake discs and the trailer

following functions:

conds when the ignition is switched on while a

out.

activated when driving.

ly if there is a malfunction in the ESP.

ult should occur in the ABS because the ESP

the ABS.

hts up and stays on after the engine is started,

ol system has temporarily switched off the ESP.

activated by switching the ignition off and then

goes out, this means the system is fully func-

, the TCS function deactivates and the warning

altea_EN Seite 85 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

The warning lamp should light up for a few seconds when the ignition is

switched on. It should go out once the engine is started.

If the battery is disconnected, the indicator remains lit, even with the engine

running. The warning light only goes off after a distance of approx. 50 m.

There is a fault in the electromechanical steering system if the lamp does not

go out or lights up whilst the vehicle is in motion. The indicator may appear

in two different colours to indicate faults. If it lights yellow, this indicates a

minor fault. If it lights red, seek workshop assistance immediately, if no

assistance is available stop driving. Stop the vehicle and seek technical

assistance. The power steering does not work if the battery is flat or if the

engine is off (for example, for towing). You should take into account that you

will need considerably more power than normal to steer the vehicle if the

steering assistance is reduced or has failed completely.

For those vehicles fitted with ESP* the function Recommended steering

manoeuvre is included. See page 195.

Emission control system*

This warning lamp monitors the exhaust system.

Warning lamp flashes:

When there is misfiring that can damage the catalytic converter. Reduce

speed and drive carefully to the nearest qualified workshop to have the

engine checked.

The dash panel displays the following message17): EXHAUST GAS SEE WORKSHOP.

Warning lamp is lit:

If a fault has developed durin

exhaust gas (e.g. lambda pro

the nearest qualified worksh

The following information tex

GAS SEE WORKSHOP.

Electronic stabilisation

This warning lamp mon

programme.

This programme includes the

assist system (BAS), automa

stability programme (TSP).

The warning lamp has the

It will light for about 2 se

test of the function is carried

It flashes when the ESP is

It will light up continuous

It will also come on if a fa

operates in conjunction with

If the ESP warning lamp lig

this may mean that the contr

In this case the ESP can be re

on again. If the warning lamp

tional.

If the ESP button is activated

lamp flashes. 17) Depending on the version of the model.

Cockpit86

e

sed when this warning lamp lights up. This is

gearbox* selector lever is moved out of the

Safe

es if an unauthorised key is used.

at deactivates the electronic immobiliser auto-

rted into the ignition. The immobiliser will be

as soon as you pull the key out of the ignition

llowing message18): SAFE. The vehicle cannot

70.

tarted if the appropriate coded SEAT genuine

icle is ensured if genuine SEAT keys are used.

e model.

altea_EN Seite 86 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Differential lock fault (EDL)*

EDL operates along with the ABS in vehicles equipped with an

Electronic Stabilisation Program (ESP)*

A malfunction in the EDL is indicated by the ABS warning lamp . Please

take the vehicle to a qualified workshop as soon as possible. For further infor-

mation on the EDL page 196, Electronic differential lock (EDL)*.

Traction control system (TCS)*

The traction control system prevents the driven wheels from

spinning when the vehicle is accelerating

The warning lamp lights up when the ignition is switched on and should turn

out after about 2 seconds.

When the TCS is operating while driving, the warning lamp flashes. If the

system is deactivated or if there is any fault in the same, the warning lamp will

remain lit.

It will also come on if a fault should occur in the ABS because the TCS oper-

ates in conjunction with the ABS. For further information, see page 193,

Brakes.

If the TCS button is activated, the TCS function deactivates and the warning

lamp remains lit.

By pressing again, TCS function is reactivated and the warning lamp switched

off.

Operating the foot brak

The footbrake must be depres

necessary when the automatic

positions P or N.

Electronic immobiliser*

This warning lamp flash

Inside the key there is a chip th

matically when the key is inse

activated again automatically

lock.

The dash panel displays the fo

be used in that case page 1

The engine can, however, be s

key is used.

Note A perfect operation of the veh

18) Depending on the version of th

Steering wheel controls 87

Safety Fir Technical Data

the available audio functions from the steering

n, to control the available audio functions and

e steering wheel.

control the Audio system (Radio, CD Audio, CD

io / navigation System, in which case they also

.

rbox* page 181.

Fig. 52 Steering wheel controls (depending on version of model)

altea_EN Seite 87 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Steering wheel controls

General information

The steering wheel includes a multifunction module from where it is possible

to control the audio, telephone and radio navigation functions, and the auto-

matic gearbox*, without needing to distract the driver.

There are two versions of the multifunction module:

Audio version, to control

wheel.

Audio + Telephone versio

the telephone system from th

Both versions may be used to

mp3, CD Changer) and the rad

control the Navigation system

Version for automatic gea

Audio system

Steering wheel audio version controls

Fig. 51 Controls on the steering wheel

Steering wheel controls88

AUX table on page 89

Volume up

Volume down

No specified function

No function specified

No function specified

Silence

Operates on Instrument panel display

No function specifiedb)

Operates on Instrument panel display

No function specifiedb)

No function specified

Change menu on instrument panel

No function specified

Change menu on instrument panel

Operates on instrument panel

Change source

Operates on instrument panel

altea_EN Seite 88 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Button Radio CD/MP3/USB*/iPod*

Volume up Volume up

Volume down Volume down

Search for next station Next track

Hold down: Fast forward

Search for last station Last track

Hold down:Rewind

No function specified No function specified

Silence Pause

a)

a) Depending on the model version

Operates on Instrument panel display Operates on Instrument panel display

Next preset b)

b) Only if the panel is in Audio menu.

Next track b)

a) Operates on Instrument panel display Operates on Instrument panel display

Previous preset b) Previous track b)

a) Next preset Change folder

Change menu on instrument panel Change menu on instrument panel

a) Previous preset Change folder

Change menu on instrument panel Change menu on instrument panel

Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel

a) Change source Change source

Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel

AA

AB

AC

AD

AE

AF

AG

AH

AI

AJ

AK

AL

Steering wheel controls 89

Safety Fir Technical Data

Fig. 54 Steering wheel controls (depending on version of model)

X TELEPHONE

e up Volume up

down Volume down

specified No function specified

specified No function specified

ne menu on

t panel

Make call

Accept incoming call

End call

Hold down: reject incoming

call

recognition Enable voice recognition

altea_EN Seite 89 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Steering wheel Audio + Telephone version controls

Fig. 53 Controls on the steering wheel

Button Radio CD/MP3/USB*/iPod* AU

Volume up Volume up Volum

Volume down Volume down Volume

Search for next station Next track

Hold down: Fast forward No function

Search for last station Last track

Hold down:Rewind No function

Access telephone menu on instrument

panel

Access telephone menu on instrument

panel

Access telepho

instrumen

Enable voice recognition Enable voice recognition Enable voice

AA

AB

AC

AD

AE

AF

Steering wheel controls90

pecified

Movement on telephone menu

Address book / Last calls /

Calls received / Missed calls

pecified

Movement on telephone menu

Address book / Last calls /

Calls received / Missed calls

instrument

l

Change menu on instrument

panel

instrument

l

Change menu on instrument

panel

rument panel Confirm

rument panel Return to MULTIFUNCTION DIS-

PLAY menu

altea_EN Seite 90 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Next preset a) Next track a) No function s

Previous preset a) Previous track a) No function s

Change menu on instrument panel Change menu on instrument panel Change menu on

pane

Change menu on instrument panel Change menu on instrument panel Change menu on

pane

Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel Operates on inst

Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel Operates on inst

a) Only if the panel is in Audio menu.

AG

AH

AI

AJ

AK

AL

Steering wheel controls 91

Safety Fir Technical Data

Fig. 56 Steering wheel controls (depending on version of model)

X NAVIGATOR

e up Volume up

down Volume down

specified No function specified

specified No function specified

ne menu on

t panel No function specified

recognition Enable voice recognition

altea_EN Seite 91 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Radio navigation system

Steering wheel audio version controls

Fig. 55 Controls on the steering wheel

Button Radio CD/MP3/USB*/iPod* AU

Volume up Volume up Volum

Volume down Volume down Volume

Search for next station Next track

Hold down: Fast forward No function

Search for last station Last track

Hold down:Rewind No function

Access telephone menu on instrument

panel

Access telephone menu on instrument

panel

Access telepho

instrumen

Enable voice recognition Enable voice recognition Enable voice

AA

AB

AC

AD

AE

AF

Steering wheel controls92

pecified Operates on instrument panel

pecified Operates on instrument panel

instrument

l No function specified

instrument

l No function specified

ument panel Operates on instrument panel

ument panel Operates on instrument panel

Fig. 58 Steering wheel controls (depending on version of model)

altea_EN Seite 92 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Steering wheel Audio + Telephone controls

Next preset a) Next track a) No function s

Previous preset a) Previous track a) No function s

Change menu on instrument panel Change menu on instrument panel Change menu on

pane

Change menu on instrument panel Change menu on instrument panel Change menu on

pane

Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel Operates on instr

Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel Operates on instr

a) Only if the panel is in Audio menu.

AG

AH

AI

AJ

AK

AL

Fig. 57 Controls on the steering wheel

Steering wheel controls 93

Safety Fir Technical Data

NAVIGATOR TELEPHONE

Volume up Volume up

Volume down Volume down

unction specified No function specified

unction specified No function specified

unction specified

Make call

Accept incoming call

End call

Hold down: reject incom-

ing call

e voice recognition Enable voice recognition

ates on instrument

panel

Movement on telephone

menu

Address book / Last calls

/ Calls received / Missed

calls

ates on instrument

panel

Movement on telephone

menu

Address book / Last calls

/ Calls received / Missed

calls

unction specified Change menu on instru-

ment panel

altea_EN Seite 93 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Button Radio CD/MP3/USB*/iPod* AUX

Volume up Volume up Volume up

Volume down Volume down Volume down

Search for next station Next track

Hold down: Fast forward No function specified No f

Search for last station Last track

Hold down:Rewind No function specified No f

Access telephone menu on

instrument panel

Access telephone menu on

instrument panel

Access telephone menu

on instrument panel No f

Enable voice recognition Enable voice recognition Enable voice recognition Enabl

Next preset a) Next track a) No function specified Oper

Previous preset a) Previous track a) No function specified Oper

Change menu on instrument

panel

Change menu on instrument

panel

Change menu on instru-

ment panel No f

AA

AB

AC

AD

AE

AF

AG

AH

AI

Steering wheel controls94

nction specified Change menu on instru-

ment panel

tes on instrument

panel Confirm

tes on instrument

panel

Return to MULTIFUNCTION

DISPLAY

altea_EN Seite 94 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Change menu on instrument

panel

Change menu on instrument

panel

Change menu on instru-

ment panel No fu

Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument

panel

Opera

Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument

panel

Opera

a) Only if the panel is in Audio menu.

AJ

AK

AL

Unlocking and locking 95

Safety Fir Technical Data

102, fig. 64 on the remote control to lock all

turn the key in the door to lock all doors and the

isabled persons in the vehicle. In case of emer- to leave the vehicle and not manage on their

lay in or around the vehicle. A locked vehicle ly high and low temperatures, depending on g serious injuries/illness. It could even have d lock both the tailgate and all the other doors

vehicle.

with you when you leave the vehicle. Misuse children, may result in serious damage and

entally be started and be out of control.

hed on, the electric equipment could be acti- for example, in the electric windows.

ed using the remote control key. This could t in an emergency situation.

ith you when you leave the vehicle.

m the ignition if the vehicle is in motion. The y engage, and you would not be able to steer

altea_EN Seite 95 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Unlocking and locking

Central locking

Basic functions

The central locking system enables you to lock and unlock all

doors with just pushing on the key button.

Description

Central locking can be activated by using any of the following options:

the key, by inserting it into the driver's door cylinder and rotating it manu-

ally,

the central locking button in the passenger compartment as an electronic

control page 98,

the radio frequency remote control, using the buttons on the key

page 102.

Various functions are available to improve the vehicle safety:

Locking system Safe

Selective unlocking system*

Automatic speed-dependent locking and unlocking system*

Self-locking system to prevent involuntary unlocking

Emergency unlocking system

Unlocking the vehicle*

Press button page 102, fig. 64 on remote control to unlock all the

doors and tailgate.

Locking the vehicle*

Press button page

doors and the tailgate or

tailgate.

WARNING

Never leave children or d gency, they may not be able own.

Never allow children to p can be subjected to extreme the time of year, thus causin fatal consequences. Close an when you are not using the

Always take you car keys of the keys, for example, by accident.

The engine may accid

If the ignition is switc vated with risk of injury,

The doors can be lock make assistance difficul

Always take the key w

Never remove the key fro steering lock could suddenl the vehicle.

Unlocking and locking96

en the vehicle is locked

button on the remote control within

le is locked without activating the dead-

arning lamp flashes for approx. two

out. After approx. 30 seconds it starts

d opened from the inside if the "safe" deadlock

ill have to pull the door release lever once.

ff, the antitheft alarm* page 104 remains

nitoring system* and the anti-tow system are

vehicle if the anti-tow system deadlock mech- is not possible to open the doors from the ake it more difficult to assist vehicle occu- ent. People could become trapped inside in an

tem*

lock either just the driver's door or all

s the unlock button on the remote once. The

le is deactivated, only the driver's door is

and the light indicator are also turned off.

altea_EN Seite 96 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Note While the driver's door is open, the vehicle can not be locked with the

remote control. This avoids the user from forgetting his key inside the vehicle.

If the driver's door is unlocked with the key shaft, only the driver's door is

unlocked, the rest of the doors remain locked. When the ignition is switched

on, the door "safe" deadlock is deactivated (although the doors remain

locked) and the central locking button is activated. See page 104.

If the central locking or anti-theft alarm are faulty, the driver's door

warning lamp remains lit for approx. 30 seconds after locking the vehicle.

For anti-theft security, only the driver's door is fitted with a lock cylinder.

Safety system Safe*

The "safe" deadlock makes it more difficult to break into the

vehicle because the door release lever and the central locking

button are not active (depending upon country).

Activating deadlock

Press once the locking button on the remote control. or

Turn the key once in the driver's door lock to lock. A warning lamp

in the driver door flashes to indicate the "safe" deadlock is

working. The warning lamp flashes for approx. two seconds at

short intervals and then more slowly.

Deactivating deadlock wh

Press twice the locking

two seconds. The vehic

lock. The driver's door w

seconds and then goes

flashing again.

The doors can be unlocked an

has not been activated. You w

When the "safe" deadlock is o

active. The vehicle interior mo

deactivated*.

WARNING

Nobody should remain in the anism has been activated. It inside. Locked doors could m pants in the event of an accid emergency.

Selective unlocking sys

This system allows to un

the vehicle.

Using the remote control, pres

Safe system for all the vehic

unlocked and both the alarm

Unlocking and locking 97

Safety Fir Technical Data

em for involuntary unlocking*

and prevents the unintentional

.

any of the doors (including the tailgate) are

gets re-locked automatically. This function

aining unlocked if the unlock button is pressed

ystem

uring an accident, the vehicle gets unlocked,

ible to lock the vehicle from inside with the

the ignition off and back on again.

om the outside, see Emergency locking of the

altea_EN Seite 97 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Unlocking all doors and the boot

The unlock button on the remote must be pressed twice so that all doors

and the boot can be opened.

Press twice within 2 seconds to deactivate the Safe system for all vehicle,

to unlock all doors and to use the boot. The indicator and the alarm (only vehi-

cles fitted with one) are turned off.

Automatic speed dependent locking and unlocking system*

This is a safety system which prevent the access to the vehicle

from the outside when it is running (for example, when

stopped at a traffic light).

Locking

The doors and the boot are automatically locked when vehicle speed exceeds

15 km/h.

If the vehicle is stopped and one of the doors is opened, when the vehicle

moves off again and exceeds a speed of 15 km/h, the unlocked door(s) will

be locked once more.

Unlocking

The driver's door automatically unlocks when the key is removed from the

ignition.

Each door can be unlocked and opened independently from the inside (for

example, when a passenger gets out of it). To do it, simply operate the lever

inside the door.

WARNING

The door handles must not be operated when the vehicle is running: the door would open.

Automatic locking syst

It is an anti-theft system

unlocking of the vehicle

If the vehicle is unlocked and

opened within 30 seconds, it

prevents the vehicle from rem

by mistake.

Emergency unlocking s

If the airbags are triggered d

except for the boot. It is poss

central locking, after turning

If the doors must be locked fr

doors.

Unlocking and locking98

er door cannot be locked if any of the vehicle

open. This avoids the user from forgetting his

central locking will deactivate the central

. Once this time has passed, the button may be

g the key inside the vehicle if the vehicle is

utton when the driver's door is closed and any

ing any of the rear doors, the vehicle locks and

parately from inside the car. Do this by pulling

ildren and disabled people may be trapped

n is not operative in the following cases:

d from the outside (by the remote or the key).

ctivated after unlocking the door lock cylinder

ton .

on .

Manual personalisation

rn the key to unlock for approx. 3 s.

altea_EN Seite 98 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Central locking button

The central locking button allows you to lock and unlock the

vehicle from the inside.

Locking the vehicle

Press the button .

Unlocking the doors

Press button .

The central locking button is still operative when the ignition is switched off.

Except when the "safe" security system is activated.

Please note the following if you lock your vehicle with the central locking

button:

Safety reasons make not be possible to open the doors or the tailgate

from the outside (for instance, when stopped at a traffic light).

The driver or front passeng

doors (except the tailgate) are

key inside the vehicle.

Repeated operation of the

locking button for 30 seconds

used once more.

There is a danger of leavin

locked by the central locking b

of the rear doors open. On clos

the keys remain inside it.

All doors can be locked se

the door release lever once.

WARNING

If the vehicle is locked, ch inside it.

The central locking butto

When the vehicle is locke

While the ignition is not a with the key.

Note Vehicle locked, amber but

Vehicle unlocked, red butt

Unlocking and locking -

Activating selective unlocking

With the driver's door open, tu

Fig. 59 Detail of the centre console: central locking system button

Unlocking and locking 99

Safety Fir Technical Data

nually

cylinder and rotate in a clockwise direction for

nti-clockwise for the right hand side door.

ed it can no longer be opened from the outside.

of the remaining doors

e cap fig. 60 printed with a lock image.

ment with a groove in the centre. Insert the key

element clockwise for the right hand side doors

hand side doors.

e door. Once the door has been closed it can no

utside.

rgency) locked driver's door

cylinder and rotate anti-clockwise for the left

se for the right hand side doors.

the door may be opened using the exterior door

ually (emergency) locked doors

e unlocked to gain entry to the vehicle. Operate

he required door. If the child safety lock is acti-

n the interior door release lever is operated the

t open. The exterior door handle may now be

u wish to lock it manually (emergency locking),

ns.

AA

altea_EN Seite 99 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Deactivating selective unlocking

With the driver's door open, turn the key to lock for approx. 3 s.

The indicator lamps flash to confirm activation or deactivation.

Activation of automatic locking

Press the lock button on the central locking button for 3 seconds.

Deactivation of automatic locking

Press the unlock button on the central locking button for 3 seconds.

The lock button lamp flashes to confirm activation or deactivation.

Emergency manual locking

This permits mechanical locking of the doors in case of

central locking system failure.

Locking the driver's door ma

Insert the key in the door lock

the left hand side door and a

Once the door has been clos

Manual (emergency) locking

Open the door and remove th

This will expose a circular ele

into the groove and rotate the

and anticlockwise for the left

Replace the cap and close th

longer be opened from the o

Unlocking the manually (eme

Insert the key in the door lock

hand side doors and clockwi

The door lock is released and

handle.

Unlocking the remaining man

First the driver's door must b

the internal door handle for t

vated on the rear doors, whe

door is unlocked but does no

used to open the door.

Note Once the vehicle is open, if yo

repeat the previous instructio

Fig. 60 Locking the doors manually

Unlocking and locking100

nt of the vehicle electronic opening and

ects rear doors. It can only be activated

, as described below:

ock

n the door in which you wish to activate

ate the groove in the door using the igni-

he left hand side doors, and anti-clock-

side doors fig. 61 fig. 62.

f lock

the door whose childproof lock you want

ate the groove in the door using the igni-

he right hand side doors, and anti-clock-

ide doors fig. 61 fig. 62.

tivated, the door can only be opened from the

n be activated and deactivated by inserting the

or is open, as described above.

altea_EN Seite 100 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Childproof lock

The childproof lock prevents the rear doors from being

opened from the inside. This system prevents minors from

opening a door accidentally while the vehicle is running.

This function is independe

locking systems. It only aff

and deactivated manually

Activating the childproof l

Unlock the car and ope

the childproof lock.

With the door open, rot

tion key, clockwise for t

wise for the right hand

Deactivating the childproo

Unlock the car and open

to deactivate.

With the door open, rot

tion key, clockwise for t

wise for the left hand s

Once the childproof lock is ac

outside. The childproof lock ca

key in the groove when the do

Fig. 61 Child safety lock on the left hand side door

Fig. 62 Child safety lock on the right hand side door

Unlocking and locking 101

Safety Fir Technical Data

eys can cause serious injuries.

isabled persons in the vehicle. In case of emer- to leave the vehicle and not manage on their

e key could start the engine or activate any tric windows), causing risk of accident. The e remote control key. This could make assist-

cy.

ide the vehicle. An unauthorised use of your , damage or theft. Always take the key with you

m the ignition if the vehicle is in motion. ld suddenly block and it would be impossible

nts in the remote control key. Avoid wetting and

altea_EN Seite 101 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Keys

Set of keys

The set of keys includes a remote control, a key without a

remote control and a plastic key tab*.

The set of keys belonging to your vehicle consists of the following items:

one remote control key fig. 63 with folding key bit,

one key without remote control ,

a plastic key tab* .

Duplicate keys

If you need a replacement key, take your key tab to an Authorised Service

Centre.

WARNING

An incorrect use of the k

Never leave children or d gency, they may not be able own.

An uncontrolled use of th electric equipment(e.g. elec doors can be locked using th ance difficult in an emergen

Never forget the keys ins vehicle could result in injury when you leave the vehicle.

Never remove the key fro Otherwise, the steering cou to steer the vehicle.

Caution There are electronic compone

hitting the keys Fig. 63 Set of keys

AA

AB

AC

Unlocking and locking102

row) on the control, the key shaft is released.

g. 64 .

64

he button fig. 64 until all indicators

hen the unlocking button is pressed,

e door. Once this time has passed, it will lock

the key fig. 64, will flash.

and the batteries are integrated in the key. The

The maximum scope of the remote control

s. This scope is reduced when the batteries

, is pressed once, the driver's door is

cked.

twice to unlock all doors.

Fig. 65 Range of the remote control:

A1

A2

A3

A3

A1

A1

altea_EN Seite 102 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Radio frequency remote control

Locking and unlocking the vehicle

The remote control key is used to lock and unlock the vehicle

from a distance.

Using the button fig. 64 (ar

Unlocking the vehicle fi

Locking the vehicle fig.

Unlocking the tailgate. Press t

on the vehicle briefly flash. W

you have 2 minutes to open th

once more.

Also, the battery indicator on

The remote control transmitter

receiver is inside the vehicle.

depends on various condition

start to lose power.

Selective unlocking*

When the button fig. 64

unlocked, all others remain lo

Press the button fig. 64

Fig. 64 Assignment of buttons on the remote control key

Unlocking and locking 103

Safety Fir Technical Data

ot flash when the buttons are pushed, the

eries may damage the radio frequency remote

ys replace the dead battery with another of the

nvironment own away in accordance with regulations

e environment.

ote control key

lock or lock the door with the remote

synchronised.

02, fig. 64 button on the remote control.

using the key bit within one minute.

could no longer be opened and closed with the

is repeatedly pressed outside the radio

ctive scope. The remote control key will have to

e available in your Authorised Service Centres,

to the locking system.

ys can be used.

altea_EN Seite 103 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

WARNING

An improper use of the key can cause serious injuries.

Never leave children or disabled persons in the vehicle. In case of emer- gency, they may not be able to leave the vehicle and not manage on their own.

Never forget the keys inside the vehicle. Otherwise, this could result in serious injuries, accidents or even the theft of your vehicle. Always take the key with you when you leave the vehicle.

An uncontrolled use of the key could start the engine or activate any electric equipment(e.g. electric windows), causing risk of accident. The vehicle can be locked when using the remote control key. This could complicate the aid in case of emergency.

Note The radio-frequency remote control can be programmed by means of

pressing the unlocking button once; as a result, only the driver door will

unlock. When the button is pressed once more, all doors and the tailgate will

be unlocked.

The remote control functions only when you are in range page 102,

fig. 65 (red area).

If the vehicle is unlocked using the button, it will lock again auto-

matically if any of the doors or the tailgate are not opened within 30 seconds

after unlocking it. This function prevents the vehicle from remaining unlocked

if the unlock button is pressed by mistake.

If the vehicle cannot be opened and closed using the remote control, the

remote control key will have to be re-synchronised page 103.

Changing the battery

If the battery indicator does n

battery must be replaced.

Caution The use of inappropriate batt

control. For this reason, alwa

same size and power.

For the sake of the e The flat batteries must be thr

governing the protection of th

Synchronising the rem

If it is not possible to un

control, it should be re-

Press the page 1

Then close the vehicle

It is possible that the vehicle

remote control if the button

frequency remote control effe

be resynchronised.

Spare remote control keys ar

where they must be matched

Up to eight remote control ke

A1

Unlocking and locking104

the button shown by the (arrow).

oor to unlock the vehicle. The anti-theft alarm

alarm is not triggered immediately.

in 15 seconds. When the ignition is switched

recognises a valid vehicle key and deactivates

you do not switch on the ignition within 15

d.

via the unlocking button of the remote control

the ignition lock.

, access is gained to a second secured zone

er a door has been opened), the warning signal

s active even if the battery is disconnected or

ediately if one of the battery cables is discon-

is active.

nction incorporated in the anti-theft

authorized vehicle entry by means of

ensors, 2 emitters and a receptor.

altea_EN Seite 104 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Anti-theft alarm system*

Description of anti-theft alarm system*

The anti-theft alarm triggers if unauthorised movements are

detected around the vehicle.

The anti-theft alarm makes it more difficult to break into the vehicle or steal

it. Audible and visible alarms are triggered if the car is opened using the key,

or if unauthorised access to the vehicle is forced.

The anti-theft alarm system is automatically connected on locking the

vehicle. The system is then primed.

When does the system trigger an alarm?

The system triggers an alarm if the following unauthorised actions are carried

out when the car is locked:

Opening the vehicle mechanically using the key and with the ignition off

Opening a door

Opening the bonnet

Opening the tailgate

Switching on the ignition

Movements in the vehicle

Undue manipulation of the alarm

Battery handling

The acoustic signals sound and the indicators flash for approx. 30 seconds.

This may be repeated up to 10 times depending on the country.

Opening the doors mechanically (emergency opening)

If the remote control function fails, you will have to use the key to unlock the

car. This is done as follows:

Unfold the key by pressing

Use the lock on the driver d

system remains active, but an

Switch on the ignition with

on, the electronic immobiliser

the anti-theft alarm system. If

seconds, the alarm is triggere

How to switch the alarm off

When the vehicle is unlocked

or when the key is inserted in

Note If, after the alarm goes off

(e.g. the tailgate is opened aft

is triggered again.

Vehicle monitoring remain

not working for any reason.

The alarm is triggered imm

nected while the alarm system

Volumetric sensor*

Monitoring or control fu

alarm* which detects un

ultrasound.

The system consists of 3 s

Unlocking and locking 105

Safety Fir Technical Data

altea_EN Seite 105 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Activation

It is automatically turned on with the anti-theft alarm, when the

vehicle is locked mechanically with the key and when the button

on the remote control is used.

Deactivation

Press the button on the remote control twice. Only the volu-

metric sensor is deactivated. The alarm system remains acti-

vated.

WARNING

The safe security system remains deactivated if the volumetric sensor is deactivated.

For those vehicles in which a separate sunblind is fitted in the passenger compartment, the alarm will not function correctly due to inter- ference with the sensor.

Note If the alarm has been triggered by the volumetric sensor, this will be indi-

cated by a flashing of the indicator on the driver's door. This flashing will be

different to that for an activated alarm.

Unlocking and locking106

r and lift the tailgate fig. 66. The tail-

of the two handles on the interior lining

ht movement.

erate depending on the situation of the vehicle.

cannot be opened, however if it is unlocked

erative and the boot may be opened.

tus, press the button or the button on

ument panel if the tailgate is open or not prop-

ng is also given if the tailgate is open when the

h*.

Fig. 67 Detail of the inside of the tailgate: hand grip

A1

altea_EN Seite 106 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Tailgate

Unlocking and locking

The operation of the tailgate opening system is electric. It is

activated by using the handle on the tailgate

Opening the tailgate

Pull on the release leve

gate will then open.

Closing the tailgate

Grip the tailgate by one

and close it, using a lig

The system may or may not op

If the tailgate is locked then it

then the opening system is op

To the locking / unlocking sta

the remote control key.

A warning appears in the instr

erly closed.* An audible warni

car is driven faster than 6 km/

Fig. 66 Tailgate: opening from the outside

Unlocking and locking 107

Safety Fir Technical Data

to be opened if the central locking

xample, if the battery is flat)

oot allowing access to the emergency

inside the luggage compartment

groove and unlock the locking system,

ght to left, as shown by the arrow

Fig. 68 Tailgate: emer- gency open

altea_EN Seite 107 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

WARNING

Always close the tailgate properly. Risk of accident or injury.

Do not close the tailgate by pushing it down with your hand on the rear window. The glass could smash. Risk of injury!

Ensure the tailgate is locked after closing it. If not, it may open unex- pectedly while driving.

Never allow children to play in or around the vehicle. A locked vehicle can be subjected to extremely high and low temperatures, depending on the time of year, thus causing serious injuries/illness. It could even have fatal consequences. Close and lock both the tailgate and all the other doors when you are not using the vehicle.

Closing the tailgate without observing and ensuring it is clear could cause serious injury to you and to third parties. Make sure that no one is in the path of the tailgate.

Never drive with the tailgate open or half-closed, exhaust gases may penetrate into the interior of the vehicle. Danger of poisoning!

If you only open the tailgate, do not leave the key inside. The vehicle will not be opened if the key is left inside.

Emergency opening

This allows the vehicle

does not operate (for e

There is a groove in the b

opening mechanism.

Opening the tailgate from

Insert the key bit in the

turning the key from ri

fig. 68.

Unlocking and locking108

t left door

t right door

ting the electric window buttons in the rear

left door

right door

's door can be used to disable the electric

ors.

ttons on rear doors are activated.

s on rear doors are deactivated.

ric windows can result in injury.

ithout observing and ensuring it is clear, to do s injury to you and third parties. Make sure window.

ey with you when you leave the vehicle.

sabled persons in the vehicle, particularly if An uncontrolled use of the key could start the ic equipment(e.g. electric windows), causing n be locked using the remote control key. This lt in an emergency.

work until the key has been removed from the doors has been opened.

ty switch to disable the rear electric windows. en disabled.

altea_EN Seite 108 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Windows

Opening or closing the windows electrically

The front and rear electric windows can be operated by using

the controls on the driver's door.

Opening and closing the windows

Press the button to open a window.

Pull button to close a window .

Always close the windows fully if you park the vehicle or leave it unattended

.

You can use the electric windows for approx. 10 minutes after switching off

the ignition if neither the driver door nor the front passenger door has been

opened and the key has not been removed from the ignition.

Buttons on the driver's door

Button for window in fron

Button for window in fron

Buttons for rear windows*

Safety switch for deactiva

doors

Button for window in rear

Button for window in rear

Safety switch *

Safety switch on the driver

window buttons in the rear do

Safety switch not pressed: bu

Safety switch pressed: button

WARNING

Incorrect use of the elect

Never close the tailgate w otherwise could cause seriou that no one is in the path of a

Always take the vehicle k

Never leave children or di they have access to the keys. engine or activate any electr risk of accident. The doors ca could make assistance difficu

The electric windows will ignition and one of the front

If necessary, use the safe Make sure that they have be

Fig. 69 Detail of driver door: controls for the front and rear windows

A1

A2

A3

A4

A5

A3

Unlocking and locking 109

Safety Fir Technical Data

ork when the ignition has been switched off,

on.

e function will not work if the battery has been

if the battery is flat. The function then has to be

oll-back function will not work if there is a

ndows. Contact an Authorised Service Centre.

ll-back function. This reduces the risk

dows are closing.

when closing automatically, the window stops

ediately .

mediately (within 10 seconds) why the window

tempting to close it again. After 10 seconds the

sumes.

ucted, the window will stop at this point.

on why the window cannot be closed, try to

nds.

seconds, the window will open fully when you

ne-touch closing is reactivated.

oll-back function will not work if there is a

ndows. Contact an Authorised Service Centre.

tric windows can result in injury.

altea_EN Seite 109 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Note If the window is not able to close because it is stiff or because of an obstruc-

tion, the window will automatically open again page 109. If this happens,

check why the window could not be closed before attempting to close it

again.

One-touch opening and closing

One-touch opening and closing means you do not have to

hold down the button.

One-touch closing

Pull up the window button briefly up to the second position. The

window closes fully.

One-touch opening

Push down the window button briefly up to the second position.

The window opens fully.

Restoring one-touch opening and closing

Close all windows.

Use the key to lock the vehicle from outside and hold the key in

the lock position for at least one second. The one-touch function

is now ready for operation.

The buttons page 108, fig. 69 and have two levels for opening the

window and two for closing it. This makes it easier to open and close windows

to the desired position.

One-touch closing does not w

even if the key is in the igniti

The automatic open and clos

temporarily disconnected, or

reactivated.

The one-touch function and r

malfunction in the electric wi

Roll-back function

The windows have a ro

of injuries when the win

If a window is obstructed

at this point and lowers imm

If this happens, check im

could not be closed before at

normal automatic function re

If the window is still obstr

If there is no obvious reas

close it again within five seco

If you wait longer than 5 - 10

operate one of the buttons. O

The one-touch function and r

malfunction in the electric wi

WARNING

Incorrect use of the elec

A1 A2

Unlocking and locking110

button on the remote control for about 3

hich function electrically will be either

ton to interrupt the function.

ompletely closed, the indicators will

f*

e sliding/tilting roof

of is opened and closed using the

ignition is switched on.

Fig. 70 Roof lining description: rotary sun roof control / deflector

altea_EN Seite 110 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Always take the key with you when leaving the vehicle, even if you only intend to be gone for a short time. Please ensure that children are never left alone inside the vehicle.

The electric windows will work until the key has been removed from the ignition and one of the front doors has been opened.

Never close the tailgate without observing and ensuring it is clear, to do otherwise could cause serious injury to you and third parties. Make sure that no one is in the path of a window.

Never allow people to remain in the vehicle when you close the vehicle from the outside. The windows cannot be opened even in an emergency.

Note The roll-back function is deactivated if the windows are closed from the

outside of the vehicle using the ignition key for convenience closing

page 110.

Convenience opening and closing*

Using the door lock

Hold the key in the door lock of the driver door in either the

locking or the unlocking position until all windows are either

opened or closed.

Release the key to interrupt this function.

Using the remote control

Push the lock or unlock

seconds. All windows w

opened or closed.

Release the unlock but

Once the windows are c

flash.

Sliding/tilting roo

Opening and closing th

The sliding/tilting sunro

rotary button when the

WARNING (continued)

Unlocking and locking 111

Safety Fir Technical Data

isabled persons in the vehicle, particularly if s. Unsupervised use of a key could mean that electrical equipment is used (e.g. electric of accident! The doors can be locked using the ld make assistance difficult in an emergency.

of continues to function until one of the front removed from the ignition.

or lock of the driver's door in the locking

ng/tilting sunroof is closed.

rrupt this function.

n the remote control for about 3 seconds.

roof is closed.

tton to interrupt the function.

g sunroof has closed completely, the indi-

tary button remains in the last position selected

venience closing from outside the vehicle and

the next time you drive.

altea_EN Seite 111 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Closing the sliding/tilting sunroof

Turn the rotary button to position fig. 70 .

Opening/tilting the sliding/tilting sunroof

Turn the rotary button to position . The sunroof opens to the

convenience position where wind noise is reduced.

To open the roof further, turn the switch to position and hold

the switch in this position until the roof opens to the desired

position.

Tilting the sliding/tilting sunroof

Turn the rotary button to position .

Always close the sliding/tilting roof fully if you park the vehicle or leave it

unattended .

The sliding/tilting sunroof can be operated for up to about ten minutes after

the ignition has been switched off, provided the driver door and the front

passenger door are not opened.

Sunroof blind

The sunroof blind is opened together with the sliding/tilting roof. If required,

it can be closed by hand when the sunroof is closed.

WARNING

Incorrect use of the sliding/tilting sunroof can result in injury.

Never close the sliding/tilting sunroof without observing and ensuring it is clear, to do otherwise could cause serious injury to you and others. Make sure that no one is in the path of the sliding/tilting sunroof.

Always take the vehicle key with you when you leave the vehicle.

Never leave children or d they have access to the key the engine is started or that sliding/tilting sunroof). Risk remote control key. This cou

The sliding/tilting sunro doors is opened and the key

Convenience closing*

Using the door lock

Hold the key in the do

position until the slidi

Release the key to inte

Using the remote control

Push the lock button o

The sliding/tilting sun

Release the unlock bu

When the sliding/tiltin

cators flash once.

Note The sliding/tilting sunroof ro

if the roof is closed using con

will have to be re-positioned

AA

AB

AC

AD

WARNING (continued)

Unlocking and locking112

d against the roof opening. The sliding/tilting

n immediately if it is obstructed when closing.

een opened again by the roll-back function, it

g the rotary button at the front in position

ing roof has closed fully. Please note that the t the roll-back function.

eakdown

nroof can be closed manually.

y inserting a screwdriver in the rear section.

cover fastening, insert it in the opening as far

the spring) and close the sliding roof.

tion.

AA

altea_EN Seite 112 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Roll-back function of the sliding/tilting roof*

The sliding/tilting roof has a roll-back function which prevents larger objects

getting trapped when the roof is closed. The roll-back function does not

prevent fingers getting pinche

sunroof stops and opens agai

If the sliding/tilting roof has b

can be closed only by pressin

fig. 71 until the sliding/tilt

sunroof will now close withou

Operation in the event of a br

In case of a breakdown, the su

Remove the plastic cover b

Remove the lever from the

as possible (pushing against

Fit the lever back into posiFig. 71 Roof lining description: rotary sun roof control / deflector

Fig. 72 Emergency closing handle

Lights and visibility 113

Safety Fir Technical Data

ts*

osition or to the first stop. The

switch lights up.

lights (vehicles with front fog lights)

osition or to the second stop

lights up in the control panel.

lights (vehicles with no front fog lights)

m position to the last stop. A warning

strument panel.

e lights on. Risk of accident. The side lights are ate the road ahead and to ensure that other u. Always use your dipped headlights if it is

hts will only work with the ignition on. The side

when the ignition is turned off.

r the key has been taken out of the ignition lock,

driver door remains open. This is a reminder to

ght that it can dazzle drivers behind you. You

only when visibility is very poor.

altea_EN Seite 113 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Lights and visibility

Lights

Switching lights on and off

Switching on the side lights

Turn the light switch fig. 73 to position .

Switching on dipped headlights

Turn the light switch to position .

Switching off the lights

Turn the light switch to position 0.

Switching on the fog ligh

Pull the switch out of p

symbol in the light

Switching on the rear fog

Pull the switch out of p

. A warning lamp

Switching on the rear fog

Pull the light switch fro

lamp lights up in the in

WARNING

Never drive with just the sid not bright enough to illumin road users are able to see yo dark or if visibility is poor.

Note The dipped beam headlig

lights come on automatically

If the lights are left on afte

a buzzer will sound while the

switch the lights off.

The rear fog light is so bri

should use the rear fog light

Fig. 73 Detailed view of dash panel: lights, fog light and rear fog light control

Lights and visibility114

0.

is switched on, dipped headlights are automat-

ensitive sensor if you drive into a tunnel, for

es on the dipped headlights when the vehicle

a few seconds and it switches the lights off

ess than 65 km/h for a few minutes.

e dipped headlights when the windscreen

ontinuously for a few seconds and it switches

uous or intermittent wipe is switched off for

ght control is connected but the dipped lights

lights up on the light control fig. 74. If the

the dipped lights, the instrument and control

trol is switched on, the headlights will not be ain. Therefore, the dipped beam must be

automatic headlight system, when the key is

acoustic signal will only sound if the light

r if the vehicle is not fitted with the coming

altea_EN Seite 114 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

If you are towing a trailer equipped with a rear fog light on a vehicle with

a factory-fitted towing bracket, the rear fog light on the car will automatically

be switched off.

The use of the lighting described here is subject to the relevant statutory

requirements.

Depending on weather conditions (very cold or wet), the front and rear

lights and the indicators may be temporarily misted. This has no influence on

the life expectancy of the lighting system. The lights will soon demist when

they are switched on.

Automatic lighting*

Activation

Rotate the switch to the position Auto, this indication will light

up.

Deactivation

Turn the light switch to

Automatic lighting

If automatic headlight control

ically switched on by a light-s

example.

The motorway function switch

is driven at over 140 km/h for

when the vehicle is driven at l

The rain sensor switches on th

wipers have been operating c

the lights off when the contin

some minutes page 127.

When the automatic dipped li

are off, the warning lamp automatic control switches on

lighting is also switched on.

WARNING

If automatic headlight con switched on in fog or heavy r switched on manually.

Note For those vehicles with the

removed from the ignition, the

control is in the position o

home function.

Fig. 74 Automatic lighting

Lights and visibility 115

Safety Fir Technical Data

ps)

ad safety in vehicles fitted with bi-xenon lamps.

tely to the headlights and are switched on each

if the light setting is in position 0 or .

ed light in combination with the daytime s)

the daytime lighting are activated at the same

he instrument panel lighting will automatically

entering a tunnel) and the daytime lights will go

ed light control switches off the dipped lights

nel), the daytime lights come back on.

*

f, move the indicator and main beam lever

cator and headlamp flash) and hold in this posi-

conds while holding this position. The daytime

e switched on.

hts

f, move the indicator and main beam lever

tor and headlamp flash) and hold in this posi-

conds while holding this position. The daytime

n not be switched on.

bi-xenon lamps)

f, move the indicator and main beam lever

tor and headlamp flash).

econds. The daytime lights are deactivated and

altea_EN Seite 115 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

If the daylight driving automatic light function is switched on, the fog

lights or rear fog light cannot be switched on in addition.

The use of the lighting described here is subject to the relevant statutory

requirements.

Do not put stickers on the windscreen in front of the sensor. This may

cause disruptions or faults in the automatic lighting system.

To avoid damage to the tail lights, the lights mounted on the tailgate go

off when the tailgate is opened (according to country).

Daytime lights*

The daytime light reduces the risk of accidents by increasing

the visibility of the vehicle. The daytime running lights are

enabled automatically when the ignition is switched on. It is

automatically switched off when the side lights are turned on.

Daytime lights (halogen lamps)19)

The daytime lights increase road safety in vehicles fitted with halogen lamps.

These include the dipped, side and registration plate lights.

The daytime lights are switched on each time the ignition is turned on if the

light setting is in position 0 or . Depending upon the model, a control

lamp on the light control switch or the lighting up of the instrument panel

will indicate that the daytime lighting is on.

It is not possible for the driver to switch the daytime lights on or off. Please

contact a qualified workshop if you wish to deactivate the lights.

Daytime lights (bi-xenon lam

The daytime lights increase ro

The lights are built-in separa

time the ignition is turned on

Automatic control of the dipp lighting (bi-xenon headlamp

If the dipped light control and

time, the dipped lights and t

come on as required (e.g. on

off. When the automatic dipp

(e.g. on coming out of the tun

Activating the daytime lights

With the ignition switched of

upwards and back (right indi

tion.

Switch on the ignition for 3 se

lights are activated and can b

Deactivating the daytime lig

With the ignition switched of

upwards and back (left indica

tion.

Switch on the ignition for 3 se

lights are deactivated and ca

Deactivating daytime lights (

With the ignition switched of

upwards and back (left indica

Switch on the ignition for 3 s

can not be switched on.

19) It is only available in some countries or as an optional extra

Lights and visibility116

connected, any doors or the tailgate remain

to position .

n.

activated when the vehicle is unlocked if:

ion and

darkness.

itches off in the following cases:

elay in switching off the headlamps has ended

in.

to position .

n.

itching off the headlamps in the Coming Home

n be changed or the function can be connected

ights and visibility page 76.

ed while the lights are on, and the lights are

s door opened, no acoustic signal is heard, as

ion is on, the lights are automatically switched

pt when the light switch is in position or

altea_EN Seite 116 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Activating daytime lights (bi-xenon lamps)

With the ignition switched off, move the indicator and main beam lever

upwards and back (left indicator and headlamp flash).

Switch on the ignition for 3 seconds. The daytime lights are activated and can

be switched on.

Note Please observe any relevant legal requirements which may apply in your

country.

Coming home / leaving home function*

The Coming Home function is controlled manually. The

Leaving Home function is controlled with a photo sensor.

If the Coming Home or Leaving Home function is connected, the front side

and dipped lights, the tail lights and the registration plate light will light up

to provide assistance.

Coming home function

The Coming Home function is activated by switching off the ignition and

briefly flashing the lights. When the driver's door is opened, the Coming

Home lighting comes on. If the driver's door is already open when the lights

are flashed briefly, the Coming Home lighting comes on immediately.

When the last door of the vehicle or the tailgate is closed, the Coming Home

function starts and the switching off the headlights is delayed.

The Coming Home lighting switches off in the following cases:

On completion of the time period established for the delay in switching off

the lights after all the vehicle doors and the tailgate have been closed.

If, 30 seconds after being

open.

If the light switch is turned

If the ignition is switched o

Leaving home function

The Leaving Home function is

the light control is in posit

the photo sensor detects

The Leaving Home lighting sw

If the time period for the d

If the vehicle is locked aga

If the light switch is turned

If the ignition is switched o

Note The setting for the delay in sw

and Leaving Home function ca

or disconnected in the menu L

If the ignition key is remov

flashed briefly and the driver'

when the Coming Home funct

off after a period of time (exce

.

Lights and visibility 117

Safety Fir Technical Data

coming traffic more than necessary. At the same

dlight settings, the driver has the best possible

djusted when the dipped beam is switched on.

humb wheel down from the basic setting 0.

trol

amps (xenon lamps) are equipped with

trol. This means that the headlights will be

of the vehicle and nodding movements when

tomatically compensated for.

amps do not have headlight range control.

for driving through bends)

ends, the headlights will light the

f the road.

A2

Fig. 76 Cornering lighting using self-direc- tional headlights

altea_EN Seite 117 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Instrument and switch lighting / Headlight range control

Instrument and switch lighting

When the headlights are switched on, the brightness of the instruments and

switch lighting can be regulated to suit your requirements by turning the

thumb wheel fig. 75 .

The instrument lighting (dials and needles), the centre console illumination

and the illumination of the displays are regulated by a light sensor incorpo-

rated in the instrument cluster.

The instrument lighting (dials and needles) is switched on when the ignition

is on and the vehicle lights are off. The instrument lighting is dimmed auto-

matically as the daylight starts to fade. It goes out completely when the

ambient light level is very low. This function is intended to remind the driver

to switch on the dipped-beam headlights in good time when light conditions

become poor.

Headlight range control

By using the electrical headlight range control, you can adjust the head-

light range to the load level that is being carried in the vehicle. This way, it is

possible to avoid dazzling on

time, by using the correct hea

lighting for the road ahead.

The headlights can only be a

To lower the beam, turn the t

Dynamic headlight range con

Vehicles with gas discharge l dynamic headlight range con adjusted to suit the load level

pulling off and braking are au

Vehicles with gas discharge l

Adaptive headlights* (

When driving around b

most important areas o

Fig. 75 Dash panel: regu- lation for instrument and switch illumination and headlight range control

A1

A1

A2

A2

Lights and visibility118

t control is switched on, the dipped head- in fog. They should be switched on manually

river is personally responsible for the correct . Automatic headlight control is merely a Where necessary, switch on the lights manu-

ts are used to draw the attention of

vehicle in emergencies.

n:

afe distance from moving traffic.

Fig. 77 Dash panel: switch for hazard warning lights

altea_EN Seite 118 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Dynamic curve lights* (AFS)

The dynamic curve lights only operate if the vehicle is travelling at more than

10 km/h and the dipped headlamps are on. When taking a bend, the road is

illuminated better with directional gas discharge lamps than with conven-

tional fixed headlamps.

A fault in the system is indicated via the flashing of the control lamp on the

instrument panel. At the same time, a text message with information or

instructions to perform necessary operations may appear on the instrument

panel display. Take the vehicle to a qualified workshop and have the fault

repaired.

If the control lamp lights up on the instrument panel but all the lamps are

operating correctly page 266, there may still be a fault in the dynamic

curve lighting system (AFS). Take the vehicle to a qualified workshop and

have the fault repaired.

WARNING

If the automatic dipped light control is switched on, the dipped head- lights will not be switched on in fog. They should be switched on manually using the light switch. The driver is personally responsible for the correct use of lights in all situations. Automatic headlight control is merely a system to support the driver. Where necessary, switch on the lights manu- ally using the light switch.

Fog lights with cornering function*

When the indicator is switched on to turn or on very tight bends, the right or

left fog lamp automatically comes on to function as a cornering light. The

cornering light only operates if the dipped lights are on.

WARNING

If the automatic dipped ligh lights will not be switched on using the light switch. The d use of lights in all situations system to support the driver. ally using the light switch.

Hazard warning lights

The hazard warning ligh

other road users to your

If your vehicle breaks dow

1. Park your vehicle at a s

Lights and visibility 119

Safety Fir Technical Data

creases if your vehicle breaks down. Always ts and a warning triangle to draw the attention tationary vehicle.

talytic converter could come into contact with r the vehicle, for example dry grass or spilt !

if the hazard warning lights are left on for a long

itched off.

ning lights described here is subject to the rele-

altea_EN Seite 119 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

2. Press the button to switch on the hazard warning lights .

3. Switch the engine off.

4. Apply the handbrake.

5. On a manual gearbox engage 1st gear, and for an automatic

move the selector lever to P.

6. Use the warning triangle to draw the attention of other road users

to your vehicle.

7. Always take the vehicle key with you when you leave the vehicle.

You should switch on the hazard warning lights to warn other road users, for

instance when:

reaching the tail end of a traffic jam,

there is an emergency

your vehicle breaks down due to a technical fault,

you are towing another vehicle or your vehicle is being towed.

All turn signals flash simultaneously when the hazard warning lights are

switched on. That is that the two turn signal indicator lamps and the

indicator lamp in the switch will flash at the same time. The hazard

warning lights also work when the ignition is switched off.

Emergency braking function

When the vehicle detects sudden braking, the hazard warning lights auto-

matically come on to warn vehicles behind. The hazard warning lights go off

when the vehicle accelerates or the hazard warning light switch is pressed.

WARNING

The risk of an accident in use the hazard warning ligh of other road users to your s

Never park where the ca inflammable materials unde petrol. This could start a fire

Note The battery will run down

time, even if the ignition is sw

The use of the hazard war

vant statutory requirements.

Lights and visibility120

nd off

position .

fig. 78 to switch on the main

rds you to switch the main beam head-

he steering wheel to operate the

ts

nd remove the key from the lock.

wn to turn the right or left-hand parking

her drivers. Risk of accident! Never use the headlight flasher if they could dazzle other

when the ignition is switched on. The corre-

flashes in the dash panel. The warning lamp

als are operated, provided a trailer is correctly

e vehicle. If a turn signal bulb is defective, the

le speed. If the trailer turn signal bulbs are

oes not light up. Change the bulb.

A3

A4

altea_EN Seite 120 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Indicator and main beam headlight lever

The turn signal and main beam lever also operates the

parking lights and the headlight flasher.

The turn signal and main beam headlight lever has the following

functions:

Switching on the turn signals

Move the lever all the way up fig. 78 to indicate right, and

all the way down to indicate left.

Signalling a lane change

Push the lever up or down to the point where you incur

resistance and then release it. The turn signal will flash several

times. The corresponding warning lamp will also flash.

Switching main beam on a

Turn the light switch to

Press the lever forward

beams.

Pull the lever back towa

lights off again.

Headlight flashers

Pull the lever towards t

flasher.

Switching on parking ligh

Switch the ignition off a

Move the lever up or do

lights on, respectively.

WARNING

The main beam can dazzle ot main beam headlights or the drivers.

Note The turn signals only work

sponding warning lamp or flashes when the turn sign

attached and connected to th

warning lamp flashes at doub

damaged, warning lamp d

Fig. 78 Indicator and main beam lever

A1

A2

A1 A2

Lights and visibility 121

Safety Fir Technical Data

e 1

ed to select the following positions:

(not activated). The interior lights are automat-

ehicle is unlocked or the key removed from the

rox. 20 seconds after closing the doors. The inte-

en the vehicle is locked or when the ignition is

n .

fig. 79.

Fig. 79 Interior roof trim: front interior lights

altea_EN Seite 121 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

The main beam headlights can only be switched on if the dipped beam

headlights are already on. The warning lamp then lights up on the dash

panel.

The headlight flasher comes on for as long as you pull the lever even if

no other lights are switched on. The warning lamp then lights up on the

dash panel.

When the parking lights are switched on, the headlight and the rear light

on the corresponding side of the vehicle light up. The parking lights will only

work if the key is removed from the ignition. If the lights are switched on, a

buzzer gives an audible warning while the driver door is open.

If the turn signal lever is left on after the key has been taken out of the

ignition lock, an acoustic signal sounds when the driver door is opened. This

is a reminder to switch off the turn signal, unless of course you wish to leave

the parking light on.

Interior lights

Interior front light, typ

The switch fig. 79 is us

Courtesy light position

Rocker switch in flat position

ically switched on when the v

ignition lock And turn off app

rior lights are switched off wh

switched on.

Interior light switched on

Push the switch to the positio

Interior light switched off O

Push the switch to position O

AA

Lights and visibility122

n .

fig. 80.

closed, the interior lights will be switched off

iding the key has been removed and the cour-

his prevents the battery from discharging.

altea_EN Seite 122 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Note If not all the vehicle doors are closed, the interior lights will be switched off

after approx. 10 minutes, providing the key has been removed and the cour-

tesy light position selected. This prevents the battery from discharging.

Interior front light, type 2

The switch fig. 80 is used to select the following positions:

Courtesy light position

Rocker switch in flat position (not activated). The interior lights are automat-

ically switched on when the vehicle is unlocked or the key removed from the

ignition lock And turn off approx. 20 seconds after closing the doors. The inte-

rior lights are switched off when the vehicle is locked or when the ignition is

switched on.

Interior light switched on

Push the switch to the positio

Interior light switched off O

Push the switch to position O

Note If not all the vehicle doors are

after approx. 10 minutes, prov

tesy light position selected. T

Fig. 80 Interior roof trim: front interior lights

AA

Lights and visibility 123

Safety Fir Technical Data

off

on to switch the reading light off.

ng lights*

ed to select the following positions:

, the interior and reading lights are switched

t

(left reading light) or to position (right

. The interior lights are automatically switched

ed or the key removed from the ignition lock The

Fig. 83 Interior roof trim: rear interior lights and reading lights.

1

A4

altea_EN Seite 123 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Front reading lights

Switching on the reading light

Press the corresponding button fig. 81 and fig. 82 to switch on

the reading light.

Switching the reading lights

Press the corresponding butt

Rear interior and readi

The switch fig. 83 is us

Interior light switched off 0

In switch position fig. 83

off.

Switching on the reading ligh

Turn the switch to position

reading light).

Courtesy light position

Turn the control to position

on when the vehicle is unlock

Fig. 81 Interior roof trim: front reading lights, type 1

Fig. 82 Interior roof trim: front reading lights, type 2

AB AB

AC

A

A2

A3

Lights and visibility124

d the front passenger can be pulled out of their

vehicle and turned towards the doors fig. 84

n visors have covers. When you open the cover

p.

ll go out when the vanity mirror cover is pushed

d back up.

ut 10 minutes following the removal of the igni-

tery from discharging.

altea_EN Seite 124 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

light turns off about 20 seconds after closing the doors. The interior lights are

switched off when the vehicle is locked or when the ignition is switched on.

Interior lights or both reading lights switched on

Turn the control to position .

Note If not all the vehicle doors are closed, the interior lights will be switched off

after approx. 10 minutes, providing the key has been removed and the cour-

tesy light position selected. This prevents the battery from discharging.

Visibility

Sun visors

The sun visors for the driver an

mountings in the centre of the

The make-up mirrors in the su

, a lamp in the roof lights u

The lamp* in the roof lining wi

back or the sun visor is pushe

Note The roof lamp will turn off abo

tion key. This prevents the bat

A5

Fig. 84 Sun visor on the driver side

A1

A2

Lights and visibility 125

Safety Fir Technical Data

the left or right to set the length of the

e left: long intervals; control to the right:

per interval stages can be set using switch

osition .

osition .

position to give the windscreen a brief

art to move faster if you keep the lever

er than 2 seconds.

system

he steering wheel - Position . The wash

ediately and the wipers will start with a

and wiper systems will function at the

f over 120 km/h.

ipers will keep running for approximately

in the wiper blade* area (page

ome versions, there is the possibility of heating

the windscreen wiper blades in order to aid de-

n is switched on by pressing the rear heating

A2

A3

A4

A5

altea_EN Seite 125 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Windscreen washers

Front windscreen wipers

The windscreen wiper lever controls the windscreen wipers

and the automatic wash and wipe.

The windscreen wiper lever fig. 85 has the following positions:

Switching off the wipers

Move the lever to position .

Intermittent wipe

Move the lever up to position .

Move the control to

intervals. Control to th

short intervals. Four wi

.

Slow wipe

Move the lever up to p

Continuous wipe

Move the lever up to p

Brief wipe

Move the lever down to

wipe. The wiper will st

pressed down for long

Wash and wipe automatic

Pull the lever towards t

function will start imm

slight delay. The wash

same time at speeds o

Release the lever. The w

four seconds.

Optional heated windscreen

In some countries and with s

the windscreen in the area of

icing in the zone. The functio

window key .

Fig. 85 Windscreen wiper and windscreen wash lever

A0

A1

AA

AA

Lights and visibility126

e function is on, the intervals are directly

s way, the higher the vehicle speed the shorter

way any obstacles that are on the windscreen.

he obstacle blocks its path. Remove the

back on again.

ts that may be trapped in the side areas of the

wiper arms to the service position (horizontal).

ted jets is controlled automatically when the

ding upon the outside temperature.

altea_EN Seite 126 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

WARNING

Worn and dirty wiper blades obstruct visibility and reduce safety levels.

In cold conditions, you should not use the wash / wipe system unless you have warmed the windscreen with the heating and ventilation system. The washer fluid could otherwise freeze on the windscreen and obscure your view of the road.

Always note the corresponding warnings on page 236.

Caution In icy conditions, always check that the wiper blades are not frozen to the

glass before using the wipers for the first time. If you switch on the wipers

when the wiper blades are frozen to the windscreen, you could damage both

the wiper blades and the wiper motor.

Note The windscreen wipers will only work when the ignition is switched on.

In certain versions of vehicles with alarms, the windscreen wiper will only

work when the ignition is on and the bonnet closed.

When in use, the wipers do not go as far as the rest position. When the

lever is moved to position 0, they are totally hidden.

The next speed down will automatically be selected if wiper speed

page 125, fig. 85 or is selected when the vehicle stops. The set speed

will be resumed when the vehicle starts again

The windscreen will be wiped again after approximately five seconds once

the automatic wipe/wash system has been operated, provided the vehicle

is in transit (drip function). If you activate the wipers less than three seconds

after the drip function, a new wash sequence will begin without the last wipe.

For the drip function to work again, you have to turn the ignition off and

then on again.

When the intermittent wip

proportional to the speed. Thi

the intervals.

The wiper will try to wipe a

The wiper will stop moving if t

obstacle and switch the wiper

Before removing any objec

windscreen, always move the

The heat output of the hea

ignition is switched on, depen

A2

A3

Lights and visibility 127

Safety Fir Technical Data

sor

iper lever into position fig. 87.

the left or right to set the sensitivity of the

the right: highly sensitive. Control to the

interval wipe function. You will have to switch

switch off the ignition. This is done by switching

n off and back on.

windscreen in front of the sensor. This may

ults.

A1

altea_EN Seite 127 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Rain sensor*

The rain sensor controls the frequency of the windscreen

wiper intervals, depending on the amount of rain.

Switching on the rain sen

Move the windscreen w

Move the control to

rain sensor. Control to

left: less sensitive.

The rain sensor is part of the

the rain sensor back on if you

the wiper intermittent functio

Note Do not put stickers on the

cause sensor disruption or fa

Fig. 86 Rain sensor*

Fig. 87 Windscreen wiper lever

AA

Lights and visibility128

en wiper and washer system

ards to position fig. 88. The wash

diately and the wiper will start with a

reen wash system will function as long as

is position.

iper then wipes for approximately 4

tervals again.

asher system stops and the wipers func-

e will obstruct visibility and reduce safety.

nding warnings on page 236.

k that the wiper blade is not frozen to the glass

first time. If you switch on the wiper when the

ass, this could damage both the wiper blade

only function when the ignition is switched on

indscreen wipers switched on, the rear wind-

pe.

A7

altea_EN Seite 128 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Rear window wiper

The windscreen wiper lever operates the windscreen wiper

and the wash and wipe system for the rear window.

Switching on the interval wipe

Press the lever forwards to position fig. 88. The wiper will

wipe the window approximately every 6 seconds.

Switching off the interval wipe function

Pull the lever back from position towards the steering wheel.

The wiper will continue to function for a short period if you switch

off whilst the wipers are in motion.

Switching on the windscre

Press the lever fully forw

function will start imme

slight delay. The windsc

you hold the lever in th

Release the lever. The w

seconds, and then in in

Release the lever. The w

tion.

WARNING

A worn or dirty wiper blad

Always note the correspo

Caution In icy conditions, always chec

before using the wiper for the

wiper blade is frozen to the gl

and the wiper motor.

Note The windscreen wiper will

and the tailgate is closed.

In reverse gear, with the w

screen wiper will make one wi

Fig. 88 Windscreen wiper and windscreen wash lever: rear window wiper

A6

A6

Lights and visibility 129

Safety Fir Technical Data

interior mirror*

zle function can be switched on and off

function

. 89. Warning lamp goes out:

function

. 89. Warning lamp is lit.

tivated every time the ignition is switched on.

ts up in the mirror housing.

is activated the interior mirror will darken auto- ount of light it receives (for example from the

d). The anti-dazzle function is cancelled if

Fig. 89 Automatic anti- dazzle interior mirror.

AB

altea_EN Seite 129 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Headlight washer system

The headlight washers clean the headlight lenses.

The headlight washers are activated automatically when the windscreen

washer is used and the windscreen wiper lever is pulled towards the steering

wheel for at least 1.5 seconds provided the dipped headlights or main

beams are switched on. Clean off stubborn dirt (insects, etc.) from the head-

lights at regular intervals, for instance when filling the fuel tank.

Note To ensure that the headlight washers work properly in winter, keep the

nozzle holders in the bumper free of snow and remove any ice with a de-icer

spray.

To remove water, the windscreen wipers will be activated from time to

time, the headlight wipers will be activated every three cycles.

Mirrors

Interior mirror

It is dangerous to drive if you cannot see clearly through the

rear window.

Manual anti-dazzle function for interior mirror

In the basic mirror position, the lever at the bottom edge of the mirror should

be at the front. Pull the lever to the back to select the anti-dazzle function.

Automatic anti-dazzle

The automatic anti-daz

as desired.

Switching off anti-dazzle

Press button fig

Switching on anti-dazzle

Press button fig

Anti-dazzle function

The anti-dazzle function is ac

The green indicator lamp ligh

When the anti-dazzle function

matically according to the am

headlights of a vehicle behin

reverse gear is engaged.

AA

AA

Lights and visibility130

position the mirror so that you have a

f the vehicle.

(right exterior mirror).

to position the mirror so that you have a

f the car .

rs*

to the central position fig. 90 so

w mirrors warm up and the heated wind-

de rest area is activated page 125.

is not activated in temperatures above

*

90 to position to fold in the exterior

ays fold in the exterior mirrors if you are

matic car wash. This will help prevent

ith convenience control*

ror will fold back automatically with

ith the remote or the key)

the door and use the contact

ck out to the extended position*

r position to fold the exterior mirrors back

A1

altea_EN Seite 130 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Note The automatic anti-dazzle function will only work properly if the sun

blind* for the rear window is retracted and there are no other objects

preventing light from reaching the interior mirror.

If you have to stick any type of sticker on the windscreen, do not do so in

front of the sensors. Doing so could prevent the anti-dazzle function from

working well or even from working at all.

Exterior mirrors

The exterior mirrors can be adjusted using the rotary knob in

the centre console.

Basic setting of exterior mirrors

1. Turn knob fig. 90 to position L (left exterior mirror).

2. Turn the rotary knob to

good view to the rear o

3. Turn knob to position R

4. Swivel the rotary knob

good view to the rear o

Heating the exterior mirro

Turn the knob forwards

that the heated rear vie

screen* in the wiper bla

The wing mirror heating

approximately 20C.

Folding in exterior mirrors

Turn the control fig.

mirrors. You should alw

driving through an auto

damage.

Folding rear view mirrors w

The outer rear view mir

convenience closing (w

To unfold it again, open

Folding exterior mirrors ba

Turn the knob to anothe

out .

Fig. 90 Controls of exte- rior mirrors

Lights and visibility 131

Safety Fir Technical Data

be adjusted separately or simultaneously, as

unction does not activate with speeds higher

altea_EN Seite 131 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Synchronised mirror adjustment

1. Turn the control to the position L (left exterior mirror).

2. Turn the rotary knob to position the mirror so that you have a

good view to the rear of the vehicle. The right exterior mirror will

be adjusted at the same time (synchronised).

WARNING

The rear view convex or aspheric mirror increase the field of vision however the objects appear smaller and further away in the mirrors. If you use these mirrors to estimate the distance to vehicles behind you when changing lane, you could make a mistake. Risk of accident.

If possible, use the interior mirror to estimate distances to vehicles behind you.

Make sure that you do not get your finger trapped between the mirror and the mirror base when folding back the mirrors. Risk of injury!

For the sake of the environment The exterior mirror heating should be switched off when it is no longer

needed. Otherwise, it is an unnecessary fuel waste.

Note If the electrical adjustment ever fails to operate, the mirrors can be

adjusted by hand by lightly pressing the edge of the mirror glass.

In vehicles with electric wing mirrors, the following points should be

observed: if, due to an external force (e.g. a knock while manoeuvring), the

adjustment of the mirror housing is altered, the mirror will have to be

completely folded electrically. Do not readjust the mirror housing by hand, as

this will interfere with the mirror adjuster function.

The rear view mirrors can

described before.

The wing mirrors folding f

than 40 km/h.

Seats and stowage132

the foot well when the vehicle is moving; panel, out of the window or on the seat. This . An incorrect sitting position exposes you to

case of a sudden braking or an accident. If the sustain severe injuries due to an incorrect

er and front passenger to keep a distance of ng wheel or dash panel. Failure to respect the t the airbag will not protect you. Risk of fatal

the driver and the steering wheel or between dash panel should always be as great as

passenger seat only when the vehicle is to the forwards/backwards adjustment of the at could move unexpectedly while the vehicle

e the risk of an accident and therefore, injury. our seat, you will assume an incorrect sitting ts.

to installing a child seat on the front ling a child seat, observe the warning note in .

altea_EN Seite 132 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Seats and stowage

The importance of correct seat adjustment

Proper seat adjustment optimises the level of protection

offered by seat belts and airbags.

Your vehicle has five passenger seats, two individual front seats and three

places on the rear seat.. Each seat is equipped with a three-point seat belt.

The driver seat and the front passenger seat can be adjusted in many ways to

suit the physical requirements of the vehicle occupants. The correct seat

position is very important for:

a fast and easy operation of all controls on the instrument panel,

a relaxed posture which does not cause drowsiness,

safe driving page 7,

ensuring that the seat belts and airbag system provide maximum protec-

tion page 19.

WARNING

If the driver and passengers assume improper sitting positions, they may sustain critical injuries.

More people than available seats must never be transported in your vehicle.

Every passenger in the vehicle must properly fasten and wear the seat belt belonging to his or her seat. Children must be protected with an appro- priate child restraint system page 46, Child safety.

The front seats and all head restraints must always be adjusted to body size and the seat belt must always be properly adjusted to provide you and your passengers with optimum protection.

Always keep your feet on never rest them on the dash is also applied to passengers an increased risk of injury in airbag is triggered, you could sitting position.

It is important for the driv at least 25 cm from the steeri minimum distance means tha injury. The distance between the front passenger and the possible.

Adjust the driver or front stationary. This also applies rear seats. Otherwise, your se is moving. This could increas In addition, while adjusting y position. Risk of fatal acciden

Special guidelines apply passenger seat. When instal the page 46, Child safety

WARNING (continued)

Seats and stowage 133

Safety Fir Technical Data

int so that its upper edge is at the same

head, or as close as possible to the same

r head and, at minimum, at eye level

2.

page 134

restraints removed or improperly adjusted injuries.

d restraints could lead to death in the event of

d restraints also increase the risk of injury d driving or braking manoeuvres.

t always be adjusted according to the

Fig. 92 Side view: head restraints and seat belts correctly adjusted

altea_EN Seite 133 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Head restraints

Correct adjustment of head restraints

Properly adjusted head restraints are an important part of

passengers protection and can reduce the risk of injuries in

most accident situations.

Adjust the head restra

level as the top of your

level as the top of you

fig. 91 and fig. 9

Adjusting the head restraints

WARNING

Travelling with the head increases the risk of severe

Improperly adjusted hea a collision or accident.

Incorrectly adjusted hea during sudden or unexpecte

The head restraints mus passenger's height.

Fig. 91 Front view: head restraints and seat belts correctly adjusted

Seats and stowage134

int, press the button and push head

d restraint engages securely in one of its

ats)

t forward or back to the required position.

int

up as far as it will go.

93 (arrow).

f fitting without releasing the button.

t into the guides on the rear backrest.

n.

nt to suit body size page 14 and

straints have been removed. Risk of injury.

traints are in an unsuitable position, there is

straint, you must always adjust it properly for tection.

warnings page 133, Correct adjustment

altea_EN Seite 134 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Removing or adjusting head restraints

The head restraints can be adjusted by moving them up and

down.

Adjusting height (front seats)

Press the button on the side and pull upwards to the desired

position.

To lower the head restraint, press the button and push head

restraint downwards.

Make sure that it engages securely into position.

Adjusting height (rear seats)

Press the button on the side and pull upwards to the desired

position.

To lower the head restra

restraint downwards.

Make sure that the hea

positions page 14.

Angle adjustment (front se

Press the head restrain

Removing the head restra

Push the head restraint

Press the button fig.

Pull head restraint out o

Fitting the head restraint

Insert the head restrain

Push head restraint dow

Adjust the head restrai

page 13.

WARNING

Never drive if the head re

Never drive if the head res a risk of serious injury.

After refitting the head re height to achieve optimal pro

Please observe the safety of head restraints.

Fig. 93 Adjusting and removing the head restraints

Seats and stowage 135

Safety Fir Technical Data

t angle

e backrest and turn the hand wheel.

support*

e backrest and turn the hand wheel to

port.

cushioned area is determined by the settings

his supports the natural curvature of the spine

r front passenger seat while the vehicle is in r seat, you will assume an incorrect sitting nts. Adjust the driver or front passenger seat tionary.

ry to the driver and front passenger in case of dent, never drive with the backrest tilted um protection of the seat belt can be achieved in an upright position and the driver and front justed their seat belts. The further the back- e greater the risk of injury due to improper

curing the seat height into forwards/back- be caused if the backrest is tilted without due

altea_EN Seite 135 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Front seats

Adjustment of the front seats

The control elements in fig. 94 are mirrored for the front right-

hand seat.

Adjusting the seat forwards and backwards

Pull up the grip and move the seat forwards or backwards.

Then release the grip and move the seat further until the

catch engages.

Adjusting the seat height*

Pull the lever up or push down (several times if necessary) from

its home position. This adjusts the seat height in stages.

Adjusting the backres

Take your weight off th

Adjusting the lumbar

Take your weight off th

adjust the lumbar sup

The backrest curvature of the

made in the lumbar region. T

very effectively.

WARNING

Never adjust the driver o motion. While adjusting you position. Risk of fatal accide only when the vehicle is sta

To reduce the risk of inju a sudden braking or an acci towards the rear. The maxim only when the backrests are passenger have properly ad rests are tilted to the rear, th positioning of the belt web!

Exercise caution when se wards position. Injuries can care and attention.

Fig. 94 Front left seat controls

A1

A1

A2

A3

A4

Seats and stowage136

cles without Climatronic

mb wheel fig. 95 to switch on the seat

ng is switched off in the 0 position.

cles with Climatronic

ch on the seat heating.

eating at maximum level (level 3).

eating at medium level (level 2).

t seat heating at minimum level (level 1).

sed four times, the heating goes off and

0).

hen the ignition is switched on. The left thumb

d the right thumb wheel the right seat.

g elements, please do not kneel on the seat or

le point to the seat cushion and backrest.

altea_EN Seite 136 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Heated seats*

The front seat cushions and backrests can be heated electri-

cally.

Front seat heating for vehi

Turn the appropriate thu

heating. The seat heati

Front seat heating for vehi

Press button to swit

Press once to set seat h

Press twice to set seat h

Press three times to se

When the button is pres

the LED goes out (level

The seat heating only works w

wheel controls the left seat an

Caution To avoid damaging the heatin

apply sharp pressure at a sing

Fig. 95 Thumb wheel for the front seat heating

Fig. 96 Front seat heating with Climatronic

AA

Seats and stowage 137

Safety Fir Technical Data

orwards or backwards independently. The

/3 of the seat. There are various possible

unlock the lever in the direction of the

forwards or backwards to the desired

t

e top. Pull the loop on the side of the seat

rection of the arrow and hold the loop in

backrest to the required position and

n the vehicle is stationary. Otherwise, your ly while the vehicle is moving. This could

ent and therefore, injury.

s down until the seat is moved, this is to avoid le.

e moved, is fixed in position.

aximum luggage compartment space, put the

, without moving.

aximum space without putting the seatbacks

d to the desired position.

altea_EN Seite 137 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Rear seat bench

Seat adjustment

The seats may be moved f

movement can be 1/3 or 2

positions.

Adjusting reach

In the seated position,

arrow fig. 97.

Move the seat cushion

position.

Backrest angle adjustmen

Hold the backrest at th

fig. 98 in the di

this position. Push the

release the loop.

WARNING

Adjust the seat only whe seat could move unexpected increase the risk of an accid

Do not push the seatback damage to the centre conso

Ensure that the seat, onc

Note In order to maintain the m

seatbacks in position normal

In order to maintain the m

down, move the seats forwar

Fig. 97 For unlocking the rear seat

Fig. 98 Rear seat back- rest angle adjustment

A1

Seats and stowage138

ckrests down

e of the seat fig. 100 in the direc-

t the seat backrest into position.

backrest has engaged properly in position

on the seats may not, for reasons of safety, be

krest into position ensure that the seat belts

Fig. 100 Folding or opening the front seat backrests

A1

altea_EN Seite 138 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Folding the seat backrests down

Pull the loop on the side of the seat fig. 99 .

In this position the back rest is locked. This is the reason why the loop located

on the side of the seat must be pulled in the direction of the arrow to open the

backrest.

WARNING

You should check that the backrest has engaged properly in position after the loop is released.

The locking system loops on the seats may not, for reasons of safety, be used to secure any items.

Folding the rear seat ba

Pull the loop on the sid

tion of the arrow and lif

WARNING

You should check that the after the loop is released.

The locking system loops used to secure any items.

After locking the seat bac protrude from the seat.

Fig. 99 Folding or opening the rear seat backrests

A1

Seats and stowage 139

Safety Fir Technical Data

t with stowage area

in the armrest.

rea, lift the armrest up in the direction of

nd then lift the cover.

r* or the lower stowage area, pull on the

pressing on the button.

rea, push the armrest down.

ea closed while the vehicle is in motion to the armrest during a sudden braking

f an accident.

Fig. 102 Front armrest with stowage area

altea_EN Seite 139 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Stowage compartments

Stowage compartment on the front passenger side

The compartment can be opened by pulling the lever fig. 101.

WARNING

Always keep the stowage compartment cover closed while the vehicle is in motion in order to reduce the risk of injury caused by a sudden braking or by an accident.

Centre arm rest at fron

There is a stowage area

To open the stowage a

the arrow fig. 102 a

To access the CD loade

armrest cover without

To close the stowage a

WARNING

Always keep the stowage ar reduce the risk of injury from manoeuvre or in the event o

Fig. 101 Passenger side: stowage compartment

Seats and stowage140

aximum weight of 1.5 kg.

er cover open. There is an injury risk for eased in case of sudden braking or an

to the rear of the front seat backrests.

it up in the direction of the arrow

Fig. 104 Folding table of front left seat

altea_EN Seite 140 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Note The CD changer is located in this compartment.

Stowage areas under the front seats*

There is a stowage locker with a cover under each front seat.

The drawer* fig. 103 is opened by pushing the button and putting the

cover back.

There are two open positions of 15 and 60 degrees depending on the pres-

sure applied to the cover. In the 60 degree position, the cover will collapse if

too much pressure is applied.

To close the drawer, press the cover until it locks into position.

WARNING

The drawers will hold a m

Do not drive with the draw passengers if the cargo is rel accident.

Folding table*

Folding tables are fitted

To open the table, open

fig. 104.

Fig. 103 Stowage area under the front seats

AA

Seats and stowage 141

Safety Fir Technical Data

e cover to open these compartments

will then open.

ss it up until it engages.

ea cover closed while the vehicle is in motion uring a sudden braking manoeuvre or in the

prevent any items from being thrown through

altea_EN Seite 141 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

WARNING

The folding tables may not be folded down whilst the vehicle is in motion and anyone is seated on the second row of seats. There is a risk on injury during a sudden braking manoeuvre! The table must therefore be closed and properly secured whilst the vehicle is in motion.

Never place hot drinks in the drink holders. During normal or sudden driving manoeuvres, sudden braking or an accident, the hot drink could be spilled. Danger of scalding.

Caution When driving, do not leave open cans in the cup holders. The drink might be

spilt on braking, for example, and could damage the vehicle.

Roof stowage compartment*

There are four stowage compartments in the roof

Press the button on th

fig. 105. The cover

To close the cover, pre

WARNING

Always keep the stowage ar to reduce the risk of injury d event of an accident and to the vehicle interior.

Fig. 105 Roof stowage compartments

Seats and stowage142

rtment floor and fold it back all the way

fig. 107, into the side grooves depending

ts to be transported. The onboard tool kit

e located underneath the luggage

ed for a maximum load of 50 kg. For heavier

move.

m authorised weight for the vehicle

altea_EN Seite 142 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Stowage in the luggage compartment*

There is a variable stowage area* in the luggage compart-

ment floor.

Lift the luggage compa

fig. 106.

Fit the separator on the size of the objec

and the spare wheel ar

compartment.

Note The folding table is design

loads fold up the table and re

Do not exceed the maximu

page 285.

Fig. 106 Foldable luggage compartment cover

Fig. 107 Luggage compartment divider

AA

Seats and stowage 143

Safety Fir Technical Data

ound:

d rear),

ggage compartment,

in the luggage compartment (only on vehicles

e kit*.

d on the rear roof handles.

ts on the dashboard. These objects could be compartment when the vehicle is moving (e.g. or cornering) and distract the driver. Risk of

n fall from the centre console or other stowage ll while the vehicle is moving. In the event of a you will not be able to use the brake, clutch or .

at hooks must not restrict the driver's view. oks are intended only for use with light arti-

e any hard, sharp or heavy objects in hanging udden braking manoeuvres or accidents, espe- deployment, these objects could injure the

altea_EN Seite 143 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Luggage compartment net

There is a retaining net in the luggage compartment for

securing objects.

Use the fastening rings located on the side of the luggage

compartment to attach the retaining net fig. 108.

Note The folding table is designed for a maximum load of 50 kg. For heavier

loads fold up the table and remove.

Do not exceed the maximum authorised weight for the vehicle

page 285.

Other stowage areas

Other stowage areas can be f

in the centre console,

in the door trims (front an

in the side trims of the lu

in the spare wheel recess

with an optional anti-punctur

The clothes hooks are locate

WARNING

Do not store loose objec flung through the passenger while accelerating, braking accident.

Ensure that no objects ca areas into the driver foot we sudden braking manoeuvre, accelerator. Risk of accident

Clothing hung on the co Risk of accident. The coat ho cles of clothing. Do not leav articles of clothing. During s cially those involving airbag vehicle occupants.

Fig. 108 Retaining net

Seats and stowage144

rest*

Fig. 110 Opening the rear drink holders

Fig. 111 Rear armrest/drink holder

altea_EN Seite 144 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Drinks holders at the front

In the centre console, in front of the gear lever, there are two drink holders

fig. 109.

WARNING

Never place hot drinks in the drink holders. During normal or sudden driving manoeuvres, sudden braking or an accident, the hot drink could be spilled. Danger of scalding.

Never use rigid materials (for example, glass or ceramic), these could cause injury in the case of an accident.

Rear drink holder* / Arm

Fig. 109 Front drink holder

Seats and stowage 145

Safety Fir Technical Data

mpartment

ction of the rear seat back rest, in order to

n of the back rest.

compartment mounting plate

side of the vehicle, through the rear

hould be fitted between the back rest and

seat area.

clips the cushion frame. The rings of the

rtment mounting plate appear at the front

the plate clip, tilt the rear back rest of the

slightly and then lean the back rest back-

ng of the mobile stowage compartment

te easier.

Fig. 113 Mobile stowage compartment mounting plate

AH

altea_EN Seite 145 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Opening and closing the armrest* / drink holder*

To open, pull the loop in the direction of the arrow page 144,

fig. 110 .

To close, lift the Drink holder* / armrest* in the direction of the

arrow page 144, fig. 111 .

WARNING

Ensure that the load in the luggage compartment is correctly secured with the retainer net when travelling with the armrest down page 143.

Multi-purpose* mobile stowage compartment - Fitting and removal

This stowage compartment may only be placed in the central

area of the rear seat

Fitting mobile stowage co

Fold down the small se

access the large sectio

Fit the mobile stowage

fig. 113 from the in

section of the seat. It s

the seat, in the central

Push the plate until it

mobile stowage compa

of the seat.

If it is difficult to make

large section forwards

wards to make the fitti

onto the mounting pla

A1

A2

Fig. 112 Mobile stowage compartment Installation

Seats and stowage146

stowage compartment - General

ent may only be placed in the central

Fig. 114 Mobile stowage compartment Opening

Fig. 115 Mobile stowage compartment Duties

altea_EN Seite 146 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Place the mobile stowage compartment onto the foam of the

central seat.

Set both mounting pieces together page 145, fig. 112,

with both mounting rings page 145, fig. 113 and press

hard until both the clips completely connect with the rings.

Removing mobile stowage compartment

Pull each of the buttons page 145, fig. 112 on the clips

(red buttons) forwards, until they snap out of place.

Fold the larger seat down and remove the mobile stowage

compartment mounting plate.

Multi-purpose* mobile information

This stowage compartm

area of the rear seat

AE

AG

AF

Seats and stowage 147

Safety Fir Technical Data

ing, keep the tables stored inside the mobile the cover closed, and likewise when they are

the drink holders. The drink may spill and le is moving.

drink holder when the vehicle is in motion, n may be flung around the vehicle and cause

ting plate is correctly clipped onto the cushion

use, store inside the stowage compartment.

e compartment is not in use, it should always net in the luggage compartment.

wage compartment is correctly fitted, pulling it

ox and checking that both safety clips are

gs.

altea_EN Seite 147 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Opening

Lift the cover , in area page 146, fig. 114.

Closing

Push the cover down, until it clips into place.

Uses of the mobile stowage compartment

The front open glove box may be used to store small objects that will not

damage passengers in the event that the objects are flung around the interior

of the vehicle.

The drink holders are used for holding drink cans or cups.

The elastic belt on the side may be used for keeping papers and maga-

zines.

The tables may be used as a support for writing.

To use the table page 146, fig. 115, it must be removed from its

compartment on the side of the mobile stowage compartment and fitted into

compartment page 146, fig. 115 on the front section of the mobile

stowage compartment.

The table in the right-hand compartment is fitted in the left-hand compart-

ment of the front of the mobile stowage compartment and the table in the left-

hand compartment is fitted in the right-hand compartment.

The tables have two positions for use and cannot be interchanged.

WARNING

The mobile stowage compartment supports a maximum load of 5 kg. Do not overload.

Do not drive when the cover of the mobile stowage compartment is open.

Do not drive when the tables are set up for use.

When the vehicle is mov stowage compartment with not in use

Never place hot drinks in cause burns when the vehic

Do not leave cans in the there is a danger that the ca injury.

Make sure that the moun frame.

When the plate is not in

When the mobile stowag be fastened by the retaining

Note Check that the mobile sto

forwards by the front glove b

correctly clipped onto the rin

AB AA

AC

AD

WARNING (continued)

Seats and stowage148

ighter fig. 117 to activate it .

op out slightly.

hter and light the cigarette on the

tte lighter can lead to serious injuries or start

. Carelessness or negligence when using the urns, risk of injury.

en the ignition is turned on or the engine is fire, never leave children alone inside the

Fig. 117 The cigarette lighter is located in the electric socket on the front of the centre console

altea_EN Seite 148 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Ashtrays*, cigarette lighter* and electrical sockets

Ashtray*

Opening and closing the ashtray

To open the ashtray, lift the cover fig. 116.

To close, push the cover down.

Emptying the ashtray

Extract the ashtray and empty it.

WARNING

Never put paper in the ashtray. Hot ash could ignite the paper in the ashtray and cause a fire.

Cigarette lighter*

Press on the cigarette l

Wait for the lighter to p

Pull out the cigarette lig

glowing coil.

WARNING

Improper use of the cigare a fire.

Using the lighter carefully cigarette lighter can cause b

The lighter only works wh running. To avoid the risk of vehicle.

Fig. 116 Ashtray located in the front drink holder

Seats and stowage 149

Safety Fir Technical Data

iances with the engine switched off will cause a

l accessories, see the instructions on

tion (AUX-IN)*

ig. 119.

possible (see Radio manual).

Fig. 119 Auxiliary audio connection

altea_EN Seite 149 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Electrical sockets

Electrical equipment can be connected to any of the 12 volt

sockets.

Electrical accessories may be connected to the 12 volt power point in the front

central console fig. 118 of the passenger compartment and that of the

boot* The appliances connected to each power point must not exceed a

power rating of 120 Watt.

WARNING

The current power points and the connected accessories will only operate when the ignition is on or when the engine is running. Improper use of the sockets or electrical accessories can lead to serious injuries or cause a fire. To avoid the risk of injury, never leave children alone inside the vehicle.

Note The use of electrical appl

battery discharge.

Before using any electrica

page 218.

Auxiliary audio connec

Lift the AUX. cover f

Insert the pin as far as

Fig. 118 Socket, centre console, front

Seats and stowage150

e use of this equipment, please see the Radio

Fig. 121 Connection in central armrest compart- ment

altea_EN Seite 150 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

AUX RSE connection*

This connector may be used as an audio input (red and white connectors) or

audio and video connector (red, white and yellow connectors). For more

details about the use of this audio and video source, see the RSE manual.

MEDIA-IN* connector

For information concerning th

handbook.

Fig. 120 AUX RSE connection

Seats and stowage 151

Safety Fir Technical Data

ed in a stowage box under the luggage compart-

n this storage compartment, turn the knob* 90

t part of the vehicle's standard equipment.

tinguisher

a stowage box on the left side of the luggage

hed to the luggage compartment carpet by

re extinguisher are not part of the vehicle's

ply with legal requirements.

f the contents of the first aid kit. You should

soon as possible after the shelf-life date of the

t comply with legal requirements.

uisher is fully functional. The fire extinguisher

d regularly. The sticker on the fire extinguisher

te for checking.

ries and emergency equipment see the instruc-

res page 218.

altea_EN Seite 151 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

First-aid kit, warning triangle, fire extinguisher

Warning triangle

The warning triangle* is locat

ment cover fig. 122. To ope

fig. 123.

Note The warning triangle is no

First-aid kit and fire ex

The first-aid kit* is located in

compartment.

The fire extinguisher* is attac

Velcro.

Note The first-aid kit and the fi

standard equipment.

The first aid kit must com

Observe the expiry date o

purchase a new first-aid kit as

first-aid kit has expired.

The fire extinguisher mus

Ensure that the fire exting

should, therefore, be checke

will inform you of the next da

Before acquiring accesso

tions in Accessories and spa

Fig. 122 Warning triangle storage under the rear cover

Fig. 123 Opening the storage compartment

Seats and stowage152

d chafe against the wires of the heating

d cause damage.

f the rear side windows must not be covered as

ing extracted from the vehicle.

altea_EN Seite 152 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Luggage compartment

Stowing luggage

All luggage must be securely stowed.

Please observe the following points to ensure the vehicle handles

well at all times:

Distribute the load as evenly as possible.

Place heavy objects as far forward in the luggage compartment

as possible.

Secure luggage in the luggage compartment with suitable straps

on the fastening rings.

WARNING

Loose luggage and other loose items in the vehicle can cause serious injuries.

Loose objects in the luggage compartment can suddenly move and change the way the vehicle handles.

During sudden manoeuvres or accidents, loose objects in the passenger compartment can be flung forward, injuring vehicle occupants.

Always store objects in the luggage compartment and secure with suit- able straps. This is especially important for heavy objects.

When you transport heavy objects, always take in account that a change in the centre of gravity can also cause changes in vehicle handling.

Please observe information on safe driving page 7, Safe driving.

Caution Hard objects on the shelf coul

element in the rear window an

Note The ventilation slots in front o

this would prevent stale air be

Seats and stowage 153

Safety Fir Technical Data

its slot, in its rest position and pull

compartment should remain closed.

mpartment

partment by turning the knob* 90

compartment is freed from the pivot point

bjects on the open stowage compartment, the vehicle occupants in case of sudden

e, ensure that the stowage compartment tray is

mean that the rear stowage tray is not correctly

damaged.

remove the tray.

items of clothing on the luggage compartment

uced.

a storage compartment*, it should only be used

les and light-weight articles.

altea_EN Seite 153 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Rear shelf

Removing the cover

Unhook the loops fig. 124 from housings

Extract the cover from

outwards. The storage

To remove the storage co

Open the storage com

page 151, fig. 123.

Pull outwards until the

fig. 125.

WARNING

Do not place heavy or hard o because they will endanger braking.

Caution Before closing the tailgat

correctly fitted.

An overloaded boot could

seated and it may be bent or

If the boot is overloaded,

Note Ensure that, when placing

cover, rear visibility is not red

If the vehicle is fitted with

to store the emergency triang

Fig. 124 Storage shelf

Fig. 125 Removing storage shelf

AB AA

Seats and stowage154

altea_EN Seite 154 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Roof carrier*

Please observe the following points if you intend to carry loads on the roof:

For safety reasons, only luggage racks and accessories approved by SEAT

should be used.

It is imperative to precisely follow the fitting instructions included for the

rack, taking special care when fitting the front bar in the holes designed for

this and the rear bar between the marks on the upper part of the rear door

frame while respecting the correct direction of travel indicated in the installa-

tion manual. Not following these instructions may damage the bodywork.

Pay special attention to the tightening torque of the attachment bolts and

check them following a short journey. If necessary, retighten the bolts and

check them at regular intervals.

Distribute the load evenly. A maximum load of 40 kg only is permitted for

each roof carrier system support bar, the load must be distributed evenly

along the entire length. However, the maximum load permitted for the entire

roof (including the support system) of 75 kg must not be exceeded nor should

the total weight of the vehicle be exceeded. See the chapter on Technical

Data.

When transporting heavy or large objects on the roof, any change in the

normal vehicle behaviour due to a change in the centre of gravity or an

increased wind resistance must be taken into account. For this reason, a suit-

able speed and driving style must be used.

For those vehicles fitted with a sunroof*, ensure that it does not interfere

with the load on the roof carrier system when opened.

Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning 155

Safety Fir Technical Data

is needed to defrost the windows quickly, is

ne has reached its operating temperature.

hed off automatically approximately 20 minutes

n also be switched off beforehand by pushing

vents strong odours in the outside air from

or example when passing through a tunnel or in

g. 126 On the dash panel there are the heating ntrols

altea_EN Seite 155 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning

Heating

Controls and equipment

Using the controls fig. 126 and and the control you

can set the temperature, air distribution and the turbine speed.

To switch a function on or off, press the appropriate button or

. When the function is activated, the display window in the

lower left of the button is lit.

Temperature

With the regulator the heating level is determined. The required tempera-

ture inside the vehicle cannot be lower than the ambient temperature.

Maximum heat output, which

only available when the engi

Rear window heater

This function will be switc

after being switched on. It ca

the button

Air recirculation mode

Air recirculation mode pre

entering the vehicle interior, f

queuing traffic .

Fi co

A1 A4 A5

A2

A3

A1

A2

A3

Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning156

altea_EN Seite 156 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

With low temperatures outside, the air recirculation increases the effective-

ness of the heating system by heating the air inside the passenger compart-

ment rather than the air from outside.

Air distribution

Control for setting the flow of air in the required direction.

Air distribution towards the windscreen. If the windscreen air output is

on and the air recirculation mode is pressed, this remains active. When the

recirculation mode is on, if the air distribution towards the windscreen mode

is selected, the recirculation mode is deactivated. For safety reasons, the air

recirculation mode should not be connected.

Air distribution to the upper body.

Air distribution to footwell

Air distribution to the windscreen and the foot well.

Blower

The air flow can be set at four speeds with the control . The air flow should

always be set at the lowest speed when driving slowly.

WARNING

For road safety all windows must be clear of ice, snow, and condensa- tion. This is essential to ensure good visibility. Please familiarise yourself with the correct operation of the heating and ventilation system, including the anti-fog/defrost functions for the windscreens.

In air recirculation mode, no cold air from the outside enters the vehicle interior. The windows can quickly fog over if the heating is switched off. Therefore, never leave the air recirculation mode switched on for a long time (risk of accident).

Note Please observe the general notes page 165.

A4

A5

Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning 157

Safety Fir Technical Data

w heating. The heating will be switched off auto-

20 minutes after switching on. It can also be

by pushing the button.

tion mode page 159

page 158

four speed settings for the air flow. The air flow

the lowest speed when driving slowly.

must be clear of ice, snow, and condensation. ood visibility. Please familiarise yourself with heating and ventilation system, including the r the windscreens.

g. 127 On the dash panel: Climatic controls

altea_EN Seite 157 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Climatic*

Control switches

The climatic or semi-automatic air conditioning system only works

when the engine is running and the turbine is switched on.

Using the controls fig. 127 and and the control you

can set the temperature, air distribution and the turbine speed.

To switch a function on or off, press the appropriate button ,

or . When the function is activated, the display window in

the lower corner of the button is lit.

Temperature selector page 158

Button Heating, ventilation and air-conditioning system on/off

page 158

Button Rear windo

matically approximately

switched off beforehand

Button Air recircula

Air distribution control Blower switch. There are

should always be set at

WARNING

For road safety all windows This is essential to ensure g the correct operation of the anti-fog/defrost functions fo

Fi

A1 A4 A5

A2

A3 A4

A1

A2 AC

A3

A4

A5

A6

Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning158

tioning using the button page 157,

lector anti-clockwise until the desired

ed.

to one of the settings 1-4.

. 128 On the dash panel: Climatic controls

altea_EN Seite 158 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Note Please observe the general notes page 165.

Heating and cooling the interior

Interior heating

Turn the temperature selector fig. 128 clockwise to select

the required temperature.

Turn the blower switch to one of the settings 1-4.

Set the air distribution control to the air flow configuration

desired: (towards the windscreen), (towards the chest),

(towards the footwell) and (towards the windscreen and

footwell areas).

Interior cooling

Switch on the air condi

fig. 127 .

Turn the temperature se

cooling output is reach

Turn the blower switch

Fig

A1

AC

Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning 159

Safety Fir Technical Data

ants and prevents misting of the windows when

igh.

cannot be switched on this may be caused by

nning.

f.

is below +3C.

m compressor has been temporarily switched

nt temperature is too high.

is faulty.

le. Have the air conditioning checked by a qual-

e.

g. 129 On the dash panel: Climatic controls

altea_EN Seite 159 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Use the air distribution control to guide the flow of air in the

required direction: (to the windscreen), (to the upper

body), (to the foot well) and (to the windscreen and to the

foot well).

Heating

Maximum heat output, which is needed to defrost the windows quickly, is

only available when the engine has reached its operating temperature.

Air conditioner

When the air conditioning system is switched on, not only the temperature,

but also the air humidity in the vehicle interior is reduced. This improves

comfort for the vehicle occup

the ambient air humidity is h

If the air conditioning system

the following reasons:

The engine may not be ru

The blower is switched of

The outside temperature

The air conditioning syste

off because the engine coola

The air conditioning fuse

Another fault in the vehic

ified workshop.

Air recirculation mode

Air recirculation mode prevents fumes or unpleasant smells from coming from the outsid

Fi

Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning160

altea_EN Seite 160 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Air recirculation mode page 159, fig. 129 prevents strong odours in

the outside air from entering the vehicle interior, for example when passing

through a tunnel or in queuing traffic.

With low temperatures outside, the air recirculation increases the effective-

ness of the heating system by warming the air inside the passenger compart-

ment rather than the cold air from outside.

With high ambient temperatures, the air recirculation increases the effective-

ness of the air conditioning system by cooling the air inside the passenger

compartment rather than the ambient air.

If the windscreen air output is on and the air recirculation mode is pressed,

this remains active. When the recirculation mode is on, if the air distribution

towards the windscreen mode is selected, the recirculation mode is deacti-

vated. For safety reasons, the air recirculation mode should not be

connected.

WARNING

In air recirculation mode, no cold air from the outside enters the vehicle interior. If the air conditioning system is switched off, the windows can quickly mist over. Therefore, never leave the air recirculation mode switched on for a long time (risk of accident).

Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning 161

Safety Fir Technical Data

ted separately for the left and right sides of the

ction for the windscreen. The air drawn in from

ected at the windscreen. The air recirculation

l be switched off as soon as the defrost function

ratures over 3C, the air conditioning system will

ically and the blower speed will be increased by

he air. The button is lit in yellow and the symbol

avigator display.

distribution

istribution

air distribution

g. 130 On the dash panel: 2C Climatronic controls

altea_EN Seite 161 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

2C-Climatronic*

Control switches

The controls allow separate adjustment of air conditioning settings for the left and right.

The air conditioning system controls the temperature when the

engine is running and the blower is switched on.

Turn the temperature control knobs fig. 130 or in order

to adjust the temperature on the left hand side or the right hand

side respectively.

The functions will be switched on when its buttons are pressed.

When these functions are activated, they are indicated on the

radio display. In addition, all these functions are lit with LEDs.

Press the button again to switch off the function.

The temperature can be adjus

vehicle interior.

Button defrost fun

outside the vehicle is dir

mode, if switched on, wil

is switched on. At tempe

be switched on automat

one level in order to dry t

appears on the radio or n

Button Upward air

Button Central air d

Button Downward

Fi

A9 A14 A1

A2

A3

A4

Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning162

ormation

limatronic system can be displayed

d navigation screen mounted at

Fig. 131 Navigation display with information about the Climatronic

Fig. 132 Radio display with information about Climatronic

altea_EN Seite 162 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Button Manual air recirculation mode.

Button Rear window heating. The heating will be switched off auto-

matically approximately 20 minutes after switching on. However, it may

be turned off by pushing the button. The button lights up yellow and the

symbol appears in the display.

Button Automatic temperature, ventilation and air distribution

control page 163

button - Dual zone synchroniser

Button Switches the 2C-Climatronic on and off page 164

Blower control page 164

button Switches heating, ventilation and air-conditioning system

on

WARNING

For road safety all windows must be clear of ice, snow, and condensation. This is essential to ensure good visibility. Please familiarise yourself with the correct operation of the heating and ventilation system, including the anti-fog/defrost functions for the windscreens.

Note Please observe the general notes page 165.

Viewing Climatronic inf

Information about the C

on the radio or radio an

factory.

A5

A6

A7 AUTO

A8 DUAL

A9 OFF

A10

A11 AC

Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning 163

Safety Fir Technical Data

ghtly higher or lower depending on the ambient

tant temperature. The temperature of the air

lower speed and the air distribution are regu-

m also considers the sunlight radiation, so

adjustment. Therefore, automatic mode almost

fort for the vehicle occupants throughout the

off whenever an adjustment is made using the

n, air flow or or the air recirculation button

tinue to be regulated within the parameters

r.

es:

calculates the air flow for two people.

calculates the air flow for more than two

altea_EN Seite 163 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

The LEDs on the Climatronic controls indicate that the selected function has

been activated.

In addition, the radio or radio and navigation displays mounted at factory

briefly display the current settings of the Climatronic if any are modified.

The symbols used on the radio or radio and navigation displays are the same

as the symbols used for the Climatronic controls.

Automatic mode

In automatic mode air temperature, air flow and distribution

are automatically regulated so that a specified temperature is

attained as quickly as possible and then maintained.

The temperature can be adjusted separately for the left and right

sides of the vehicle interior.

Switching on automatic mode

Press the page 161, fig. 130 button. AUTO High is

shown on the radio display (high fan speed).

Press the button again page 161, fig. 130. AUTO Low

is shown on the radio display (low fan speed).

Depending upon the version and finish, the vehicle may include:

When a temperature of 22C (72F) is set in automatic mode a comfortable

interior climate is quickly reached. Therefore, we recommend you not to

change this adjustment, except as necessary to suit individual preferences or

particular circumstances. The compartment temperature can be set between

+18C (64F) and +26C (80F). These are approximate temperatures and the

actual temperature may be sli

conditions.

Climatronic maintains a cons

supplied to the interior, the b

lated automatically. The syste

there is no need for manual re

always provides the best com

year.

Automatic mode is switched

buttons for the air distributio

. The temperature will con

manually selected by the use

Note There are two automatic mod

Automatic mode LO: This

Automatic mode HI: This

people.

AUTO

AUTO

Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning164

80F) is selected, the display switches to HI In

maximum heating output and the temperature

reely using the control . Always have the

g to ensure a constant flow of fresh air into the

to the minimum -1, turns the Climatronic off.

using the buttons , and . It is also

me of the air vents separately.

system on and off

D lit), the heating, ventilation and air condi-

. 133 On the instrument panel: 2C Climatronic trols.

A10

altea_EN Seite 164 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Manual mode

In manual mode you can adjust the air temperature, air flow and distribution as required.

Switching on manual mode

To enter manual mode, press one of the buttons fig. 133 to

or press the air flow control . The selected function is

shown on the radio or navigator display.

Temperature

There are separate temperature selectors for the left and right sides of the

vehicle interior. The selected temperature is displayed above the selector.

The compartment temperature can be set between +18C (64F) and +26C

(80F). These are approximate temperatures and the actual temperature may

be slightly higher or lower depending on the ambient conditions.

If a temperature below 18C (64F) is selected, the display switches to LO In

this setting the system runs at maximum cooling output and the temperature

is not regulated.

If a temperature above 26C (

this setting the system runs at

is not regulated.

Blower

The air flow may be adjusted f

blower running at a low settin

vehicle. Pushing the button

Air distribution

The air distribution is adjusted

possible to open and close so

Switching the air conditioning

When the button is on (LE

tioning system is on.

Fig con

A1

A5 A10

AC

Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning 165

Safety Fir Technical Data

e, the air recirculation increases the effective-

y heating the air inside the passenger compart-

outside.

res, the air recirculation increases the effective-

ystem by cooling the air inside the passenger

ambient air.

s on and the air recirculation mode is pressed,

recirculation mode is on, if the air distribution

e is selected, the recirculation mode is deacti-

air recirculation mode should not be

cold air from the outside enters the vehicle ng system is switched off, the windows can , never leave the air recirculation mode (risk of accident).

d particle filter and active carbon filter) serves

s in the ambient air, including dust and pollen.

m to work with maximum efficiency, the pollen

intervals specified in the Service Schedule.

maturely due to use in areas reaching very high

lter must be changed more frequently than

e.

altea_EN Seite 165 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

When the button is off (LED off), the heating, ventilation and air condi-

tioning system is off.

When the button is off, the heating, ventilation and air conditioning

system is switched off to save fuel. The temperature continues to self-regu-

late. The set temperature can then only be reached if it is higher than the

ambient temperature.

Driver and passenger temperature control

The button controls the synchronisation of the 2 Climatronic climate

zones.

When the button is on (LED lit), the climate zone of the Climatronic is

personalised, for example: Driver side temperature 22C and passenger side

temperature 23C.

When the button is off (LED off), the climate zone of the Climatronic is

synchronised, for example: Driver side temperature 22C and passenger side

temperature 22C.

If the button is off and the passenger side temperature is changed, the

function is automatically activated.

Air recirculation mode

Air recirculation mode prevents fumes or unpleasant smells

from coming from the outside.

Press the button page 164, fig. 133 to switch air recir-

culation mode on or off. It is switched on if the following symbol

appears in the display .

Air recirculation mode prevents strong odours in the ambient air from

entering the vehicle interior, for example when passing through a tunnel or in

a traffic jam.

With low temperatures outsid

ness of the heating system b

ment rather than the air from

With high ambient temperatu

ness of the air conditioning s

compartment rather than the

If the windscreen air output i

this remains active. When the

towards the windscreen mod

vated. For safety reasons, the

connected.

WARNING

In air recirculation mode, no interior. If the air conditioni quickly mist over. Therefore switched on for a long time

General notes

The impurity filter

The impurity filter (a combine

as a barrier against impuritie

For the air conditioning syste

filter must be replaced at the

If the filter loses efficiency pre

pollution levels, the pollen fi

stated in the Service Schedul

AC

AC

DUAL

DUAL

DUAL

DUAL

A2

Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning166

front of the windscreen free of snow, ice and

cooling are not impaired, and to prevent the

s through the passenger compartment and is

r this purpose. Therefore, do not cover these

other objects.

operates most effectively with the windows

osed. However, if the vehicle has been over-

an be cooled quicklier by opening the windows

irculation mode is on, as smoke drawn into the

s a residue on the evaporator, producing a

he air conditioning at least once a month, to

nd prevent leaks. If a decrease in the cooling

rised Service Centre should be consulted to

altea_EN Seite 166 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Air conditioner

When the air conditioning system is switched on, not only the temperature,

but also the air humidity in the vehicle interior is reduced. This improves

comfort for the vehicle occupants and prevents misting of the windows when

the ambient air humidity is high.

If the air conditioning system cannot be switched on this may be caused by

the following reasons:

The engine is not running.

The button is disconnected.

The outside temperature is below +3C.

The air conditioning system compressor has been temporarily switched

off because the engine coolant temperature is too high.

The air conditioning fuse is faulty.

Another fault in the vehicle. Have the air conditioning checked by a qual-

ified workshop.

Caution If you suspect that the air conditioning is damaged, switch it off with the

button to prevent further damage and have it checked by a qualified

workshop.

Repairs to the air conditioning system require specialist knowledge and

special tools. Therefore, we recommend you to take the vehicle to a qualified

workshop.

Note If the humidity and temperature outside the vehicle are high, condensa- tion can drip off the evaporator in the cooling system and so forming a puddle

underneath the vehicle. This is completely normal and there is no need to

suspect a leak.

Keep the air intake slots in

leaves to ensure heating and

windows from misting over.

The air from the vents flow

extracted by slots designed fo

slots with items of clothing or

The air conditioning system

and the sliding/tilting roof* cl

heated by sun, the air inside c

for a short time.

Do not smoke while air rec

air conditioning system leave

permanent unpleasant odour.

It is advisable to connect t

lubricate the system gaskets a

capacity is detected, an Autho

check the system.

AC

AC

Driving 167

Safety Fir Technical Data

o the correct position.

e steering column fig. 134 down

eel in this way until the correct position is

again firmly .

ring column adjustment function and an incor- ult in serious injury.

teering column should be adjusted only when

Fig. 135 Proper sitting position for driver

altea_EN Seite 167 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Driving

Address

Adjusting the steering wheel position

The height and reach of the steering wheel can be freely

adjusted to suit the driver.

Adjust the driver seat t

Push the lever under th

.

Adjust the steering wh

set fig. 135.

Then push the lever up

WARNING

Incorrect use of the stee rect seating position can res

To avoid accidents, the s the vehicle is stationary.

Fig. 134 Adjusting the steering wheel position

Driving168

programme (ESP)*

safer in certain situations.

gramme (ESP) includes the electronic differen-

ntrol system (TCS), the brake assist system

programme (TSP). The ESP function works

arning lamps will light up if the ESP or ABS

lly when the engine is started.

annot be switched off. With the ESP switch it is

f.

hen in cases where wheel sliding is desirable.

ains,

Fig. 136 Detail of the centre console: ESP button

altea_EN Seite 168 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Adjust the driver seat or steering wheel so that there is a distance of at least 25 cm between the steering wheel and your chest page 167, fig. 135. If you fail to observe the minimum distance, the airbag will not protect you. Risk of fatal injury.

If your physical constitution does not allow you to maintain the minimum distance of 25 cm, contact an Authorised Service Centre. The Authorised Service Centre will help you to decide if special specific modifi- cations are necessary.

If you adjust the steering wheel so that it points towards your face, the driver airbag will not protect you properly in the event of an accident. Make sure that the steering wheel points towards your chest.

When driving, always hold the steering wheel with both hands on the outside of the ring at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions. Never hold the steering wheel at the 12 o'clock position, or in any other manner (e.g. in the centre of the steering wheel, or on the inside of the rim). In such cases, you could receive severe injuries to the arms, hands and head.

Safety

Electronic stabilisation

ESP helps make driving

The electronic stabilisation pro

tial lock (EDS), the traction co

(BAS) and the trailer stability

together with the ABS. Both w

systems are faulty.

The ESP is started automatica

The ESP is always active, and c

only possible to switch TCS of

The TCS can be deactivated w

For example:

When driving with snow ch

WARNING (continued)

Driving 169

Safety Fir Technical Data

key

g lock

e ignition and the engine are OFF and the

te without the ignition key, turn the steering

dible sound. You should always lock the

e your vehicle. This will help prevent vehicle

glow plug system on

sition and release it. If the key cannot be turned

osition to position , move the steering

loosens up.

Fig. 137 Ignition key positions

A0

A1

A0 A1

altea_EN Seite 169 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

when driving in deep snow or on loose surfaces,

when rocking the vehicle backwards and forwards to free it from mud, for

example.

Next, the button should be pressed to reactivate the TCS.

When does the warning light switch on or flash?

On switching the ignition on, it lights up for about two seconds to carry

out a function control.

The warning lamp will start flashing when the vehicle is moving if the ESP

or the TCS is activated. The warning lamp will light up slowly if the TCS is

switched off.

It will light up continuously if there is a malfunction in the ESP.

WARNING

The electronic stabilisation programme (ESP) cannot defy the laws of physics. This should be kept in mind, particularly on slippery and wet roads and when towing a trailer.

Always adapt your driving style to suit the condition of the roads and the traffic situation. Do not let the extra safety afforded by ESP tempt you into taking any risks when driving, this can cause accidents.

Please refer to the corresponding warning notes on ESP in page 193, Intelligent technology.

Ignition lock

Position of the ignition

Ignition switched off, steerin

In this position fig. 137 th

steering may be locked.

For the Steering lock to opera

wheel until it locks with an au

steering wheel when you leav

theft .

Switching the ignition or the

Turn the ignition key to this po

or it is difficult to turn from p

wheel back and forth until it

Driving170

ted again automatically as soon as you pull the

using a genuine SEAT key with its correct code.

icle is ensured if genuine SEAT keys are used.

ping the engine

tarted using a genuine SEAT key with

he neutral position and depress the

and hold it in this position for the starter

the starting page 169 position.

y as soon as the engine starts; the starter

with the engine.

e, you may need to slightly press down the

ine, it may be a little noisy for the first few

built up in the hydraulic valve compensators.

ause for concern.

altea_EN Seite 170 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Starting

The engine is started when the key is in this position. Electrical components

with a high power consumption are switched off temporarily.

Every time the vehicle is started again, the ignition key must be turned to

position . The repetitive start prevention lock of the ignition prevents

possible damage to the starter motor if the engine is already running.

WARNING

The ignition key must NOT be removed from the lock until the vehicle comes to a standstill. Otherwise, the steering could be immediately blocked- Risk of accident!

Always remove the key from the ignition lock when leaving the vehicle, even for a short period. This is especially important if children or disabled people are left alone in the vehicle. They could accidentally start the engine or work electrical equipment such as the electric windows, conse- quently resulting in an accident.

Unsupervised use of the keys could start the engine or any electrical system, such as the electric window. This could result in serious injury.

Caution The starter motor will only work when the engine is stopped (ignition key

position ).

Electronic immobiliser

The immobiliser prevents unauthorised persons from driving

the vehicle.

Inside the key there is a chip that deactivates the electronic immobiliser auto-

matically when the key is inserted into the ignition.

The immobiliser will be activa

key out of the ignition lock.

The engine can only be started

Note A perfect operation of the veh

Starting and stop

Starting petrol engines

The engine can only be s

its correct code.

Move the gear lever to t

clutch pedal thoroughly

to turn the engine on.

Turn the ignition key to

Let go of the ignition ke

motor must not run on

After starting a very hot engin

accelerator.

When starting a very cold eng

seconds until oil pressure has

This is quite normal, and no c

A2

A0

A2

Driving 171

Safety Fir Technical Data

started using a genuine SEAT key with

the neutral position and depress the

y and hold it in this position for the starter

the starting position.

position page 169, fig. 137 . The

ll light for engine pre-heating.

p turns off, turn the key to position to

t press the accelerator.

ey as soon as the engine starts, the starter

wed to run on with the engine.

ine, it may be a little noisy for the first few

s built up in the hydraulic valve compensators.

ause for concern.

the engine, see page 275.

sel engine

rging of the battery, do not use any other major

e glow plugs are pre-heating.

e glow plug warning lamp page 80 goes out.

fuel tank has been completely run dry

pletely run dry, it may take longer than normal

e engine after refuelling with diesel fuel. This is

minate air first.

A1

A2

altea_EN Seite 171 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

If the engine does not start immediately, switch the starter off after

10 seconds and try again after half a minute. If the engine still does not start,

the fuel pump fuse should be checked page 261, Fuses.

WARNING

Never start or run the engine in unventilated or closed rooms. The exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, an odourless and colourless poisonous gas. Risk of fatal accidents. Carbon monoxide can cause loss of consciousness. It can also cause death.

Never leave the vehicle unattended if the engine is running.

Never use cold start sprays, they could explode or cause the engine to run at high revs. Risk of injury.

Caution When the engine is cold, you should avoid high engine speeds, driving at

full throttle and over-loading the engine. Risk of engine damage.

The vehicle should not be pushed or towed more than 50 metres to start

the engine. Unburnt fuel could enter the catalytic converter and damage it.

Before attempting to push-start or tow a vehicle in order to start it, you

should first try to start it using the battery of another vehicle. Note and follow

the instructions page 275, Jump-starting.

For the sake of the environment Do not warm-up the engine by running the engine with the vehicle stationary.

You should drive off as soon as you start the engine. This helps the engine

reach operating temperature faster and reduces emissions.

Starting diesel engines

The engine can only be

its correct code.

Move the gear lever to

clutch pedal thoroughl

to turn the engine on.

Turn the ignition key to

Turn the ignition key to

indication lamp wi

When the warning lam

start the engine. Do no

Let go of the ignition k

motor must not be allo

When starting a very cold eng

seconds until oil pressure ha

This is quite normal, and no c

If there are problems starting

Glow plug system for the die

To avoid unnecessary discha

electrical equipment while th

Start the engine as soon as th

Starting the engine after the

If the fuel tank has been com

(up to one minute) to start th

because the system must eli

Driving172

, the radiator fan may run on for up to 10

t the fan turns itself on once more if the coolant

the heat accumulated in the engine compart-

xposure to solar radiation.

ff until the vehicle is completely stationary.

ly when the engine is running. With the rength is needed to brake. As normal brake ed, risk of accidents and serious injury may

mmediately blocked once the key is removed hicle cannot be steered. Risk of accident.

hard for a long period, the engine could over-

isk of engine damage. For this reason, you

rox. 2 minutes before you switch it off.

altea_EN Seite 172 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

WARNING

Never start or run the engine in unventilated or closed rooms. The exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, an odourless and colourless poisonous gas. Risk of fatal accidents. Carbon monoxide can cause loss of consciousness. It can also cause death.

Never leave the vehicle unattended if the engine is running.

Never use cold start sprays, they could explode or cause the engine to run at high revs. Risk of injury.

Caution When the engine is cold, you should avoid high engine speeds, driving at

full throttle and over-loading the engine. Risk of engine damage.

The vehicle should not be pushed or towed more than 50 metres to start

the engine. Unburnt fuel could enter the catalytic converter and damage it.

Before attempting to push-start or tow a vehicle in order to start it, you

should first try to start it using the battery of another vehicle. Note and follow

the instructions page 275, Jump-starting.

For the sake of the environment Do not warm-up the engine by running the engine with the vehicle stationary.

You should drive off as soon as you start the engine. This helps the engine

reach operating temperature faster and reduces emissions.

Switching the engine off

Stop the engine.

Turn the ignition key to position page 169, fig. 137 .

After switching the engine off

minutes. It is also possible tha

temperature increases due to

ment or due to its prolonged e

WARNING

Never switch the engine o

The brake servo works on engine switched off, more st operation cannot be perform exist.

The steering lock can be i from the ignition lock. The ve

Caution If the engine has been driven

heat when it is switched off. R

should idle the engine for app

A0

Driving 173

Safety Fir Technical Data

l to LPG

tomatically switches from petrol to LPG

tions are met:

e tank.

hicle coolant is above 30C.

g is above 1200 rpm.

ssed and the warning light ON is flashing or

en it was switched off.

et, the system switches to LPG mode and the ON

petrol

itches from LPG to petrol in the following cases:

d.

g. 138 Centre console: gas system control warning hts and switch.

A3

altea_EN Seite 173 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Driving with LPG*

switch.

Warning light OFF Running on petrol

Warning light ON Running on LPG

Your SEAT vehicle has a bivalent engine able to run on either LPG or petrol.

The LPG tank page 221, Refuelling with LPG is in the spare wheel well

.

It is possible to change from LPG to petrol while the engine is running, even

if the vehicle is moving, by pressing the button fig. 138 . The

selected operating mode is shown by the lights OFF (running on petrol)

and ON (running on LPG).

Starting the engine

The engine is always started with petrol, even when LPG was being used

when it was switched off.

Automatic switch from petro

After checking, the system au

provided the following condi

There is enough LPG in th

The temperature of the ve

Engine speed while drivin

The button is pre

the engine was using LPG wh

When these conditions are m

lamp is lit .

Automatic switch from LPG to

The system automatically sw

When the engine is starte

If the LPG tank is empty.

Fi lig

A1 GAS

A2

A3

GAS A1

A2

A3

GAS A1

A3

Driving174

are made, especially when the outside temper-

nd to run on petrol more often than on LPG.

empty before the LPG tank.

n*

on

ps the engine when the vehicle is

matically when required.

pped, put it in neutral and release the

e will stop.

is pressed, the engine starts again.

creen displays information about the

function page 176, fig. 140.

s

be buckled.

closed.

rating temperature

e straight.

t ground.

reverse.

cted.

altea_EN Seite 174 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

If there is a fault in the LPG system.

At very low temperatures below minus 10C.

Manual switch from petrol to LPG

Press the GAS button to switch modes. When the necessary conditions are

met, the system switches to LPG mode and the ON lamp is lit. If the ON

lamp flashes, the following conditions have not been met:

There is enough LPG in the tank.

The temperature of the vehicle coolant is above 30C.

Engine speed while driving is above 1200 rpm.

When these conditions are met, the system switches to LPG mode and the ON

lamp is lit .

Manual switch from LPG to petrol

Press the button to switch modes. When the OFF lamp is lit, the

vehicle is running on petrol.

Running on petrol

Run the engine with petrol for short journeys at regular intervals to avoid

problems in the petrol system.

WARNING

LPG is a highly explosive and inflammable substance. It may cause severe burns and other injury.

Due care must be taken to avoid any risk of fire or explosion.

When parking the vehicle in a closed area (for example in a garage), make sure that there is adequate ventilation, either natural or mechanical, to neutralise the LPG in the event of a leak.

Note If frequent short journeys

ature is low, the vehicle will te

Therefore, the petrol tank may

Start-Stop functio

Description and operati

The Start-Stop function sto

stopped and starts it auto

When the vehicle is sto

clutch pedal. The engin

When the clutch pedal

The instrument panel s

status of the Start-Stop

Start-Stop function condition

The driver's seat belt must

The engine hood must be

The engine must be at ope

The steering wheel must b

The vehicle must be on fla

The vehicle must not be in

A trailer must not be conne

A1

A3

A3

A3

GAS A1 A2

Driving 175

Safety Fir Technical Data

ove with the engine off for any reason. You hicle. This could cause an accident and serious

t work when the engine is not running. You vehicle.

does not work when the engine is not running. difficult to turn the steering wheel.

-Stop function and a manual gearbox, when the

ust be pressed.

he Start-Stop function are not fulfilled, the dash

indicator dimmed.

ed by rotating the steering wheel three times,

altea_EN Seite 175 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

The temperature of the passenger compartment must be within the

convenience limits (button page 164, fig. 133 should be selected).

The windscreen de-mist function must be off.

If not, it requires an increase in airflow page 164, fig. 133 for more

than three presses.

Either of the temperature settings, HI or LO must not be set.

The driver's door must be closed.

The diesel particulate filter must not be in regeneration mode, for diesel

engines.

The battery charge must not be low for the next start.

The battery temperature must be between -1C and 55C.

The parking assistant, Park Assist* must not be activated.

Interrupting the Start-Stop function

In the following situations, the Start-Stop function will be interrupted and the

engine will automatically start:

The vehicle is moving.

The brake pedal is pressed several times in a row.

The battery has been discharged excessively.

The Start-Stop System has been manually deactivated.

The windscreen de-mist function is turned on.

The temperature of the passenger compartment exceeds the convenience

limits (button page 164, fig. 133 should be selected).

If in an increase in airflow page 164, fig. 133 is required for more

than three presses.

Either of the temperature settings, HI or LO, is selected.

The engine coolant temperature is insufficient.

The alternator is faulty, for example the V-belt has ruptured.

If any of the conditions described in the previous section are not fulfilled.

WARNING

Never allow the vehicle to m could lose control of your ve injury.

The brake servo does no need more force to stop the

Power assisted steering That is why it is much more

Note For vehicles with the Start

engine is started, the clutch m

When the conditions for t

panel displays the Start-Stop

The vehicle can be restart

that is, more than 270.

AC A11

A10

AC A11

A10

Driving176

by the Start-Stop function, this is displayed on

the dash panel; the display of indications on

Fig. 140 Display on the dash panel during Start- Stop function operation.

altea_EN Seite 176 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Deactivating and activating the Start-Stop function

Every time the ignition is switched on, the Start-Stop function is

automatically switched on.

Manually deactivating the Start-Stop function

Press the fig. 139 located in the centre console. When the

Start-Stop function is deactivated, the pushbutton indicator

lights.

If the Start-Stop function is operating then the engine starts

immediately.

Manually activating the Start-Stop function

Press the fig. 139 located in the centre console. The indi-

cator on the button will go out.

Driver messages

When the engine is turned off

the dash panel.

Note There are different versions of

the screen may differ.

Fig. 139 The Start-Stop function button.

AA

AA

Driving 177

Safety Fir Technical Data

r

tationary with the engine idling. Press the

ly.

to neutral and push the lever downwards.

the left, and then into the reverse position

k.

engaged when the vehicle is stationary. When

fore engaging this gear, wait about 6 seconds

thoroughly in order to protect the gearbox.

en the reverse gear is selected and the ignition

ing, the vehicle will start to move as soon as a tch released.

gear when the vehicle is in motion. Risk of acci-

the gear rest when driving. The pressure of your

wear on the selector forks in the gearbox.

should always depress the clutch down fully to

damage.

e clutch uphill. This causes premature wear

altea_EN Seite 177 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Manual gearbox

Driving a car with a manual gearbox

Engaging the reverse gea

The vehicle should be s

clutch down thorough

Place the gear lever in

Slide the gear lever to

shown on the gear stic

The reverse gear can only be

the engine is running and be

with the clutch pressed down

The reverse lights light up wh

is on.

WARNING

When the engine is runn gear is engaged and the clu

Never select the reverse dent.

Note Do not rest your hand on

hand could cause premature

When changing gear, you

avoid unnecessary wear and

Do not hold the car on th

and damage to the clutch.

Fig. 141 Detail of the centre console: gear shift pattern of a 5-speed manual gearbox

Fig. 142 Detail of the centre console: gear shift pattern of a 6-speed manual gearbox

Driving178

/ direct shift gearbox has three

gramme

s a higher gear earlier rather than remain

to position D to drive forwards

to position R to reverse. This position is

es for reversing.

mme

ion S.

me, S, the program is designed for a sports

ich changes up at higher engine speeds to use

Fig. 144 Program selec- tion

altea_EN Seite 178 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Automatic gearbox* / DSG automatic gearbox

Selector lever positions

Selector lever positions indicated on the cover

P Parking position (lever locked).

R Reverse position.

N Neutral position (lever locked). This position is similar to the neutral

position for manual gearboxes).

D Drive position (economic driving programme).

S Sports driving position.

+/- Tiptronic driving position (this programme is similar to the operation of

a manual gearbox).

Driving programmes

The automatic gearbox

programmes.

Selecting the economy pro

This programme select

in a lower gear.

Put the selector lever in

Put the selector lever in

shared by all programm

Selecting the sport progra

Move the lever to posit

If you select the sport program

mode, that is, a programme wh

Fig. 143 Centre console: selector lever for auto- matic gearbox / direct shift gearbox DSG

Driving 179

Safety Fir Technical Data

brake pedal, at the same time press the

lever.

en the vehicle is stopped or at a speed of less

s, the lock is automatically released in position

(e.g. from R to D) the lever will not lock. If the

N more than one second then it is locked. With

is prevented passing from P and N to any other

e brake pedal.

t in the position P in order to remove the key.

tic gearbox* / DSG automatic

ears are automatically engaged.

Fig. 146 Driving

altea_EN Seite 179 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

the full power of the engine. This programme is not recommended for use on

the motorway or in the city.

Selecting the manual programme (tiptronic)

This programme allows driving similar to a manual gearbox.

This programme may be accessed using the selector lever or from the

steering wheel controls when this option is fitted page 181.

Selector lever locking

The selector lever lock prevents gears from being engaged

inadvertently, which would cause the vehicle to move.

Releasing the selector lever lock

Start the vehicle.

Press and release the

button on the selector

The lock is only activated wh

than 5 km/h. At higher speed

N.

For rapid changes of position

lever remains in the position

the automatic lock, the lever

gear without first pressing th

The selector lever must be pu

Driving with an automa gearbox

The drive and reverse g

Fig. 145 Deactivating the lock

Driving180

cases, using the foot brake to prevent

hicle using another forward gear (engine

, release the brake and accelerate.

ower the gear must be for effective engine

ar is used on a very steep gradient, the engine

icle accelerates. So that the engine speed does

rbox changes to the next highest gear. Depress

selector lever to the Tiptronic gate to return to

ave the vehicle while the engine is running or ny reason you must leave the vehicle with the ndbrake and move the selector lever to posi-

ng and the positions D, S or R are selected, it le with the foot brake because the vehicle will

anging the position of the selector lever (risk

ever be moved into the positions R or P while

gradient, reduce speed and use the Tiptronic gear.

altea_EN Seite 180 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Driving

Press and hold the foot brake.

Press on the button on the selector lever knob (on the left,

page 179, fig. 146.

Select a gear for driving (R, D or S).

Release the button and wait a few seconds for the gear to

engage, a light jerk will be felt.

Release the brake and accelerate.

Short stop

Hold the vehicle stationary with the brake pressed down (for

example at traffic lights). The selector lever does not need to be

put into the positions P or N for this.

Do not press the accelerator.

Parking the vehicle

Press the foot brake and hold to bring the vehicle to a stop.

Apply the handbrake firmly.

Press in the button on the selector lever knob, move the lever to

the position P and release the button.

Driving slowly

Move the selector lever to the position D and press to the right to

put the lever into Tiptronic mode.

Press the gear lever towards (-) to select a lower gear.

Hill stop

Hold the vehicle, in all

rolling back.

Do not try to slow the ve

braking).

Descending gradients

With the gear engaged

The steeper the gradient the l

braking. For example, if 3rd ge

braking is insufficient and veh

not become excessive, the gea

the brake pedal and move the

3rd gear.

WARNING

The driver should never le with any gear selected. If for a engine running, apply the ha tion P.

When the engine is runni is necessary to hold the vehic creep at a low speed.

Never accelerate while ch of an accident).

The selector lever must n moving (risk of an accident).

Before descending a steep programme to select a lower

Driving 181

Safety Fir Technical Data

nic* mode*

lows the driver to manually select

Fig. 147 Changing gear with Tiptronic

Fig. 148 Steering wheel with levers for automatic gearbox

altea_EN Seite 181 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

If you must stop on a hill, always hold the vehicle using the footbrake to avoid rolling back.

The footbrake must not be held for a long period of time, not even lightly; continuous braking will cause overheating of the brakes and a reduction or even a loss of braking power and a significant increase in braking distances.

Never allow the vehicle to coast down a gradient with the selector lever in positions N or D, even when the engine is not running. For descents, the use of the Tiptronic programme is recommended to keep the speed reduced.

Caution Never use the automatic gearbox to hold the vehicle stationary on a hill,

even for short periods, as this may overheat the gearbox and cause damage.

Apply the handbrake or depress the foot brake to hold the vehicle in position.

If the vehicle is allowed to roll with the engine stopped but the selector in

position N then the gearbox may be damaged because it will not be

lubricated.

Changing gear in Tiptro

The Tiptronic system al

gears

WARNING (continued)

Driving182

or sport programme using the steering wheel

81, fig. 148 are used in the normal or sport

hes temporarily to Tiptronic mode. To exit

the right paddle lever towards the steering

econd. You will also leave Tiptronic mode if

ed for a certain time.

e steering wheel can operate with the gear stick

ehicle in motion.

designed to give maximum accelera-

wn thoroughly, the gearbox automatically

speed and engine speed, into a lower gear to

imum acceleration of the vehicle.

gear until the engine reaches the maximum

the gear.

vehicle if you accelerate on slippery road ry.

en using the kickdown features on slippery leration, the vehicle could lose traction and

+

altea_EN Seite 182 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

General information about driving in Tiptronic mode

Changing gear with the gear stick

Put the lever in position D and press towards the right to enter

the Tiptronic gate page 181, fig. 147.

Press the gear lever forwards page 181, fig. 147 to select

a higher gear.

Press the gear lever back page 181, fig. 147 to select a

lower gear.

Changing gear with the steering wheel levers

Press the right paddle lever (+OFF) towards the steering

wheel to change up page 181, fig. 148.

Press the left paddle towards the steering wheel to change

down page 181, fig. 148.

Using the levers on the steering wheel, you can access manual driving mode

regardless of the driving mode pre-selected.

General information about driving in Tiptronic mode

When accelerating, the automatic gearbox / direct shift gearbox goes into a

higher gear a little before it reaches the maximum permitted revolutions.

If a lower gear is selected, the automatic gearbox / direct shift gearbox does

not change down until the point is reached where the engine could no longer

over-rev.

If the Tiptronic is selected whilst the vehicle is in motion and the automatic

gearbox / direct shift gearbox is in 3rd gear in selector lever position D, the

Tiptronic will then also be in 3rd gear.

Changing gears in the normal paddle levers

If the paddle levers page 1

programme, the system switc

Tiptronic mode again, press

wheel for approximately one s

the paddle levers are not mov

Note The gearbox controls on th

in any position and with the v

Kickdown feature

The kickdown feature is

tion.

If you press the accelerator do

changes down, depending on

take full advantage of the max

The gearbox does not change

determined engine speed for

WARNING

You could lose control of the surfaces. Risk of serious inju

Be particularly careful wh road surfaces. With fast acce skid.

A+

A

A+

A

Driving 183

Safety Fir Technical Data

er up firmly fig. 149.

ly and press the release knob in the direc-

. 149 and guide the handbrake lever down

firmly. This prevents you driving with the hand-

lights up when the handbrake is applied

. The warning turns off when the handbrake is

h with the handbrake on, the following

nstrument panel display: HANDBRAKE ON. Also,

to stop the vehicle when it is in motion. The ably longer, because braking is only applied to dent!

sed, this will cause rear brakes overheating, n of the brake system and could lead to an acci- ature wear on the rear brake pads.

before you leave the vehicle. The first gear

altea_EN Seite 183 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

You should use the kickdown feature only when traffic and weather conditions allow it to be used safely.

Handbrake

Using the handbrake

The handbrake should be applied firmly to prevent the

vehicle from accidentally rolling away.

Always apply the handbrake when you leave your vehicle and when

you park.

Applying the handbrake

Pull the handbrake lev

Releasing the handbrake

Pull the lever up slight

tion of the arrow fig

fully .

Always apply the handbrake

brake applied .

The handbrake warning lamp

and the ignition switched on

released.

If you drive faster than 6 km/

message* will appear on the i

an audible warning is given.

WARNING

Never use the handbrake braking distance is consider the rear wheels. Risk of acci

If it is only partially relea which can impair the functio dent. This also causes prem

Caution Always apply the handbrake

should also be selected.

WARNING (continued)

Fig. 149 Handbrake between the front seats

Driving184

exhaust system could ignite inflammable low bushes, spilt fuel etc.

ants to remain in the vehicle when it is e to open the vehicle from the inside, and vehicle in an emergency. In the event of an l delay assistance to occupants.

e in the vehicle. They could set the vehicle in sing the handbrake or the gear lever /

nditions, it may become extremely hot or cold e fatal.

luded in vehicles with ESP.

g uphill.

conditions: doors closed, brake pedal pressed

he system is activated on engaging gear.

he brake pedal, the braking force is maintained

he vehicle from moving backward when

ce of time is enough to start the vehicle with

reversing uphill.

altea_EN Seite 184 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Parking

The handbrake should always be firmly applied when the

vehicle is parked.

Always note the following points when parking the vehicle:

Use the foot brake to stop the vehicle.

Apply the handbrake.

The first gear should also be selected.

Switch the engine off and remove the key from the ignition lock.

Turn the steering wheel slightly to engage the steering lock.

Always take you car keys with you when you leave the vehicle

.

Additional notes on parking the vehicle on gradients:

Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicle rolls against the kerb if it started

to roll.

If the vehicle is parked facing downhill, turn the front wheels so that they

point towards the kerb.

If the vehicle is parked facing uphill, turn the front wheels so that they

point away from the kerb.

Secure the vehicle as normal by applying the handbrake firmly and

engaging first gear.

WARNING

Take measures to reduce the risk of injury when you leave your vehicle unattended.

Never park where the hot materials, such as dry grass,

Never allow vehicle occup locked. They would be unabl could become trapped in the emergency, locked doors wil

Never leave children alon motion, for example, by relea selector lever.

Depending on weather co inside the vehicle. This can b

Hill-start aid*

This function is only inc

This device helps when startin

These are the basic operation

down and vehicle in neutral. T

After removing your foot from t

for a few seconds to prevent t

engaging gear. This short spa

ease.

This system also works when

WARNING (continued)

Driving 185

Safety Fir Technical Data

g aid works properly, the sensors must be kept

e.

Description

n acoustic parking aid.

r bumper. When the sensors detect an obstacle,

ignals (beeps). The measuring range of the

ith increasing frequency as you approach the

less than approx. 0.30 m away from the

ill sound continuously. Do not drive on!

eps will be gradually reduced after about 4

s at a constant distance from a detected

e permanent acoustic signal).

n automatically when reverse gear is engaged.

dgement tone.

eplacement for driver awareness. The driver is afe parking and other manoeuvres.

pots in which obstacles are not registered. ildren and animals because the system will not

e 0,60

ntre 1,60

altea_EN Seite 185 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

WARNING

If you do not start the vehicle immediately after taking your foot off the brake pedal, the vehicle may start to roll back under certain conditions. Depress the brake pedal or use the hand brake immediately.

If the engine stalls, depress the brake pedal or use the hand brake immediately.

When following a line of traffic uphill, if you want to prevent the vehicle from rolling back accidentally when starting off, hold the brake pedal down for a few seconds before starting off.

Note The Official Service or a specialist workshop can tell you if your vehicle is

equipped with this system.

Parking aid acoustic system*

General notes

Various systems are available to help you when parking or manoeuvring in

tight spaces, depending on the equipment fitted on your vehicle.

The SEAT parking system* gives an acoustic warning if there are any obsta-

cles behind your car.

When you are parking, the SEAT Parking System plus* warns you acoustically

and optically20) about obstacles in front of and behind the vehicle.

Note To ensure the acoustic parkin

clean and free of snow and ic

SEAT Parking System:

The parking system is a

Sensors are located in the rea

you are alerted by acoustic s

sensors starts at about:

The acoustic signals sound w

obstacle. When the vehicle is

obstacle, the warning tone w

The volume of the warning be

seconds if the vehicle remain

obstacle (it does not affect th

The parking aid is switched o

You will hear a brief acknowle

WARNING

The parking aid is not a r personally responsible for s

The sensors have blind s Always look out for small ch

20) Vehicles with a navigation system.

Rear Sid

Ce

Driving186

ith increasing frequency as you approach the

less than approx. 0.30 m away from the

ll sound continuously. Stop moving immedi-

eps will be gradually reduced after about 4

at a constant distance from a detected

permanent acoustic signal).

igator

the central console fig. 150 or on the

will hear a brief acknowledgement tone

tch will light up.

Fig. 150 Centre console: Switch for parking aid

altea_EN Seite 186 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

always detect them. Always pay attention when reversing to avoid acci- dents.

Always keep a close eye on the area around the vehicle and make full use of the rear-view mirrors.

Caution Please note that low obstacles detected by the system may no longer be

registered by the sensors as the car moves closer, so the system will not give

any further warning. Certain kinds of obstacles (such as wire fences, chains,

thin painted posts or trailer draw bars, etc) may not always be detected by the

system, so take care not to damage the vehicle in such cases.

Note Please refer to the notes on towing page 187.

SEAT Parking System Plus*: Description

The parking system plus is an acoustic and optical parking

aid.

Sensors are located in the front and rear bumpers. When the sensors detect

an obstacle, you are alerted by acoustic and optical signals. The measuring

range of the sensors starts at about:

The acoustic signals sound w

obstacle. When the vehicle is

obstacle, the warning tone wi

ately!

The volume of the warning be

seconds if the vehicle remains

obstacle (it does not affect the

Enabling/Disabling

Enabling

Connects the radio nav

Press the switch on

gear selector gate. You

and the LED on the swi

Front Side 0,90

Centre 1,20

Rear Side 0,60

Centre 1,60

WARNING (continued)

Driving 187

Safety Fir Technical Data

n towing page 187.

he picture display.

ing sensors are not enabled when you select

ch . This function may not be guaranteed on

actory fitted. This results in the following restric-

ning. The system will still give a warning when

driving forwards. The optical display changes to

w seconds and the LED on the switch * starts

the parking aid, a system fault has occurred.

n Authorised SEAT dealer or specialised work-

altea_EN Seite 187 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Disabling

Drive forwards faster than 10 km/h, or

Press the switch or

Switch the ignition off.

Segments in the optical display

Some colour segments in front and behind and an acoustic signal enable the

driver to assess the distance with respect to an obstacle. The amber colour

segments combined with a discontinuous beep indicate the presence of an

obstacle. As the vehicle gets closer to the obstacle, the colour of the segment

changes to red and the acoustic signal beeps continuously. When the penul-

timate segment is displayed, this means that the vehicle has reached the

collision zone. Stop moving immediately! .

WARNING

The parking aid is not a replacement for driver awareness. The driver is personally responsible for safe parking and other manoeuvres.

The sensors have blind spots in which obstacles are not registered. Always look out for small children and animals because the system will not always detect them. Always pay attention when reversing to avoid acci- dents.

Always keep a close eye on the area around the vehicle and make full use of the rear-view mirrors.

Caution Please note that low obstacles detected by the system may no longer be

registered by the sensors as the car moves closer, so the system will not give

any further warning. Certain kinds of obstacles (such as wire fences, chains,

thin painted posts or trailer draw bars, etc) may not always be detected by the

system, so take care not to damage the vehicle in such cases.

Note Please refer to the notes o

There is a slight delay in t

Towing bracket

In towing mode, the rear park

reverse gear or press the swit

towing brackets that are not f

tions:

SEAT Parking System*

No warning is given

SEAT Parking System Plus:*

There is no rear distance war

obstacles are detected while

towing mode.

Fault messages

If you hear a long beep for a fe

flashing when you switch on

Please refer the problem to a

shop.

Driving188

tain a constant speed when descending down-

due to its own weight. Use the foot brake to

ntrol system on and off

151 to the left to ON.

to the right to OFF or turn the ignition

stationary.

nd a speed is programmed, the indicator on

Fig. 151 Indicator and main beam headlight lever: switch and rocker switch for the cruise control

AB

AB

altea_EN Seite 188 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Note If the fault is not corrected before you switch off the ignition, it will only be

indicated by the flashing LED on the switch the next time you switch on

the parking aid.

Cruise control* (Cruise control - GRA)

Description

The cruise control system is able to maintain the set speed in

the range from approx. 30 km/h to 180 km/h.

Once the speed setting has been saved, you may take your foot off the accel-

erator.

WARNING

It could be dangerous to use the cruise control system if it is not possible to drive at constant speed.

For safety reasons the cruise control system should not be used in dense traffic, in sections with bends or where roads are in bad conditions (e.g. aquaplaning, loose chippings, slippery surfaces, snow). Risk of acci- dent.

Always switch the CCS off when finish to use it in order to avoid an involuntary use.

It is dangerous to use a set speed which is too high for the current road, traffic or weather conditions. Risk of accident.

Note The cruise control cannot main

hill. The vehicle will accelerate

slow the vehicle.

Switching the cruise co

Switching on the system

Push the switch fig.

Switching off system

Either push the switch

off when the vehicle is

When the cruise control is on a

the instrument panel is lit.21)

Driving 189

Safety Fir Technical Data

d without touching the accelerator or

S/+ of the rocker switch fig. 153 to

e vehicle will continue to accelerate as

ocker switch pressed. When you release

eed is stored.

T/ of the rocker switch to reduce the

automatically reduce its speed for as long

pressed. When you release the switch, the

Fig. 153 Indicator and main beam headlight lever: switch and rocker switch for the cruise control

AA

AA

altea_EN Seite 189 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

If the cruise control system is switched off, the symbol is switched off. The

system will also be fully switched off when the 1st gear is selected.*

Setting speed*

Press the lower part SET/- of the rocker switch fig. 152

once briefly when you have reached the speed you wish to set.

When you release the rocker switch, the current speed is set and held

constant.

Adjusting set speed*

The speed can be altere

the brake.

Setting a higher speed

Press the upper part RE increase the speed. Th

long as you keep the r

the switch, the new sp

Setting a lower speed

Press the lower part SE speed. The vehicle will

as you keep the switch

new speed is stored.

21) Depending on the model version

Fig. 152 Indicator and main beam headlight lever: switch and rocker switch for the cruise control

AA

Driving190

ssed,

d to over 180 km/h,

d,

d to the position CANCEL without reaching

CANCEL operation is completed, the lever is

ial position.

release the brake or clutch pedal or reduce the

km/h and press once on the upper part of the

4 .

peed which is too high for the current road, . Risk of accident.

ntrol system*

AA

Fig. 155 Indicator and main beam headlight lever: switch and rocker switch for the cruise control

altea_EN Seite 190 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

When you increase speed with the accelerator and then release the pedal, the

system will automatically restore the set speed. This will not be the case,

however, if the vehicle speed is more than 10 km/h higher than the stored

speed for longer than 5 minutes. The speed will have to be stored again.

Control of the set speed is switched off if you reduce speed by depressing the

brake pedal. You can reactivate the control by pressing once on the upper part

of the rocker switch RES/+ page 189, fig. 153 .

WARNING

It is dangerous to use a set speed which is too high for the current road, traffic or weather conditions. Risk of accident.

Switching off system temporarily*

The cruise control system will be switched off in the following situations:

if the brake pedal is depressed,

if the clutch pedal is depre

if the vehicle is accelerate

when the ESP or TCS is use

when the lever is move

the OFF position. Once the

released and returns to its init

To resume the cruise control,

vehicle speed to less than 180

rocker switch RES/+ fig. 15

WARNING

It is dangerous to use a set s traffic or weather conditions

Turning off the cruise co

AA

Fig. 154 Indicator and main beam headlight lever switch and rocker switch for the cruise control

AB

Driving 191

Safety Fir Technical Data

altea_EN Seite 191 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Vehicles with a manual gearbox

The system is completely turned off by moving the control all the way to

the right hand side (OFF engaged), or when the vehicle is stationary, ignition

off.

Vehicles with automatic gearbox / DSG automatic gearbox

To completely disengage the system, the selector lever must be placed in one

of the following positions: P, N, R or 1 or with the vehicle stopped and the

ignition turned off.

AB

altea_EN Seite 192 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Intelligent technology 193

Safety Fir Technical Data

AS)*

(BAS) function is only included in

s brake in time, but not with maximum force.

long braking distances.

venes when you press the brake pedal very

sist system registers an emergency situation. It

e full brake pressure so that the ABS can be acti-

ently, thus reducing the braking distance.

n the brake pedal. The brake assist system

soon as you release the brake.

den braking, the hazard warning lights auto-

hicles behind. The hazard warning lights go off

or the hazard warning light switch is pressed.

gher if you drive too fast, if you do not keep in front, and when the road surface is slippery nt risk cannot be reduced by the brake assist

cannot defy the laws of physics. Slippery and n with the brake assist system! Therefore, it is

altea_EN Seite 193 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Practical tips

Intelligent technology

Brakes

Brake servo

The brake servo amplifies the pressure you apply to the brake pedal. It works

only when the engine is running.

If the brake servo is not functioning due to a malfunction, or if the vehicle has

to be towed, you will have to press the brake pedal considerably harder to

make up for the lack of servo assistance.

WARNING

The braking distance can also be affected by external factors.

Never let the vehicle coast with the engine switched off. Failure to do so could result in an accident. The braking distance is increased considerably as the brake servo does not function.

If the brake servo is not working, for example when the vehicle is being towed, you will have to press the brake pedal considerably harder than normal.

Brake assist system (B

The Brake Assist System

vehicles with ESP.

In an emergency, most driver

This results in unnecessarily

The brake assist system inter

quickly because the brake as

then very quickly builds up th

vated more quickly and effici

Do not reduce the pressure o

switches off automatically as

Emergency braking function

When the vehicle detects sud

matically come on to warn ve

when the vehicle accelerates

WARNING

The risk of accident is hi your distance to the vehicle or wet. The increased accide system.

The brake assist system wet roads are dangerous eve

Intelligent technology194

m cannot defy the laws of physics. Slippery even with ABS! If you notice that the ABS is

d wheels under braking), you should reduce e road and traffic conditions. Do not let the ou into taking any risks when driving.

is also determined by the tyres fitted

es are modified, the effectiveness of the ABS

(TCS)

em prevents the drive wheels from

s accelerating.

he traction control system during acceleration

help prevent the drive wheels of front-wheel

uring acceleration. The system works in the

tion with ABS. If a malfunction should occur in

ut of action.

oving, accelerate and climb a gradient in slip-

y otherwise be difficult or even impossible.

tically when the engine is started. If necessary,

hing the button on the centre console.

ng lamp is lit. The TCS should normally be left

in exceptional circumstances, when slipping of

it be disconnected for example

altea_EN Seite 194 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

essential that you adjust your speed to suit the road and traffic conditions. Do not let the extra safety features tempt you into taking any risks when driving.

Anti-lock brake system and traction control M-ABS (ABS and TCS)

Anti-lock brake system (ABS)

The anti-lock brake system prevents the wheels locking

during braking.

The anti-lock brake system (ABS) is an important part of the vehicle's active

safety system.

How the ABS works

If one of the wheels is turns too slowly in relation to the road speed, and is

close to locking, the system will reduce the braking pressure for this wheel.

The driver is made aware of this control process by a pulsating of the brake pedal and audible noise. This is a deliberate warning to the driver that one or

more of the wheels is tending to lock and the ABS control function has inter-

vened. In this situation it is important to keep the brake pedal fully depressed

so the ABS can regulate the brake application. Do not pump.

If you brake hard on a slippery road surface, the best possible control is

retained as the wheels do not lock.

However, ABS will not necessarily guarantee shorter braking distances in all

conditions. The braking distance could even be longer if you brake on gravel

or on fresh snow covering a slippery surface.

WARNING

The anti-lock brake syste and wet roads are dangerous working (to counteract locke speed immediately to suit th extra safety features tempt y

The effectiveness of ABS page 243.

If the running gear or brak could be severely limited.

Traction control system

The traction control syst

spinning when the car i

Description and operation of t (TCS)

TCS reduces engine power to

drive vehicles losing traction d

entire speed range in conjunc

the ABS, the TCS will also be o

TCS helps the vehicle to start m

pery conditions where this ma

The TCS is switched on automa

it may be turned on or off pus

When the TCS is off, the warni

switched on at all times. Only

the wheels is required, should

WARNING (continued)

Intelligent technology 195

Safety Fir Technical Data

ing the wheels to spin. On the other hand, the

drive torque than it could transmit. This causes

on the front shaft, resulting in understeering or

g the ESP sensors and signals, to detect and

the inner wheel thus counteracting the excess

is means that the path requested by the driver

ombination with the ESP and is always active,

l, TCS, is disconnected.

ation programme (ESP)*

tion programme increases the

e road.

rogramme helps to reduce the danger of skid-

rogramme (ESP) consists of ABS, EDL, TCS and endations.

m (ESP)*

idding by braking the wheels individually.

wheel angle and road speed to calculate the

by the driver, and constantly compares them

the vehicle. If the desired course is not being

altea_EN Seite 195 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

With compact temporary spare wheel.

When using the snow chains.

When driving in deep snow or on loose surfaces

When the vehicle is bogged-down, to free it by rocking.

The TCS should be switched on again afterwards as soon as possible.

WARNING

It must be remembered that TCS cannot defy the laws of physics. This should be kept in mind, particularly on slippery and wet roads and when towing a trailer.

Always adapt your driving style to suit the condition of the roads and the traffic situation. Do not let the extra safety afforded by TCS tempt you into taking any risks when driving, this can cause accidents.

Caution In order to ensure that TCS function correctly, all four wheels must be

fitted with the same tyres. Any differences in the rolling radius of the tyres can

cause the system to reduce engine power when this is not desired.

Modifications to the vehicle (e.g. to the engine, the brake system, running

gear or any components affecting the wheels and tyres) could affect the effi-

ciency of the ABS and TCS.

XDS*

Driveshaft differential

When taking a bend, the driveshaft differential mechanism allows the outer

wheel to turn at a higher speed than the inner wheel. In this way, the wheel

which is turning faster (outer wheel) receives less drive torque than the inner

wheel. This may mean that in certain situations the torque provided to the

inner wheel is too high, caus

outer wheel receives a lower

an overall loss of lateral grip

lengthening of the path.

The XDS system is able, usin

correct this effect.

The XDS, via the ESP, brakes

drive torque in this wheel. Th

is more precise,

The XDS system operates in c

even when the traction contro

Electronic stabilis

General notes

The electronic stabilisa

vehicle's stability on th

The electronic stabilisation p

ding.

The electronic stabilisation p

Steering manoeuvre recomm

Electronic Stabilising Progra

ESP reduces the danger of sk

The system uses the steering

changes of direction desired

with the actual behaviour of

Intelligent technology196

e (e.g. to the engine, the brake system, running

ting the wheels and tyres) could affect the effi-

d TCS.

(ABS)

vents the wheels locking during braking

ck (EDL)*

al lock helps prevent the loss of trac-

driven wheels starts spinning.

oving, accelerate and climb a gradient in slip-

y otherwise be difficult or even impossible.

olutions of the drive wheels using the ABS

lt the warning lamp for ABS lights up)

ely 80 km/h, it is able to balance out differ-

n wheels of approximately 100 rpm caused by

side of the vehicle. It does this by braking the

and distributing more driving force to the other

al.

e braking wheel from overheating, the EDL cuts

to excessive loads. The vehicle will continue to

. For this reason, the driver is not informed that

f.

utomatically when the brake has cooled down.

altea_EN Seite 196 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

maintained (for instance, if the car is starting to skid), then the ESP compen-

sates automatically by braking the appropriate wheel.

The forces acting on the braked wheel bring the vehicle back to a stable

condition. If the vehicle tends to oversteer, the system will act on the front

wheel on the outside of the turn.

Steering manoeuvre recommendations

This is a complementary safety function included in the ESP This function aids

the driver to better stabilize the vehicle in a critical situation. For example, in

case of sudden braking surface with varied adherence, the vehicle will tend

to destabilize its trajectory to the right to or to the left. In this case the ESP

recognizes the situation and helps the driver with a counter steering

manoeuvre from the power steering.

This function simply provides the driver with a recommended manoeuvre in

critical situations.

The vehicle doesn't steer itself with this function, the driver has full control of

the vehicle at all times.

WARNING

It must be remembered that ESP cannot defy the laws of physics. This should be kept in mind, particularly on slippery and wet roads and when towing a trailer.

Always adapt your driving style to suit the condition of the roads and the traffic situation. Do not let the extra safety afforded by ESP tempt you into taking any risks when driving, this can cause accidents.

Caution In order to ensure that ESP functions correctly, all four wheels must be

fitted with the same tyres. Any differences in the rolling radius of the tyres can

cause the system to reduce engine power when this is not desired.

Modifications to the vehicl

gear or any components affec

ciency of the ABS, EDL, ESP an

Anti-lock brake system

The anti-lock brake system pre

page 194.

Electronic differential lo

The electronic differenti

tion caused if one of the

EDL helps the vehicle to start m

pery conditions where this ma

The system will control the rev

sensors (in case of an EDL fau

page 81.

At speeds of up to approximat

ences in the speed of the drive

a slippery road surface on one

wheel which has lost traction

driven wheel via the differenti

To prevent the disc brake of th

out automatically if subjected

function normally without EDL

the EDL has been switched of

The EDL will switch on again a

Intelligent technology 197

Safety Fir Technical Data

lly designed to complement the superior engine

s the car exceptional handling and performance

l roads and in more difficult conditions, such as

, your car will have plenty of traction in winter

ndard tyres. Nevertheless, we still recommend

tyres should be fitted on all four wheels when

pected, mainly because this will give a better

are mandatory, this also applies to cars with

rive, all four tyres must have the same rolling

e, you should always adjust your speed to suit e extra safety features tempt you into taking re to do so could result in an accident.

f your vehicle is limited by the tyres' grip. rent from a vehicle without four-wheel drive. e too fast on icy or slippery roads just because ration in these conditions. Failure to do so

d that the front wheels may start to aqua- the road if the car is driven too fast. If this

e no sudden increase in engine speed when rn the driver, as with a front-wheel drive car.

mentioned above, always choose a driving

altea_EN Seite 197 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

WARNING

When accelerating on a slippery surface, for example on ice and snow, press the accelerator carefully. Despite EDL, the driven wheels may start to spin. This could impair the vehicle's stability.

Always adapt your driving style to suit road conditions and the traffic situation. Do not let the extra safety afforded by EDL tempt you into taking any risks when driving, this can cause accidents.

Caution Modifications to the vehicle (e.g. to the engine, the brake system, running

gear or any components affecting the wheels and tyres) could affect the effi-

ciency of the EDL page 218.

The traction control system (TCS)

The traction control system prevents the drive wheels from spinning when the

car is accelerating page 194.

Four-wheel drive*

On four-wheel drive models, the engine power is distributed

to all four wheels

General notes

The four-wheel-drive system operates completely automatically. The propul-

sion force is distributed among the four wheels and adapted to the driving

style and the road conditions.

The four-wheel drive is specia

power. This combination give

capabilities both on norma

snow and ice.

Winter tyres

Thanks to its four-wheel drive

conditions, even with the sta

that winter tyres or all-season

winter road conditions are ex

braking response.

Snow chains

On roads where snow chains

four-wheel drive.

Changing tyres

On vehicles with four-wheel d

circumference page 248.

WARNING

Even with four-wheel driv the conditions. Do not let th any risks when driving. Failu

The braking capability o Vehicle behaviour is no diffe So do not be tempted to driv the car still has good accele could result in an accident.

On wet roads bear in min plane and lose contact with should happen, there will b aquaplaning begins to wa For this reason and for that

Intelligent technology198

se, the layer of salt on the brake discs and pads

.

irt to build up on the brake pads and corrosion

is used infrequently, or if you only drive low

akes very much.

uently, or if rust has formed on the disks, it is

and disks by braking firmly a few times from a

.

d ever increase suddenly, this may mean that

as failed. Drive immediately to the nearest qual-

ault rectified. On the way to the dealer, be

on the brake pedal, and allow for longer stop-

brake system if the brake fluid level is too low.

red electronically.

pressure you apply to the brake pedal. The

the engine is running.

s to clean off deposits on the pads and discs, re not to inconvenience or endanger other

ot move while in neutral, when the motor is ld result in an accident.

altea_EN Seite 198 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

speed suitable for the road conditions. Failure to do so could result in an accident.

Brakes

What factors can have a negative effect on the brakes?

New brake pads

New brake pads do not provide optimal performance during the first 400 km

they must be run in. However, the reduced braking capacity may be

compensated by pressing on the brake pedal a little harder. Avoid over-

loading the brakes during run-in.

Wear

The rate of wear on the brake pads depends a great deal on how you drive and

the conditions in which the vehicle is operated. Negative factors are, for

instance, city traffic, frequent short trips or hard driving with abrupt starts

and stops.

Wet roads; road salt

When the velocity is over 80 km/h windscreen wipers are on, the brake

system moves the pads towards the brake discs for a few seconds. This

occurs - without warning to the driver - at regular intervals and requires a

more rapid response from the brakes when driving on wet roads.

In certain conditions, such as in heavy rain, or after washing the car or driving

through water, the full braking effect can be delayed by moisture (or in winter

by ice) on the discs and brake pads. The brakes should be dried by pressing

the pedal to restore full braking effect.

The effectiveness of the brakes can also be temporarily reduced if the car is

driven for some distance without using the brakes when there is a lot of salt

on the road in winter. In this ca

has to wear off before braking

Corrosion

There may be a tendency for d

to form on the discs if the car

mileages without using the br

If the brakes are not used freq

advisable to clean off the pads

moderately high speed

Faults in the brake system

If the brake pedal travel shoul

one of the two brake circuits h

ified workshop and have the f

prepared to use more pressure

ping distances.

Low brake fluid level

Malfunctions can occur in the

The brake fluid level is monito

Brake servo

The brake servo amplifies the

brake servo works only when

WARNING

When applying the brake select a clear, dry road. Be su road users. Risk of accident.

Ensure the vehicle does n stopped. Failure to do so cou

WARNING (continued)

Intelligent technology 199

Safety Fir Technical Data

will be required than usual. The fault should be

shop as soon as possible.

ork if the engine is off. In this case the steering

rning limit when the car is stationary, this will

e power steering system. Turning the steering

d on the system, which causes noise. It will also

e engine.

do not turn the steering wheel to its limit for

wise, there is a risk of damaging the power

uld fail at any time or the engine is switched off

ed), the car can still be steered. However, more

the steering wheel.

malfunctioning, please take the car to a quali-

ssible.

es a special hydraulic fluid. The container is

rtment (front left). The correct fluid level in the

power steering to function properly. The

d at the Inspection Service.

altea_EN Seite 199 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Caution Never let the brakes drag by leaving your foot on the pedal when you do

not really intend to brake. This overheats the brakes, resulting in longer stop-

ping distances and greater wear.

Before driving down a long, steep gradient, it is advisable to reduce speed

and change to a lower gear (or move the selector lever to a lower gear position

if your car has automatic transmission). This makes use of engine braking

and prolongs the service life of the brakes. If you still have to use the brakes,

it is better to brake firmly at intervals than to apply the brakes continuously.

Note If the brake servo is not functioning due to a malfunction, or if the vehicle

has to be towed, you will have to press the brake pedal considerably harder

to make up for the lack of servo assistance.

If you wish to equip the car with accessories such as a front spoiler or

wheel covers, it is important that the flow of air to the front wheels is not

obstructed, otherwise the brakes can overheat.

Power steering (servotronic*)

The power steering assists the driver when turning the

steering wheel (with the engine running).

The power steering assists the driver by reducing the force needed to turn the

steering wheel. In cars equipped with servotronic* power steering the degree

of power assistance is regulated electronically according to road speed.

The power steering will keep on working even if the servotronic* device fails.

The degree of power assistance will, however, no longer adapt to different

speeds. If the electronic regulating system is not working properly, this is

most noticeable when turning the steering wheel at low speeds (for instance

when parking) more effort

corrected by a qualified work

The power steering does not w

wheel is very hard to turn.

If the steering is held at its tu

place an excessive load on th

wheel to its limit places a loa

reduce the idling speed of th

Caution When the engine is running,

more than 15 seconds. Other

steering.

Note If the power steering sho

(for instance when being tow

effort will be required to turn

If the system is leaking or

fied workshop as soon as po

The power steering requir

located in the engine compa

reservoir is important for the

hydraulic fluid level is checke

Driving and the environment200

ing distance

raking distance are influenced by

oad conditions.

pends directly on the brake pad wear. The rate

ends to a great extent on the conditions under

and the way the vehicle is driven. If you often

rt distances or have a sporty driving style, we

thickness of your brake pads checked by an

e frequently than recommended in the Service

r example, after crossing water areas, in heavy

the car, the effect of the brakes is lessened as

n frozen (in winter): The brakes should be

to restore full braking effect.

faults in the brake system increase the risk

run in and do not have the correct friction ever, the reduced braking capacity may be the brake pedal a little harder. This also s are fitted.

, or if you are driving on roads which have g power may set in later than normal.

s are excessively used, they will overheat. ep slopes, it is advisable to reduce speed and r (or move the selector lever to a lower gear if

altea_EN Seite 200 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Driving and the environment

Running-in

Running in a new engine

The engine needs to be run-in over the first 1,500 km.

Up to 1,000 kilometres

Do not drive faster than two thirds of top speed.

Do not accelerate hard.

Avoid high engine revolutions.

Do not tow a trailer.

From 1000 to 1500 km

Speeds can be gradually increased to the maximum road speed

or maximum permissible engine speed (rpm).

During its first few hours of running, the internal friction in the engine is

greater than later on, when all the moving parts have bedded in.

For the sake of the environment If the engine is run in gently, its life will be increased and its oil consumption,

reduced.

Braking effect and brak

The braking effect and b

driving situations and r

The efficiency of the brakes de

of wear of the brake pads dep

which the vehicle is operated

drive in town traffic, drive sho

recommend that you have the

Authorised Service Centre mor

Schedule.

If you drive with wet brakes, fo

rainfall or even after washing

the brake discs are wet or eve

dried by pressing the pedal

WARNING

Longer braking distances and of accidents.

New brake pads must be during the first 400 km. How compensated by pressing on applies when new brake pad

If brakes are wet or frozen been gritted with salt, brakin

On steep slopes, if brake Before driving down long ste change down into a lower gea

Driving and the environment 201

Safety Fir Technical Data

to start it, use jump leads if necessary

n running or loss of power when the vehicle is

iately and have the vehicle inspected at the

In general, the exhaust warning lamp will light

symptoms occur page 77. If this happens,

haust system and escape into the environment.

so be damaged by overheating.

hes very high temperatures! Fire hazard!

talytic converter could come into contact with terials under the vehicle.

underseal or anti-corrosion coatings to the verter or the heat shields on the exhaust ld catch fire when the vehicle is being driven.

because the irregularity of the fuel supply may

allows unburnt fuel to enter the exhaust

verheating and damage the catalytic converter.

nvironment rol system is working perfectly, there may be a

aust under some conditions. This depends on

el used. Quite often the problem can be solved

rand.

altea_EN Seite 201 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

your vehicle has automatic transmission). This makes use of engine braking and relieves the brakes.

Never let the brakes rub by applying light pressure. Continuous braking will cause the brakes to overheat and the braking distance will increase. Apply and then release the brakes alternately.

Never let the vehicle run with the engine switched off. The braking distance is increased considerably as the brake servo does not function.

Very heavy use of the brakes may cause a vapour lock if the brake fluid is left in the system for too long. This impairs the braking effect.

Non-standard or damaged front spoilers could restrict the airflow to the brakes and cause them to overheat. Observe the relevant instructions before purchasing accessories page 218, Technical modifications.

If a brake circuit fails, the braking distance will be increased consider- ably. Contact a qualified workshop immediately and avoid unnecessary journeys.

Exhaust gasses purification system

Catalytic converter*

To conserve the useful life of the catalytic converter

Always use unleaded petrol.

Do not let the fuel get too low in the tank.

For engine oil changes, do not top the reservoir up page 231,

Topping up engine oil .

Never tow the vehicle

page 275.

If you notice misfiring, uneve

moving, reduce speed immed

nearest qualified workshop.

up when any of the described

unburnt fuel can enter the ex

The catalytic converter can al

WARNING

The catalytic converter reac

Never park where the ca dry grass or inflammable ma

Do not apply additional exhaust pipes, catalytic con system. These materials cou

Caution Never fully drain the fuel tank

cause ignition problems. This

system, which could cause o

For the sake of the e Even when the emission cont

smell of sulphur from the exh

the sulphur content of the fu

by changing to another fuel b

WARNING (continued)

Driving and the environment202

0-15%. Next, we provide you with some tips in

ation and, at the same time, save money.

ances

accelerating. When you anticipate the situa-

ten and, thus, accelerate less. If it is possible,

engaged, for example, if you see a red light

erves brakes and tyres from wear; the emis-

re reduced to zero (disconnection out of

rgy

l is to change up quickly through the gears.

m in the lower gears uses an unnecessary

first to second gear as quickly as possible. We

ssible, you change to a higher gear upon

e in moderation and avoid the kick-down

the top speed permitted by the vehicle. Fuel

ns and noise levels all increase very rapidly at

erate speeds will help to save fuel.

he engine when waiting in a traffic jam, at level

ith a long red phase. The fuel saved after only

n the amount of fuel needed to restart the

ime to warm up when it is running at idling

ollutant emissions are also especially high

altea_EN Seite 202 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Diesel engine particulate filter*

The diesel engine particulate filter eliminates soot produced

by burning diesel.

The diesel engine dust filter eliminates most of the soot from the exhaust gas

system. Under normal driving conditions, the filter cleans itself. If the driving

conditions do not allow the filter to clean itself (for example, multiple short

trips) the filter will be obstructed by dust and pollen and the indicator for

the diesel engine particulate filter indicator will light. See under Warning

Lights.

WARNING

The diesel engine particulate filter may reach extremely high tempera- tures; it should not enter into contact with flammable materials under- neath the vehicle. Failure to comply could result in fire.

Caution The vehicle is not designed for refuelling with mixtures of FAME fuel

(biodiesel) over 7% in accordance with DIN 51628. The diesel particle filter is

damaged when this mixture percentage is exceeded.

Economical and ecological driving

Economical and environmental driving

Fuel consumption, environmental pollution and wear to the engine, brakes

and tyres depends in large part on your driving style. By adopting an econom-

ical driving style and anticipating the traffic situation ahead, you can easily

reduce fuel consumption by 1

order to help reduce contamin

Driving ahead of the circumst

A vehicle uses most fuel when

tion, you have to brake less of

let the vehicle roll with a gear ahead. The braking effect pres

sions and fuel consumption a

inertia).

Change gear early to save ene

An effective way of saving fue

Running the engine at high rp

amount of fuel.

Manual gearbox: Change from

recommend that, whenever po

reaching 2,000 rpm.

Automatic gearbox: Accelerat

position.

Avoid driving at high speed

We advise you not to drive at

consumption, exhaust emissio

higher speeds. Driving at mod

Avoid idling

It is worthwhile switching off t

crossings or at traffic lights w

30 - 40 seconds is greater tha

engine.

The engine takes a very long t

speed. Mechanical wear and p

Driving and the environment 203

Safety Fir Technical Data

tra wind resistance caused by the roof carrier

nator, which produces electricity. With the need

on is also increased. Because of this, always

when you do not need them. Examples of equip-

ity are: the fan at high speeds, the rear window

ness

top priority in the design, choice of materials

eat.

ical recycling

signed for ease of dismantling

acilitate dismantling

rade materials

ers are labelled in accordance with ISO 1043,

can be recycled

rouped together for easy recycling

n manufacture

olatile components

conditioning

aterials laws: cadmium, asbestos, lead,

altea_EN Seite 203 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

during this initial warm-up phase. It is therefore best to drive off immediately

after starting the engine. Avoid running the engine at high speed.

Periodic maintenance

Periodic maintenance work guarantees that, before beginning a journey, you

will not waste fuel. A well-serviced engine gives you the benefit of improved fuel efficiency as well as maximum reliability and an enhanced resale value.

A badly serviced engine can consume up to 10% more fuel than necessary.

Avoid short journeys

To reduce the consumption and emission of polluting gases, the engine and

the exhaust filtration systems should reach the optimum service tempera- ture.

With the engine cold, fuel consumption is proportionally higher. The engine

does not warm up and fuel consumption does not regularise until having

driven some four kilometres. This is the reason why we recommend avoiding

short trips wherever possible.

Maintain the correct tyre pressures

Bear in mind that keeping the tyres at an adequate pressure saves fuel. If the

tyre pressures are just 1 bar too low, this can put the fuel consumption up by

as much as 5 %. Due to the greater rolling resistance, under-inflation also

increases tyre wear and impairs handling.

The tyre pressures should always be checked when the tyres are cold.

Do not use winter tyres all through the year: they will increase fuel consump-

tion by up to 10 %.

Avoid unnecessary weight

Every kilo of extra weight will put up the fuel consumption, so it is worth

checking the luggage compartment occasionally to make sure that no unnec-

essary loads are being transported.

A roof carrier is often left in place for the sake of convenience, even when it is

no longer needed. At a speed of 100-120 km/h your car will use about 12%

more fuel as a result of the ex

even when it is empty.

Save electrical energy

The engine activates the alter

for electricity, fuel consumpti

turn off electrical equipment

ment that use a lot of electric

heating or the seat heaters*.

Environmental friendli

Environmental protection is a

and production of your new S

Design measures for econom

Joints and connections de

Modular construction to f

Increased use of single-g

Plastic parts and elastom

ISO 11469 and ISO 1629

Choice of materials

Nearly all materials used

Similar types of plastics g

Recycled materials used i

Reduction of the plastic v

CFC-free refrigerant in air

Compliance with prohibited m mercury, chrome VI.

Driving and the environment204

dlights

d drive vehicle in a left-hand drive country, or

ped beam headlights will dazzle oncoming

apply stickers to certain parts of the headlight

available in your Authorised Service Centre.

headlights, the rotation system must previ-

this, please go to a specialist workshop.

altea_EN Seite 204 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Manufacturing methods

Use of recycled material for manufacturing plastic parts

Solvent-free cavity sealing

Solvent-free wax for protecting the vehicles in transit

Solvent-free adhesives

No CFCs used in production

Surplus materials used extensively for energy conversion and building

materials

Overall water consumption reduced

Heat recovery systems

Water-soluble paint

Driving abroad

Observations

To drive abroad, the following must be taken into consideration:

For vehicles fitted with a catalytic converter ensure that unleaded petrol is

available for the journey. See the chapter Refuelling. Automobile organisa-

tions will have information about service station networks selling unleaded

fuel.

In some countries, it is possible that a vehicle model is sold under condi-

tions where some spare parts are not available or that the Authorised Service

Centre may only carry out limited repairs.

SEAT importers and distributors will gladly provide information about the

technical preparation of your vehicle and also about necessary maintenance

and repair possibilities.

Adhesive strips for hea

If you have to drive a right-han

vice versa, the asymmetric dip

traffic.

To prevent dazzling, you must

lenses. Further information is

In vehicles with self-directing

ously be disconnected. To do

Trailer towing 205

Safety Fir Technical Data

s and draw bar weights that are given on the

ket are for certification purposes only. The

ic model, which may be lower than these figures

ven in the registration documents Section

so that heavy objects are as near to the axle as

trailer must be secured to prevent them

um permissible pressure shown on the sticker

flap. Set the tyre pressure of the trailer tyres in

anufacturer's recommendations.

nough of the road behind the trailer with the

t the case, you should have additional mirrors

hould be mounted on hinged extension

o give sufficient vision to the rear.

trailer. This could result in fatal accidents.

ditional demands on the vehicle. We recom-

ween the normal inspection intervals if the

towing a trailer.

altea_EN Seite 205 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Trailer towing

Instructions to follow

Your vehicle may be used to tow a trailer when fitted with the correct equip-

ment.

If the car is supplied with a factory-fitted towing bracket it will already have

the necessary technical modifications and meet the statutory requirements

for towing a trailer. For the after-market fitting of a trailer towing bracket see

page 207.

Connectors

Your vehicle is fitted with a 12-pin connector for the electrical connection

between the trailer and the vehicle.

If the trailer has a 7-pin plug you will need to use an adapter cable. This is

available in any SEAT dealer.

Trailer weight / draw bar loading

Never exceed the authorised towing limit. If you do not load the trailer up to

the maximum permitted trailer weight, you can then climb correspondingly

steeper slopes.

The maximum trailer weights listed are only applicable for altitudes up to

1,000 m above sea level. With increasing altitude the engine power and

therefore the vehicle's climbing ability are impaired because of the reduced

air density. The maximum trailer weight has to be reduced accordingly. The

weight of the vehicle and trailer combination must be reduced by 10% for

every further 1,000 m (or part thereof). The gross combination weight is the

actual weight of the laden vehicle plus the actual weight of the laden trailer.

When possible, operate the trailer with the maximum permitted draw bar weight on the ball joint of the towing bracket, but do not exceed the specified

limit.

The figures for trailer weight data plate of the towing brac

correct figures for your specif

for the towing bracket, are gi

Technical data.

Distributing the load

Distribute loads in the trailer

possible. Loads carried in the

moving.

Tyre pressure

Set tyre pressure to the maxim

on the inside of the fuel tank

accordance with the trailer m

Exterior mirrors

Check whether you can see e

standard mirrors. If this is no

fitted. Both exterior mirrors s

brackets. Adjust the mirrors t

WARNING

Never transport people in a

Note Towing a trailer places ad

mend additional services bet

vehicle is used frequently for

Trailer towing206

trailer is reduced with increasing speed. For

to drive at the maximum permissible speed in

r or wind conditions. This applies especially

ed immediately if the trailer shows the slightest

top the snaking by increasing speed.

the trailer has an overrun brake, apply the

, firmly. This will prevent the jerking that can be

cking. Select a low gear in due course before

This enables you to use the engine braking to

during prolonged ascents, driving in a low gear

s monitor the temperature indicator for the

am*

ier to stabilise the trailer in case it skids or

altea_EN Seite 206 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Find out whether special regulations apply to towing a trailer in your

country.

Ball coupling of towing bracket*

Depending on the model version, the spherical head on the trailer hook may

be stored in the tool box.

The ball coupling is provided with instructions on fitting and removing the

ball coupling of the towing bracket.

WARNING

The towing bracket ball coupling must be stored securely in the luggage compartment to prevent them being flung through the vehicle and causing injury.

Note By law, the ball coupling must be removed if a trailer is not being towed

and it obscures the number plate.

Driving tips

Driving with a trailer always requires extra care.

Weight distribution

The weight distribution of a loaded trailer with an unladen vehicle is very

unfavourable. However, if this cannot be avoided, drive extra slowly to allow

for the unbalanced weight distribution.

Speed

The stability of the vehicle and

this reason, it is advisable not

an unfavourable road, weathe

when driving downhill.

You should always reduce spe

sign of snaking. Never try to s

Always brake in due course. If

brakes gently at first and then

caused by the trailer wheels lo

going down a steep downhill.

slow down the vehicle.

Reheating

At very high temperatures and

and high engine speed, alway

coolant page 55.

Electronic Stabilisation Progr

The ESP* system makes it eas

swings.

Trailer towing 207

Safety Fir Technical Data

Fig. 156 Attachment points for towing bracket

altea_EN Seite 207 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Fitting a towing bracket*

It is possible to fit a towing bracket to the rear of the vehicle.

Trailer towing208

correctly installed, there is serious danger of

se observe the instructions provided by the racket.

correctly installed, this could cause damage to

.

ng of a trailer bracket is not recommended due

altea_EN Seite 208 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

If a towing bracket is to be fitted after the vehicle is purchased, this must be

completed according to the instructions of the towing bracket manufacturer.

The attachment points for the towing bracket are on the lower part of the

vehicle.

The distance between the centre of the ball coupling and the ground should

never be lower than the indicated value, even with a fully loaded vehicle and

including the maximum resting weight.

Elevation values for securing the towing bracket:

65 mm (minimum)

350 mm to 420 mm (fully laden vehicle)

357 mm

569 mm

875 mm

1,040 mm

Fitting a towing bracket

Driving with a trailer involves an extra effort for the vehicle. Therefore,

before fitting a towing bracket, please contact an Authorised Service Centre

to check whether your cooling system needs modification.

Submit to the legal requirements in your country (e.g. the fitting of a sepa-

rate warning lamp).

Certain vehicle components, e.g. the rear bumper, must be removed and

reinstalled. The towing bracket securing bolts must be tightened using a

torque wrench, and an electrical socket must be connected to the vehicle's

electrical system. The above-mentioned require specialized knowledge and

tools.

Figures in the illustration show the elevation value and the attachment

points which must be considered if you are retrofitting a towing bracket.

WARNING

Towing brackets should be fitted by specialists.

If the towing bracket is in accident.

For your own safety, plea manufacturer of the towing b

Caution If the electrical socket is in

the vehicle's electrical system

Note For the sports model (FR), fitti

to the design of the bumpers.

AA

AB

AC

AD

AE

AF

AG

WARNING (continued)

Cleaning and caring for your vehicle 209

Safety Fir Technical Data

ain products may produce noxious vapours; ventilated areas.

e, engine oil, nail varnish remover or other ic and highly flammable. Risk of fire and explo-

icle, or carrying out any maintenance, switch andbrake firmly and remove the key from the

, mud or dust if the surface of the vehicle is dry.

e for cleaning purposes. This could damage the

your vehicle. Soak dirt, mud or dust with plenty

nvironment ts for your vehicle maintenance, select the ones

environment.

re products should not be disposed of with ordi-

ve the disposal information on the package.

altea_EN Seite 209 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Cleaning and caring for your vehicle

General notes

Regular washing and care help maintain the value of your

vehicle.

Your vehicle maintenance

Regular care and washing help to maintain the value of the vehicle. This may

also be one of the requirements for acknowledging warranty claims in the

event of bodywork corrosion or paint defects.

The best way to protect the car against environmental contaminants is to

wash and wax it frequently. The longer substances such as insects remains,

bird droppings, resinous tree sap, road dirt, industrial deposits, tar, soot or

road salt and other aggressive materials remain on the vehicle, the more

damage they do to the paintwork. High temperatures (for instance in strong

sunlight) further intensify the corrosive effect.

After winter, a period when salt is put on the roads, it is important to have the

underside of the vehicle washed thoroughly.

Products for vehicle maintenance

Car care products are available in your Authorised Service Centre. Keep the

product instructions until you have used them up.

WARNING

Car care products can be toxic. For this, they must always be kept closed in their original container. Keep them out of the reach of children. Failure to comply could result in poisoning.

Always read and observe the instructions and warnings on the package before using car care products. Improper use could damage your health or

your vehicle. The use of cert they should be used in well

Never use fuel, turpentin volatile fluids. These are tox sion.

Before washing your veh the engine off, apply your h ignition.

Caution Never attempt to remove dirt

Never use a dry cloth or spong

paintwork or the windows of

of water.

For the sake of the e When purchasing produc

which are not harmful to the

The leftovers of the car ca

nary household waste. Obser

WARNING (continued)

Cleaning and caring for your vehicle210

plenty of water and rinse it off.

top to bottom with a soft sponge, a glove

ht pressure.

ve often with clean water.

ould only be used for very stubborn dirt.

anels etc. until last with a different

ughly with water.

gently with a chamois leather.

ld, dry the rubber seals and its surfaces

ezing. Apply silicone spray to the rubber

avoid sudden and sharp braking. Dry

effect and braking distancethe brakes by

nition switched off.

rms from cuts on sharp metal edges when inside of the wheel housings etc. Risk of

altea_EN Seite 210 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Vehicle exterior maintenance

Automatic car wash tunnel

The car can normally be washed without problem in an auto-

matic car wash.

The vehicle paintwork is so durable that the car can normally be washed

without problems in an automatic car washing tunnel. However, the paint-

work wear depends to a large extent, on the kind of the car washing tunnel,

the brushes used, its water filtering and the type of cleaning and preservative

products.

Before going through a car wash, be sure to take the usual precautions such

as closing the windows and sunroof. There is nothing to note apart from that.

If the vehicle has special accessories such as spoilers or a roof carrier or two-

way radio aerial, etc., it is advisable to consult the car washing tunnel oper-

ator.

After washing, the brakes could hesitate to respond as the brake discs and

pads could be wet, or even frozen in winter. Dry the brakes by braking

several times.

WARNING

Water, ice and salt on the brakes can reduce braking efficiency. Risk of acci- dent.

Caution If an automatic car wash tunnel is used, before entering the tunnel, put the

aerial down parallel to the roof and do not tighten to avoid damage.

Washing by hand

Vehicle washing

First soften the dirt with

Clean your vehicle from

or a brush. Use very lig

Rinse the sponge or glo

Special car shampoo sh

Clean the wheels, sill p

sponge or glove.

Rinse the vehicle thoro

Dry your vehicle surface

When temperature is co to prevent them from fre

seals.

After washing

Directly after washing,

page 200, Braking

braking several times.

WARNING

Wash your car with the ig

Protect your hands and a cleaning the underbody, the injury.

Cleaning and caring for your vehicle 211

Safety Fir Technical Data

distance for soft materials and painted

sure cleaner to remove ice or snow from

d jet nozzles (rotating jets) .

avoid sudden and sharp braking. Dry

s by braking several times.

concentrated jet (rotating nozzle). Even at d short cleaning times, visible and invisible es. This may cause an accident.

e brakes can reduce braking efficiency. Risk of

an 60C. This could damage the vehicle.

ehicle, keep a sufficient distance from sensitive

es, plastic, soundproofing material, etc. This is

ainted as the paintwork. The closer the nozzle is

wear on the material.

nce requirements

s the paintwork.

r car if water does not form small drops and run

lean.

altea_EN Seite 211 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Water, ice and salt on the brakes can reduce braking efficiency. Risk of accident.

Caution Never remove dirt, mud or dust if the vehicle surface is dry. Never use a

dry cloth or sponge for cleaning purposes. This could scratch the paintwork

or glass on your vehicle.

Washing the vehicle in low temperatures: when washing the vehicle with

a hose, do not direct water into the lock cylinders or the gaps around the

doors, tailgate, or sunroof. Risk of freezing.

For the sake of the environment To protect environment, the car should be washed only in specially provided

wash bays. This prevents toxic, oil-laden waste water entering the sewerage

system. In some districts, washing vehicles outside wash bays is prohibited.

Note Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight.

Washing the car with a high pressure cleaner

Be particularly careful when using a high pressure cleaner!

Always observe the instructions for the high-pressure cleaner,

particularly those concerning the pressure and the spraying distance.

Increase the spraying

bumpers.

Do not use a high pres

windows page 212.

Never use concentrate

Directly after washing,

page 200 the brake

WARNING

Never wash tyres with a large spraying distances an damage can occur to the tyr

Water, ice and salt on th accident.

Caution Do not use water hotter th

To avoid damage to the v

materials such as flexible hos

also important for bumpers p

to the surface, the greater the

Vehicle paint maintena

Regular waxing protect

You need to apply wax to you

off the paintwork when it is c

WARNING (continued)

Cleaning and caring for your vehicle212

c parts.

n plastic parts, clean them with approved

nd care products.

ner directly over the air vents of the vehicle may

e liquid is accidentally spilled.

ontain solvents will damage the material.

exterior mirrors

ith commercially available, alcohol based

clean chamois leather or a lint-free cloth.

ove snow from the windows and mirrors.

eather to dry the windows. The chamois

ces are not suitable to clean windows because

sits which could smear the windows.

altea_EN Seite 212 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

A good quality hard wax product is available from your Authorised Service

Centre.

Regular wax applications help to protects the paintwork from environmental

contaminants. page 209. It also protects against minor scratches.

Even if a wax solution is used regularly in the car washing tunnel, it is advis-

able to protect the paint with a hard wax coating at least twice a year.

Polishing the paintwork

Polishing brings back gloss to the paintwork.

Polishing is only necessary if the paint has lost its shine, and the gloss cannot

be brought back by applying wax. Polishing products can be purchased in

your Authorised Service Centre.

The car must be waxed after polishing if the polish used does not contain wax

compounds to seal the paint page 211, Vehicle paint maintenance

requirements.

Caution To prevent damage to the paintwork:

Do not use polishes and hard wax on painted parts with a matte finish or

on plastic parts.

Do not polish your vehicle in a sandy or dusty environment.

Caring for plastic parts

Solvents damage plasti

If normal washing fails to clea

solvent-free plastic cleaning a

Caution The use of liquid air freshe

damage the plastic parts if th

Cleaning products which c

Cleaning windows and

Cleaning windows

Moisten the windows w

glass cleaner.

Dry the windows with a

Removing snow

Use a small brush to rem

Removing ice

Use a de-icer spray.

Use a clean cloth or chamois l

leathers used on painted surfa

they are soiled with wax depo

Cleaning and caring for your vehicle 213

Safety Fir Technical Data

nce

looked after, they will not freeze so

ove dust and dirt from the rubber seals.

product to the rubber seals.

ows, bonnet and rear lid will remain pliable and

with a suitable care product (for example sili-

so prevent premature ageing and leaks. The

f rubber seals are well looked after, they will not

can freeze up in winter.

ou should only use spray with lubricating and

th a damp cloth.

ith a soft, dry cloth.

altea_EN Seite 213 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

If possible, use a de-icing spray to remove ice. If you use an ice scraper, push

it in one direction only without swinging it.

Use window cleaner or a silicone remover to clean rubber, oil, grease and sili-

cone deposits off.

Wax deposits can be removed with a special cleaner available in your Author-

ised Service Centre. Wax deposits on the windscreen could cause the wiper

blades to judder. If a window cleanser, specifically for removing wax, is added

to the windscreen washer fluid prevents wiper blades from juddering. Wax

deposits are not removed.

Caution Never use warm or hot water to remove snow and ice from windows and

mirrors. This could cause the glass to crack!

The heating element for the rear window is located on the inner side of the

window. To prevent damage, do not put stickers on the heating elements

inside the window.

Cleaning windscreen wiper blades

Clean wiper blades are essential to provide clear vision.

1. Use a soft cloth to remove dust and dirt from the windscreen

wiper blades.

2. Use window cleanser to clean the windscreen wiper blades. Use

a sponge or a cloth to remove stubborn stains.

Rubber seals maintena

If rubber seals are well

quickly.

1. Use a soft cloth to rem

2. Apply a specialist care

The strips on the doors, wind

last longer if they are treated

cone spray).

Caring for rubber seals will al

doors will be easier to open. I

freeze so quickly in winter.

Door lock cylinders

The door lock cylinders

To de-ice the lock cylinders y

anti-corrosive properties.

Cleaning chrome parts

1. Clean chrome parts wi

2. Polish chrome parts w

Cleaning and caring for your vehicle214

s

st from alloy wheels.

ent to clean the wheel rims.

ound to the wheels.

ttention to preserve their appearance. If road

ten removed, the aluminium finish will be

ent for alloy wheel rims.

ents should not be used. If the protective

tone impact, the damaged area should be

ylindrical jet. Even at large spraying distances ible and invisible damage can occur to the

ident.

brakes can reduce braking efficiency. Risk of ing, avoid sudden and sharp braking. You plying the brakes carefully several times

altea_EN Seite 214 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

If this does not provide satisfying results, use a specialist chrome cleaning product. Chrome cleaning products will remove stains and coatings from the

surface.

Caution To prevent scratching chrome surfaces:

Never use an abrasive care product on chrome.

Do not clean or polish chrome parts in a sandy or dusty environment.

Steel wheel rims

Clean steel wheel rims regularly using a separate sponge.

Use an industrial cleanser to remove brake dust. Any damage to the paint on

steel wheel rims should be repaired before starting to rust.

WARNING

Never wash tyres with a cylindrical jet. Even at large spraying distances and short cleaning times, visible and invisible damage can occur to the tyres. This may cause an accident.

Water, ice and salt on the brakes can reduce braking efficiency. Risk of accident. Directly after washing, avoid sudden and sharp braking. You must dry the brakes by applying the brakes carefully several times page 200.

Cleaning alloy wheel rim

Every two weeks

Wash salt and brake du

Use an acid free deterg

Every three months

Apply a hard wax comp

Alloy wheels require regular a

salt and brake dust are not of

impaired.

Always use an acid-free deterg

Car polish or other abrasive ag

coating is damaged, e.g. by s

repaired immediately.

WARNING

Never wash tyres with a c and short cleaning times, vis tyres. This may cause an acc

Water, ice and salt on the accident. Directly after wash must dry the brakes by ap page 200.

Cleaning and caring for your vehicle 215

Safety Fir Technical Data

is usually removed if the engine compartment

ing solutions, or if you have the engine cleaned.

ensure that all surfaces, seams, joints and

mpartment are given anti-corrosion treatment.

ine compartment, always observe the safety

et, switch the engine off, apply the parking ove the key from the ignition.

before you clean the engine compartment.

underbody, wheel arches without protecting ay cut yourself on sharp-edged metal parts. lt in injury.

the brakes may affect braking efficiency. Risk shing, avoid sudden and sharp braking.

fan. It is temperature-controlled and could en the key is removed from the ignition!

nvironment could be removed when the engine is washed.

leaned in an oil separator. For this reason,

rried out only by a qualified workshop or a petrol

altea_EN Seite 215 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Underbody sealant

The vehicle underbody is coated to protect it from chemical

and mechanical damage.

The protective coating can be damaged when driving. We recommend you to

check the protective coating under the body and on the running gear, and

reinstated if necessary, before and after the winter season.

We recommend you to go to your Authorised Service Centre to carry out repair

work and additional anti-corrosion work.

WARNING

Do not apply underseal or anti-corrosion coatings to the exhaust pipes, catalytic converter or the heat shields on the exhaust system. The heat of the exhaust system or the engine could cause them to ignite! Fire hazard.

Cleaning the engine compartment

Take special care when cleaning the engine compartment.

Anti-corrosion treatment

The engine compartment and the surface of the power unit are given anti-

corrosion treatment at the factory.

Good corrosion protection is particularly important in winter when the car is

frequently driven on salted roads. To prevent the salt corroding the vehicle,

the entire engine compartment should be thoroughly cleaned before and

after winter.

Your Authorised Service Centre has got the necessary equipment to provide

the correct cleaning and preserving products. For this reason, we recommend

having this work performed by them.

The anti-corrosion protection

is cleaned with grease remov

On commissioning this work,

components in the engine co

WARNING

When working in the eng warnings page 226.

Before opening the bonn brake firmly and always rem

Allow the engine to cool

Do not clean the vehicle your hands and arms. You m Failure to comply could resu

Moisture, ice and salt on of accident. Directly after wa

Never touch the radiator start automatically, even wh

For the sake of the e Fuel, grease and oil deposits

The polluted water must be c

engine washing should be ca

station.

Cleaning and caring for your vehicle216

bric trim cleaning

m on the doors, headlining etc. can be cleaned

r or with dry foam and a soft brush.

climate controls

ate controls, use a soft damp cloth. For more

olution may be used.

ollen cloth with water and wipe over the

be removed using a mild soap solution

ablespoons diluted in one litre of water)

k through the leather or soak into the

ft, dry cloth.

reated twice a year with a special leather-

in your Authorised Service Centre.

altea_EN Seite 216 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Vehicle interior maintenance

Plastic parts and dash panel cleaning

Use a clean, damp cloth to clean plastic parts and the dash

panel.

If this does not provide satisfactory results, use a special

solvent-free plastic cleaning product.

WARNING

Never clean the dash panel and the airbag module surface with cleansers containing solvents. Solvents cause the surface to become porous. If the airbag triggered, disintegrating plastic parts could cause substantial inju- ries.

Caution Cleaning products which contain solvents will damage the material.

Wooden trim cleaning*

Clean the wooden trim with a water-moistened clean cloth.

If this does not provide satisfactory results, use a gentle soap

solution.

Caution Cleaning products which contain solvents will damage the material.

Cloth seat covers and fa

Cloth seat covers and fabric tri

with a special interior cleanse

Cleaning the radio and

To clean the radio and/or clim

resistant dirt, a neutral soap s

Leather cleaning*

Normal cleaning

Moisten a cotton or wo

leather surfaces.

Cleaning stubborn stains

More stubborn dirt can

(pure liquid soap; two t

and a cloth.

Do not let the water soa

seams.

Then wipe off with a so

Leather maintenance

The leather should be t

care product, available

Cleaning and caring for your vehicle 217

Safety Fir Technical Data

lt up until it is dry.

ts, it will not retract correctly into the automatic

ning agents on the seat belts, as this can ebbing. Ensure that belts do not come into .

ition at regular intervals. If you notice that the ctor mechanism or buckle of any of the belts is eplaced by a specialist workshop.

a damaged seat belt yourself. The seat belts ified in any way.

ts to dry completely before rolling them up.

could become damaged.

altea_EN Seite 217 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Apply these products very sparingly.

Then wipe off with a soft, dry cloth.

SEAT does everything possible to preserve the genuine qualities of this

natural product. Due to the natural properties of the specially selected hides

employed, the finished leather has a certain sensitivity to grease and dirt, etc.

so a degree of care is required in everyday use and when looking after the

leather.

Dust and grit in the pores and seams can scratch and damage the surface. If

the vehicle is under solar radiation for long periods, the leather should be

protected to prevent it from fading. However, slight colour variations in high-

quality natural leather are normal.

Caution Do not use solvents, wax polish, shoe cream, spot removers or similar

products on leather.

To avoid damage, stubborn stains should be removed by a qualified

workshop.

Seat belts cleaning

A dirty belt may not work properly.

Check all seat belts regularly and keep them clean.

Seat belts cleaning

Pull the dirty seat belt right out and unroll it.

Clean the dirty seat belts with a gentle soap solution.

Allow it to dry.

Do not roll the seat be

If large stains form on the bel

belt retractor.

WARNING

Do not use chemical clea impair the strength of the w contact with corrosive fluids

Check all seat belts cond belt webbing, fittings, retra damaged, the belt must be r

Do not attempt to repair must not be removed or mod

Caution After cleaning, allow seat bel

Otherwise, the belt retractors

Accessories, replacement of parts and modifications218

r the CE mark (European Union manufacturer

phone holders or drink holders, should never thin the working range, of the airbags. Other-

ry if the airbag is triggered in an accident.

tions

ys be carried out according to our

the electronic components or software in the

ns. Due to the way the electronic components

s, other indirect systems may be affected by the

ir safety, lead to excessive wear of compo-

r vehicle registration documents.

es cannot be held liable for any damage

or work incorrectly performed.

d that all work should be performed by an

ng genuine SEAT approved parts and acces-

altea_EN Seite 218 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Accessories, replacement of parts and modifications

Accessories and spare parts

Always consult an Authorised Service Centre before

purchasing accessories and parts.

Your vehicle is designed to offer a high standard of active and passive safety.

Before purchasing accessories and parts, and before making technical

changes to your car, we recommend you consult your Authorised Service

Centre.

SEAT dealerships will be happy to provide you with the latest information

about the use, legal requirements and recommendations from the manufac-

turer regarding accessories and parts.

We recommend you use only SEAT Approved Accessories and SEAT Approved Spare Parts. In this way, SEAT can guarantee that the product in

question is suitable, reliable and safe. SEAT Authorised Service Centres have

the necessary experience and facilities to ensure that parts are correctly and

professionally installed.

Despite continuous observation of the market, SEAT is not able to assess the

reliability, safety and suitability of those parts not approved by SEAT. For this

reason, SEAT cannot assume responsibility for any non-genuine parts used,

even if these parts have been approved by an official testing agency or are

covered by an official approval certificate.

Any equipment subsequently installed which has a direct effect on the

vehicle and/or the way it is driven (e.g. cruise control system or electronically-

controlled suspension) must be approved by SEAT and bear the e mark (the

European Union's authorisation symbol).

If any additional electrical components are fitted so that they do not serve to

control the vehicle itself (for instance a refrigerator box, laptop or ventilator

fan, etc.), then they must bea

conformity declaration).

WARNING

Accessories, for example tele be fitted on the covers, or wi wise, there is a danger of inju

Technical modifica

Modifications must alwa

specifications.

Unauthorised modifications to

vehicle may cause malfunctio

are linked together in network

faults. This can seriously impa

nents, and also invalidate you

SEAT Authorised Service Centr

caused by modifications and/

For this reason, we recommen

Authorised Service Centre usi

sories.

Accessories, replacement of parts and modifications 219

Safety Fir Technical Data

arily on driving. If you are distracted while cident.

ne mountings to the surfaces covering the ge of the airbags. There is a high risk of injury

instructions of your mobile telephone / two-way

altea_EN Seite 219 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

WARNING

Incorrectly performed modifications or other kind of work on your vehicle can lead to malfunctions and cause accidents.

Roof aerial*

The vehicle may be fitted with a foldable* and anti-theft* aerial that may be

positioned parallel to the roof.

To fold down

Unscrew the rod, position parallel to the roof and tighten once again.

To return to working position

Continue in the reverse order to the previous instruction.

Caution If an automatic car wash tunnel is used, before entering the tunnel, put the

aerial down parallel to the roof and do not tighten to avoid damage.

Mobile telephones and radiotelephones

First consult your Authorised Service Centre if you wish to use a mobile tele-

phone or a two-way radio with a transmitting power output in excess of

10 watts. Here you will receive information concerning the technical possibil-

ities for retrofitting this equipment.

Mobile telephones and two-way radios should be only fitted by a qualified

workshop, for example an Authorised Service Centre.

WARNING

Always concentrate prim driving you could have an ac

Never attach the telepho airbag units or within the ran if the airbag is triggered.

Note Please observe the operating

radio.

Checking and refilling levels220

, without unscrewing the cap, clockwise

se the flap until it clicks into place. The

h an anti-loss attachment

he vehicle on the right.

operated correctly, it will switch itself off as

er attempt to fill beyond this point, as this will

el may leak out if ambient conditions are warm.

vehicle is given on a sticker on the inside of the

otes on fuel can be found.

e and can cause serious burns and other inju-

y naked flame when filling the fuel tank of the nister, with fuel. This is an explosion hazard.

nts for the use of spare fuel canisters.

o not recommend carrying a spare fuel e canister could be damaged in an accident

ances, you have to carry a spare fuel canister, points:

l canister inside the vehicle or on it. An elec- ld up during filling, causing the fuel fumes to explosive. Always place the canister on the

altea_EN Seite 220 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Checking and refilling levels

Refuelling

The tank flap is released manually. The tank holds approxi-

mately 55 litres.

Unscrewing the tank cap

Lift the lid.

Grip the cap and then insert the key into the lock and rotate 180

to the left.

Unscrew the cap, turning it anti-clockwise.

Closing the tank cap

Screw the tank cap to the right, until the point of feeling a click.

Turn the key in the lock

through 180.

Remove the key and clo

tank cap is secured wit

The tank flap is at the rear of t

If the automatic filler nozzle is

soon as the tank is full. Nev

fill the expansion chamber. Fu

The correct fuel grade for your

fuel tank flap. Where further n

WARNING

Fuel is highly inflammabl ries.

Never smoke or use an vehicle, or a spare fuel ca

Follow legal requireme

For safety reasons we d canister in the vehicle. Th and leak.

If, in exceptional circumst please observe the following

Never fill the spare fue trostatic charge could bui ignite. This may be fatally ground to fill it.

Fig. 157 Tank flap open

Checking and refilling levels 221

Safety Fir Technical Data

oved from the paintwork immediately.

etely dry. An irregular fuel supply could cause

t fuel could enter the catalytic converter and

nvironment fter the automatic filler nozzle has switched off;

erflow if it becomes warm.

g. 158 Fuel tank open with LPG filler neck and adapter.

altea_EN Seite 221 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Insert the fuel nozzle into the mouth of the canister as far as possible.

If the spare fuel canister is made of metal, the filling nozzle must be in contact with the canister during filling. This helps prevent an electro- static charge building up.

Never spill fuel in the vehicle or in the luggage compartment. Fuel vapours are explosive. Danger of death.

Caution Fuel spills should be rem

Never run the tank compl

misfiring. As a result, unburn

cause damage.

For the sake of the e Do not try to put in more fuel a

this may cause the fuel to ov

LPG system*

Refuelling with LPG

The LPG filler neck is behind the fuel cap, next to the petrol filler neck.

WARNING (continued)

Fi

Checking and refilling levels222

spare wheel well has a capacity of 39 litres. If

very low, it may not be possible to completely

LPG pump, and the methods of use may vary.

tor fill the tank when refuelling for the first time

PG

ses may be heard. These noises are insignifi-

in the correct way could result in a fire, cause .

and inflammable substance. It may cause .

ore refuelling.

e phones and any other radiophony appli- ves may produce sparks and cause a fire.

cle while refuelling. If it is absolutely neces- se the door and touch a metal surface before in. This will prevent the generation of static ires while refuelling.

ay leak out after refuelling. If LPG comes into isk of freezing.

keep bare flames away from the tank during ay lead to an explosion.

altea_EN Seite 222 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Refuelling with LPG

Before refuelling, stop the engine and switch off the ignition.

Open the tank flap.

Before refuelling, please read the instructions on the pump.

Unscrew the cap of the gas filler neck .

Screw the required adapter on the gas filler neck .

Refuel as indicated in the instructions on the pump.

Unscrew the adapter .

Screw on the cap of the gas filler neck .

Close the tank flap.

When the hose is removed from the tank, a small amount of LPG may spill out

.

The LPG tank fig. 159 in the

the outside temperatures are

fill the LPG tank.

Pump attachments

There are a variety of types of

Therefore, let the pump opera

or fill from another pump.

Noises when refuelling with L

When refuelling with LPG, noi

cant.

WARNING

Failure to refuel or handle LPG an explosion or lead to injury

LPG is a highly explosive severe burns and other injury

Switch off the engine bef

Always disconnect mobil ances, as electromagnetic wa

Do not remain in the vehi sary to enter the vehicle, clo touching the attachment aga electricity and any possible f

Small quantities of LPG m contact with skin, there is a r

Do not smoke and always refuelling. Failure to do so m

Fig. 159 LPG tank in spare wheel well

A1

A2 A1

A2

A1

Checking and refilling levels 223

Safety Fir Technical Data

of adapter in Europe are the ACME adapter ,

, the bayonet adapter and the EURO adapter

end you carry all four adapters in your vehicle,

han one type of filling system. The introduction

le) throughout Europe is being studied.

fuel and is a blend of propane and butane.

the strict regulations concerning exhaust gas

r fossil fuels, LPG is characterised by its reduced

are regulated for all Europe in DIN EN 589 and

hout Europe.

n winter gas and summer gas. Winter gas has a

gas. As a result, the driving range of winter gas

ed consumption) than that of summer gas.

constantly increasing.

ay be found on Internet.

formed on this vehicle while running with LPG

of safety.

A1

A3

altea_EN Seite 223 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Adapter for the liquid petroleum gas (LPG) filler neck

An adapter is required due to the existence of a range of

pumps with different nozzles.

Fig. 160 General table of LPG filler neck adapters.

ACME adapter (adapter for Europe)

Dish Coupling Adapter (adapter for Italy)

Bayonet adapter

EURO adapter (adapter for Spain)

The supply includes the adapter for the country in question, the ACME , the

Dish Coupling , the bayonet or the EURO adapter .

The filler systems and corresponding adapters vary according to country. As

petrol stations abroad do not always have the necessary adapters for your

LPG system, we recommend you purchase the appropriate adapter before

travelling abroad. Check that the adapters are suited to your filling system.

Note The four most common types

the Dish Coupling adapter

. On the whole, we recomm

as some countries use more t

of a single system (Euronozz

LPG fuel

LPG is an alternative vehicle

The success of LPG is due to

emissions. Compared to othe

emissions.

LPG quality and consumption

Quality requirements for LPG

permit the use of LPG throug

A difference is drawn betwee

higher proportion of propane

may be lower (due to increas

LPG supplier network

The number of LPG pumps is

Lists of existing LPG pumps m

LPG safety

A series of collision tests per

have confirmed its high level

A1

A2

A3

A4

A1

A2 A3 A4

A2

A4

Checking and refilling levels224

ypes are listed on a sticker inside the

onding to the standard DIN EN 228, may be

c converters (EN = European Standard).

y the octane rating, e.g: 91, 95, 98 RON (RON

r, unit for determining the knock resistance of

ith a higher octane number than the one recom-

ever, this has no advantage in terms of fuel

er.

r your vehicle is specified in your engine tech-

ection

may be mixed with small quantities of ethanol.

hanol fuels available at commercial establish-

5, which contain a high percentage of ethanol,

damage the fuel system.

fuel would permanently impair the efficiency

ll throttle can damage the engine when using

wer than the correct grade for the engine.

vironment l would seriously impair the efficiency of the

altea_EN Seite 224 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

The safety of the LPG system guarantees operation without risk. The following

safety measures have been adopted:

The LPG tank has a solenoid valve which closes automatically when the

engine is switched off (ignition off) or when running on petrol.

A solenoid type main valve disconnects the supply of gas to the engine

compartment when the engine is switched off or running on petrol.

A safety valve in the LPG tank with pipes to the outside prevents the gas

from entering the vehicle compartment.

All anchorage points and materials have been designed to ensure the

maximum possible levels of safety.

The condition of the LPG system should be checked regularly to guarantee

safe driving conditions . These checks are included in the Maintenance

Programme.

WARNING

If there is a smell of gas or a suspected leak, stop the vehicle immedi- ately and switch off the ignition. Open the doors to ventilate the vehicle. Do not carry on driving! Take the vehicle to a qualified workshop and have the fault repaired.

Immediately extinguish any cigarettes and remove from the vehicle any objects which might produce a spark or cause a fire, and switch off imme- diately if gas is smelt or a leak is detected.

LGP tanks are subject to pressure and must be checked regularly. The owner of the vehicle must check that these services are performed correctly.

When parking the vehicle in a closed area (for example in a garage), make sure that there is adequate ventilation, either natural or mechanical, to neutralise the LPG in the event of a leak.

Petrol

Petrol types

The recommended fuel t

fuel tank flap.

Only unleaded petrol, corresp used for vehicles with catalyti

Fuel types are differentiated b

= Regulation Octane Numbe

petrol). You may use petrol w

mended for your engine. How

consumption and engine pow

The appropriate type of fuel fo

nical table. Technical Data S

Caution Petrol that follows EN 228

However, the so-called bioet

ments with reference E50 or E8

may not be used, as they will

Even one tankful of leaded

of the catalytic converter.

High engine speed and fu

petrol with an octane rating lo

For the sake of the en Just one full tank of leaded fue

catalytic converter.

Checking and refilling levels 225

Safety Fir Technical Data

re can also be consulted to know if the vehicle

sel use.

l (biodiesel)

icle using biodiesel maybe somewhat reduced.

hicle using biodiesel may be slightly higher.

e cold down to approx. -10C.

0C, we recommend using winter diesel fuel.

o be refuelled with up to a maximum of 7%

nce with standard DIN 51628.

fuel system in vehicles which are not suitably

esel in your vehicle, please use only RME fuel

liant.

oes not meet the required standard, the fuel

peratures and a fuel biodiesel percentage of

in gas emission may occur during operation of

clogged when fuel is changed to biodiesel. For

ou that, when having run 300 or 400 km after a

ange must also be done. Also note the instruc-

aintenance plan.

parked for more than about two weeks, we

nk with biodiesel and driving about 50 km in

injection system.

altea_EN Seite 225 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Petrol additives

Petrol additives improve the quality of the petrol.

The quality of the petrol influences running behaviour, performance and

service life of the engine. For this reason, you should use good quality petrol

containing additives. These additives will help to prevent corrosion, keep the

fuel system clean and prevent deposits from building up in the engine.

If good quality petrol with additives is not available or engine problems occur,

the required additives must be added during refuelling.

Diesel

Diesel*

Diesel fuel must correspond to DIN EN 590 (EN = European standard). It

must have a cetane number (CN) of at least 51. The cetane number indicates

the ignition quality of the diesel fuel.

Notes on filling with fuel page 220.

Biodiesel*

The biodiesel fuel must comply with the DIN EN 14.214 (FAME) Standard.

Biodiesel is a methyl ester obtained from rapeseed oil.

DIN is the German abbreviation for Deutsches Institut fr Normung e.V.,

the German standards institute.

EN means European Norm.

FAME is the English abbreviation for Fatty Acid Methyl Ester.

Your Authorised Service Cent

has been prepared for biodie

Things to note about RME fue

The performance of a veh

Fuel consumption of a ve

RME fuel is resistant to th

At temperatures below -1

Your vehicle is designed t

blended biodiesel in accorda

Caution RME fuel can damage the

adjusted.

If you decide to use biodi

which is DIN EN 14,214 comp

If you use biodiesel that d

filter could become clogged.

Note In case of low exterior tem

higher than 50%, an increase

the independent heating.

The fuel filter may become

this reason, we recommend y

fuel change, the fuel filter ch

tions in the Inspection and M

If the vehicle is to remain

recommend filling the fuel ta

order to avoid damage to the

Checking and refilling levels226

gine compartment

orking in the engine compartment

the engine compartment or on the

out cautiously.

n the engine or in the engine compart-

nd remove the key from the ignition.

eutral or the selector lever to position P.

ool down.

the vehicle.

ge 228.

the engine compartment unless you know

bs and have the correct tools! Have the work

shop if you are uncertain.

bles, e.g. coolant, engine oil, spark plugs and

y developed. SEAT provides a constant flow of

Service Centres concerning modifications. For

u to have service fluids and consumables

vice Centre. Please observe the relevant

engine compartment of any motor vehicle is a

altea_EN Seite 226 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Winter driving

Diesel can thicken in winter.

Winter-grade diesel

When using summer-grade diesel fuel, difficulties may be experienced at

sub-zero temperatures because the fuel thickens due to wax separation.

Therefore, winter-grade diesel fuel is available in some countries during

the cold months. It can be used at temperatures as low as -22C.

In countries with different climatic conditions the diesel fuel generally sold

has different temperature characteristics. Check with an Authorised Service

Centre or filling stations in the country concerned regarding the type of diesel

fuels available.

Filter pre-heater

Your vehicle is fitted with a fuel filter pre-heater, making it well equipped for

operation in winter. This ensures that the fuel system remains operational to

approx. -24C, provided you use winter-grade diesel which is safe to -15C.

However, if the fuel has waxed to such an extent that the engine will not start

at temperatures of under -24C, simply place the vehicle in a warm place for

a while.

Caution Do not mix fuel additives (thinners, or similar additives) with diesel fuel.

Working in the en

Safety instructions on w

Any work carried out in

engine must be carried

Before starting any work o

ment:

1. Switch off the engine a

2. Apply the handbrake.

3. Move the gear stick to n

4. Wait for the engine to c

5. Keep children away from

6. Raise the bonnet pa

You should not do any work in

exactly how to carry out the jo

carried out by a qualified work

All service fluids and consuma

batteries, are being constantl

information to the Authorised

this reason, we recommend yo

replaced by an Authorised Ser

instructions page 218. The

hazardous area .

Checking and refilling levels 227

Safety Fir Technical Data

formed when the engine is started or with the dditional, potentially fatal, safety risk from the rive belts, alternator, radiator fan, etc., and

on system. You should also observe the

ical wiring of the ignition system.

loose clothing and long hair do not get e parts. Danger of death. Before starting any

ie back and cover hair, and wear tight-fitting

about pressing the accelerator if a gear is omatic or manual gearbox. The vehicle could rake is applied. Danger of death.

out on the fuel system or on electrical compo- following safety notes in addition to the above

e battery. The vehicle must be unlocked when he alarm will be triggered.

d flames.

inguisher on hand.

service fluids, make absolutely certain that you

eservoirs. Failure to observe this point will result

ngine damage!

altea_EN Seite 227 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

WARNING

All work on the engine or in the engine compartment, e.g. checking and refilling fluids, involves the danger of injury and scalding as well as the risk of accident or fire.

Never open the bonnet if you see steam, smoke or coolant escaping from the engine compartment. Otherwise, there is a risk of sustaining burns. Wait until no more steam or coolant is emitted, then allow the engine to cool before carefully opening the bonnet.

Switch off the engine and remove the key from the ignition.

Apply the handbrake and move the gear stick to neutral or selector lever to position P.

Keep children away from the vehicle.

Never touch hot engine parts. There is a risk of burns.

Never spill liquids on a hot engine or on a hot exhaust gas system. This is a fire hazard.

Avoid causing short-circuits in the electrical system, particularly at the points where the jump leads are attached page 276. The battery could explode.

Never touch the radiator fan. It is temperature controlled and could start automatically, even when the engine has been switched off and the key removed from the ignition!

Do not unscrew the cap on the expansion tank when the engine is hot. If the coolant is hot, the cooling system will be pressurised!

Protect face, hands and arms by covering the cap with a large, thick cloth to protect against escaping coolant and steam.

Always make sure you have not left any objects, such as cleaning cloths and tools, in the engine compartment.

If you have to work underneath the vehicle, you must use suitable stands additionally to support the vehicle, there is a risk of accident!. A hydraulic jack is insufficient for securing the vehicle and there is a risk of injury.

If any work has to be per engine running, there is an a rotating parts, such as the d from the high-voltage igniti following points:

Never touch the electr

Ensure that jewellery, trapped in rotating engin work remove jewellery, t clothes.

Always think carefully engaged in either an aut move, even if the handb

If work has to be carried nents, you must observe the warnings:

Always disconnect th this is done, otherwise t

Do not smoke.

Never work near nake

Always have a fire ext

Caution When changing or topping up

fill the fluids into the correct r

in serious malfunctions and e

WARNING (continued)

Checking and refilling levels228

ensure that the windscreen wipers are in

pull the lever under the dashboard

ion indicated (arrow). The bonnet will be

tion .

e release lever (arrow) and open the

and secure it in fixture designed for this

you see steam, smoke or coolant escaping t.

Fig. 162 Arrester hook for bonnet.

altea_EN Seite 228 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

For the sake of the environment Service fluids leaks are harmful to the environment. For this reason you

should make regular checks on the ground underneath your vehicle. If you

find spots of oil or other fluids, have your vehicle inspected in a qualified

workshop.

Opening the bonnet

The bonnet is released from inside the vehicle.

Before opening the bonnet

rest position.

To release the bonnet,

fig. 161 in the direct

released by a spring ac

Lift the bonnet using th

bonnet.

Release the bonnet stay

in the bonnet.

WARNING

Hot coolant can scald!

Never open the bonnet if from the engine compartmen

Fig. 161 Detail of foot- well area on driver's side: lever for unlocking the bonnet.

Checking and refilling levels 229

Safety Fir Technical Data

s

st conform with exact specifications.

cial, high quality, multi grade oil that can be

r except for those regions affected by extreme

is necessary for the correct operation and long

en it becomes necessary to replenish or change

complies to the VW standards.

conforming to the VW standards then oil

I standards with an appropriate viscosity at

uld be used instead. The use of this type of oil

s on the performance of the engine for example,

consumption and a higher emission level.

fferent oils may be mixed as long as they all

.

ards) set out in the following page should

e service oil; the container will display together

trol and diesel engines, the oil can be used for

altea_EN Seite 229 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Wait until no more steam, smoke or coolant is emitted from the bonnet, then carefully open the bonnet.

When working in the engine compartment, always observe the safety warnings page 226.

Closing the bonnet

Raise the bonnet slightly.

Release the bonnet stay and replace it in its support.

At a height of about 30 cm let it fall so it is locked.

If the bonnet does not close, do not press downwards. Open it once more and

let it fall as before.

WARNING

If the bonnet is not closed properly, it could open while you are driving and completely obscure your view of the road. Risk of accident.

After closing the bonnet, always check that it is properly secured. The bonnet must be flush with the surrounding body panels.

If you notice that the bonnet latch is not secured when the vehicle is moving, stop the vehicle immediately and close the bonnet properly. Risk of accident.

Engine oil

Engine oil specification

The engine oil used mu

Specifications

The engine comes with a spe

used in all seasons of the yea

cold.

As the use of good quality oil

service life of the engine, wh

the oil, always use an oil that

If it is not possible to find oil

conforming to the ACEA or AP

atmospheric temperature sho

may have some repercussion

long starting time, increased

If a top up is required then di

conform to the VW standards

The specifications (VW stand

appear on the container of th

the different standards for pe

both types of engines.

WARNING (continued)

Checking and refilling levels230

climate that is constantly very cold or very

mixed with the engine oil. The deterioration

ot covered by the warranty.

end finding an engine oil that conforms to the

ns and keeping it in the vehicle. This way, the

e available for a top-up if needed.

level

ndicates the level of the oil.

Fig. 164 Engine oil dipstick.

altea_EN Seite 230 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Oil properties

Viscosity

The viscosity class of the oil is selected according to the diagram.

When the ambient temperature falls outside the limits of the scale for a short

period, an oil change is not required.

Mono-grade oil

Single grade oils are generally not suitable for all year round use, due to

ranges of viscosity22).

These oils are only useful in a

warm.

Engine oil additives

No type of additive should be

caused by these additives is n

Note Before a long trip, we recomm

corresponding VW specificatio

correct engine oil will always b

Checking the engine oil

The engine oil dipstick i

Engine type Specification

Petrol VW 501 01/ VW 502 00/ VW 504 00

Diesel VW 505 01/ VW 507 00/ VW 506 01

Diesel Engines with Particulate filter

(DPF)a)

a) Only use recommended oils, otherwise you may damage the engine.

VW 507 00

Fig. 163 Types of oil according to temperature

22) Viscosity: oil density

Checking and refilling levels 231

Safety Fir Technical Data

ea do not start the engine. This could result

catalytic converter. Contact an Authorised

mall quantities of oil.

t, read and observe the warnings in

rking in the engine compartment on

iller opening fig. 165.

ounts, using the correct oil.

AA

Fig. 165 In the engine compartment: Engine oil filler cap

altea_EN Seite 231 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Checking oil level

Park the vehicle in a horizontal position.

Briefly run the engine at idle speed until the service temperature

is reached then stop.

Wait two minutes.

Pull out the dipstick. Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth and

insert it again, pushing it in as far as it will go.

Then pull it out once more and check the oil level page 230,

fig. 164. Top up with engine oil if necessary.

Oil level in area

Do not add oil.

Oil level in area

Oil can be topped up. The indicated oil level should be after zone .

Oil level in area

Oil must be topped up. The indicated oil level should be after in zone .

Depending on how you drive and the conditions in which the car is used, oil

consumption can be up to 0.5 l/1,000 km. Oil consumption is likely to be

higher for the first 5,000 km. For this reason the engine oil level must be

checked at regular intervals, preferably when filling the tank and before a

journey.

WARNING

Any work carried out in the engine compartment or on the engine must be carried out cautiously.

When working in the engine compartment, always observe the safety warnings page 226.

Caution If the oil level is above the ar

in damage to the engine and

Service Centre.

Topping up engine oil

Top up gradually with s

Before opening the bonne

Safety instructions on wo

page 226.

Unscrew cap from oil f

Top-up oil in small am

AA

AB

AA

AC

AA

Checking and refilling levels232

hanged at the intervals given in the

the engine oil changed by an Authorised

own in the Maintenance Programme.

f you have the specialist knowledge required!

t, read and observe the warnings ions on working in the engine compartment.

l down. Hot oil may cause burn injuries.

oid injuries caused by splashes of oil.

ain plug with your fingers, keep your arm hori- m running down your arm.

ly if it comes into contact with engine oil.

sed oil must be stored in a safe place out of s disposed of.

ith engine oil. This could result in engine

by the use of such additives would not be

ty.

vironment roblems, the necessary special tools and

, we recommend that you have the engine oil

orised Service Centre.

altea_EN Seite 232 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

To avoid over-filling with engine oil, you should top-up using

small quantities, wait a while and check the oil level before

adding any more oil.

As soon as the oil level is in area , carefully close the cap.

The position of the oil filler opening is shown in the corresponding engine

compartment diagram page 285.

Engine oil specification page 229.

WARNING

Oil is highly inflammable! Ensure that no oil comes into contact with hot engine components when topping up.

Caution If the oil level is above the area do not start the engine. This could result

in damage to the engine and catalytic converter. Contact a qualified work-

shop.

For the sake of the environment The oil level must never be above area . Otherwise oil can be drawn in

through the crankcase breather and escape into the atmosphere via the

exhaust system.

Changing engine oil

The engine oil must be c

service schedule.

We recommend that you have

Service Centre.

The oil change intervals are sh

WARNING

Only change the oil yourself i

Before opening the bonne page 226, Safety instruct

Wait for the engine to coo

Wear eye protection to av

When removing the oil dr zontal to help prevent oil fro

Wash your skin thorough

Engine oil is poisonous! U the reach of children until it i

Caution No additives should be used w

damage. Any damage caused

covered by the factory warran

For the sake of the en Because of the disposal p

specialist knowledge required

and filter changed by an Auth

AB

AA

AA

Checking and refilling levels 233

Safety Fir Technical Data

+ must be added in sufficient quantities to n at the coldest ambient temperatures that ly cold ambient temperatures, the coolant hicle to breakdown. As the heater would also ere is a risk of suffering exposure!

considerably inferior corrosion protection. The

ling system can lead to a loss of coolant,

e engine.

+ (purple) can be mixed with the additive G12

(red colour) with G11.

altea_EN Seite 233 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Never pour oil down drains or into the ground.

Use a suitable container when draining the used oil. It has to be large

enough to hold all the engine oil

Coolant

Coolant specifications

Coolant is a mixture of water and at least 40% coolant addi-

tive.

The cooling system must be filled with a mixture of water and at least 40 % of

our coolant additive G12+ or an additive with the specification TT-VW 774 F (it

is dyed purple). This mixture gives the necessary frost protection down to -

25C and protects the alloy parts of the cooling system against corrosion. It

also prevents scaling and raises the boiling point of the coolant.

The concentration of coolant must always be at least 40% - even if frost

protection is not required.

If greater frost protection is required in very cold climates, the proportion of

the antifreeze additive G12+ can be increased. However, the percentage of

coolant additives should not exceed 60%, as this would reduce the frost

protection. It would also reduce the cooling effect. A mixture with 60%

coolant additive will give frost protection to approx. -40C.

WARNING

The coolant additive is toxic. There is a toxic risk. Always keep the coolant additive in the original container which should be stored out of the reach of children. The same applies to coolant which you have drained off.

The coolant additive G12 provide anti-freeze protectio can be expected. At extreme could freeze, causing the ve not work in this situation, th

Caution Other additives may give

resulting corrosion in the coo

causing serious damage to th

The coolant additive G12

(red) or G11. Never mix G12

WARNING (continued)

Checking and refilling levels234

th the MIN mark, top up with coolant.

AX mark.

sion tank

tightly.

ansion reservoir is shown in the corresponding

page 285.

ets the required specifications page 233.

additive if coolant additive G12+ is not avail-

er and bring the coolant concentration back up

possible by putting in the specified additive

nt.

rk. Otherwise the excess coolant will be forced

n the engine is hot.

ed purple) may be mixed with G12 (dyed red)

ngine compartment or on the engine must be

ine compartment, always observe the safety

altea_EN Seite 234 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Checking the coolant level and topping up

The correct coolant level is important for fault-free func-

tioning of the engine cooling system.

Before opening the bonnet, read and observe the warnings in

Safety instructions on working in the engine compartment on

page 226.

Opening the coolant expansion tank

Switch off the engine and allow it to cool.

To prevent scalding, cover the cap on the expansion tank with a

thick cloth and carefully unscrew the cap .

Checking coolant level

Look into the open coolant expansion tank and read off the

coolant level.

If the level is undernea

Topping up coolant

Only use new coolant.

Do not fill above the M

Closing the coolant expan

Screw the cap on again

The position of the coolant exp

engine compartment diagram

Make sure that the coolant me

Do not use a different type of

able. In this case use only wat

to the correct level as soon as

page 233.

Always top up with new coola

Do not fill above the MAX ma

out of the cooling system whe

The coolant additive G12+ (dy

and also with G 11.

WARNING

Any work carried out in the e carried out cautiously.

When working in the eng warnings page 226.

Fig. 166 In the engine compartment: Coolant expansion tank cap

Checking and refilling levels 235

Safety Fir Technical Data

windscreen wiper blades

d

the windscreen should always be

.

he headlight washing system are supplied with

sher fluid container in the engine compartment.

e right-hand side of the engine compartment.

lean the windscreen and headlights. We recom-

product to the windscreen washer fluid.

g products exist on the market with high deter-

es, these may be added all-year-round. Please

s on the packaging.

Fig. 167 In the engine compartment: Cap of windscreen washer fluid reservoir.

altea_EN Seite 235 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

When the engine is warm or hot, the cooling system is pressurised! Do not unscrew the cap on the expansion tank when the engine is hot. This is a burn injury risk.

Caution When mixed with other additives the colour of G12 will change to brown.

If this occurs you should have the coolant changed immediately. Failure to do

so will result in engine damage!

If a lot of coolant has been lost, wait for the engine to cool down before

putting in cold coolant. This avoids damaging the engine. Large coolant

losses are an indication of leaks in the cooling system. See a specialised

workshop immediately and have the cooling system checked. Otherwise,

there is a risk of engine damage.

Washer fluid and

Topping up washer flui

The water for cleaning

mixed with washer fluid

The windscreen washer and t

fluid from the windscreen wa

The reservoir is located on th

Plain water is not enough to c

mend that you always add a

Approved windscreen cleanin

gent and anti-freeze properti

follow the dilution instruction

WARNING (continued)

Checking and refilling levels236

iper blades

blades are in perfect condition, you

roved visibility. Damaged wiper

ed immediately.

Fig. 168 Windscreen wipers in the service posi- tion

Fig. 169 Changing the front wiper blades

altea_EN Seite 236 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

WARNING

Any work carried out in the engine compartment or on the engine must be carried out cautiously.

When working in the engine compartment, always observe the safety warnings page 226.

Caution Never put radiator anti-freeze or other additives into the windscreen

washer fluid.

Always use approved windscreen cleansing products diluted as per

instructions. If you use other washer fluids or soap solutions, the tiny holes

in the fan-shaped nozzles could become blocked.

Changing windscreen w

If the windscreen wiper

will benefit from an imp

blades should be replac

Checking and refilling levels 237

Safety Fir Technical Data

per blades and all windows regularly.

be changed once or twice a year.

reen wipers could scratch the windscreen.

h remover, paint thinner or similar products to

d damage the windscreen wiper blades.

n wiper or windscreen wiper arm manually. This

n wipers forward unless they are in the service

et could be damaged.

ved to the service position only when the

altea_EN Seite 237 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

To change the blades it is necessary to change the rest position of

the wipers to the service position.

Service position (For changing wiper blades)

Ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen.

Turn ignition on and off and then (before approx. 8 seconds have

elapsed), move the windscreen wiper lever to the intermittent

wipe position. The windscreen wipers will move to the service

position.

Changing the windscreen wiper blades

Lift the wiper arm away from the windscreen.

Push the side buttons, free the blade and pull in the direction of

the arrow fig. 169.

Fitting the wiper blade

Insert a blade of identical length and design into the wiper arm.

Slide the blade until it clicks into position.

Push the wiper arms back against the windscreen.

If the windscreen wipers smear, they should be replaced if they are damaged,

or cleaned if they are soiled.

If this does not produce the desired results, the setting angle of the wind-

screen wiper arms might be incorrect. They should be checked by a qualified

workshop and corrected if necessary.

WARNING

Do not drive unless you have good visibility through all windows!

Clean the windscreen wi

The wiper blades should

Caution Damaged or dirty windsc

Never use fuel, nail varnis

clean the windows. This coul

Never move the windscree

could cause damage.

Do not pull the windscree

position. Otherwise the bonn

Note The wiper arms can be mo

bonnet is properly closed.

WARNING (continued)

Checking and refilling levels238

from the glass page 238, fig. 170.

in the direction of the arrow and remove

fig. 170.

e top end of the wiper arm.

n in the page 238, fig. 171 and slide

it fits into place.

er blade regularly. Change as required.

s, it should be replaced if damaged, or cleaned

a qualified workshop.

good visibility through all windows!

er blades and all windows regularly.

be changed once or twice a year.

wiper could scratch the rear window.

h remover, paint thinner or similar products to

n wiper by hand. This could cause damage.

altea_EN Seite 238 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Changing the rear wiper blade

A good rear wiper blade is essential for clear rear vision.

Damaged wiper blades should be replaced immediately.

Removing the wiper blade

Lift the wiper arm away

Slide the blade adapter

the blade page 238,

Fitting the wiper blade

With one hand, hold th

Place the blade as show

the adapter along until

Check the condition of the wip

If the windscreen wiper scrape if soiled.

If this is not sufficient, refer to

WARNING

Do not drive unless you have

Clean the windscreen wip

The wiper blades should

Caution A damaged or dirty window

Never use fuel, nail varnis

clean the window.

Never move the windscree

Fig. 170 Remove rear window wiper blade

Fig. 171 Mount rear window wiper blade

Checking and refilling levels 239

Safety Fir Technical Data

n noticeably in a short time, or drops below the

eak in the brake system. A display on the instru-

e brake fluid level is too low page 77.

o check the brake fluid level, read and observe

id

am indicates the brake fluid change

the brake fluid changed by an Authorised

lease read and follow the warnings in

ng in the engine compartment on page 226 in

artment.

. In the course of time, it will absorb water from

ontent in the brake fluid is too high, the brake

so considerably reduces the boiling point of the

brakes may then cause a vapour lock which

ct.

nly brake fluid compliant with the US standard

mend the use of Genuine SEAT brake fluid.

d brake fluid impairs the braking effect.

altea_EN Seite 239 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Brake fluid

Checking the brake fluid level

The brake fluid is checked at the intervals given in the service

schedule.

Read off the fluid level at the transparent brake fluid reservoir. It

should always be between the MIN and MAX marks.

The position of the brake fluid reservoir is shown in the corresponding engine

compartment diagram page 285. The brake fluid reservoir has a black and

yellow cap.

The brake fluid level drops slightly when the vehicle is being used as the

brake pads are automatically adjusted as they wear.

However, if the level goes dow

MIN mark, there may be a l

ment panel will warn you if th

WARNING

Before opening the bonnet t the warnings page 226.

Changing the brake flu

The Maintenance Progr

intervals.

We recommend that you have

Service Centre.

Before opening the bonnet, p

Safety instructions on worki

Working in the engine comp

Brake fluid absorbs moisture

the ambient air. If the water c

system could corrode. This al

brake fluid. Heavy use of the

could impair the braking effe

It is important that you use o

FMVSS 116 DOT 4. We recom

WARNING

Brake fluid is poisonous. Ol

Fig. 172 In the engine compartment: Brake fluid reservoir cover

Checking and refilling levels240

he battery

er of injury and chemical burns as well as the orking on the battery and the electrical

ect your eyes, skin and clothing from acid and

sive and caustic. Wear protective gloves and batteries. This could spill acid through the eyes immediately for several minutes with

al care immediately. Neutralize any acid ing with a soapy solution, and rinse off with llowed by mistake, consult a doctor immedi-

s and smoking are prohibited. When handling ent, avoid causing sparks and electrostatic

rotection

d is very corrosive and caustic. Wear protec-

and eye protection!

ks, naked lights and smoking are prohibited!

plosive mixture of gases is released when the

nder charge.

ren away from acid and batteries!

altea_EN Seite 240 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Before opening the bonnet to check the brake fluid level, read and observe the warnings page 226.

Brake fluid should be stored in the closed original container in a safe place out of reach of children. There is a toxic risk.

Complete the brake fluid change according to the Maintenance Program. Heavy use of the brakes may cause a vapour lock if the brake fluid is left in the system for too long. This would seriously affect the efficiency of the brakes and the safety of the vehicle. This may cause an accident.

Caution Brake fluid could damage the paintwork. Wipe off any brake fluid from the

paintwork immediately.

For the sake of the environment Brake fluid must be drained and disposed of in the proper manner observing

environmental regulations.

Battery

Warnings on handling t

WARNING

Always be aware of the dang risk of accident or fire when w system:

Wear eye protection. Prot particles containing lead.

Battery acid is very corro eye protection. Do not tilt the vents. Rinse battery acid from clear water. Then seek medic splashes on the skin or cloth plenty of water. If acid is swa ately.

Fires, sparks, naked light cables and electrical equipm

WARNING (continued)

Wear eye p

Battery aci

tive gloves

Fires, spar

A highly ex

battery is u

Keep child

Checking and refilling levels 241

Safety Fir Technical Data

ing in cold conditions for a long period, protect

eezes it will be damaged.

te level

ould be checked regularly in high-

t countries and in older batteries.

pen the battery cover at the front in

working in the engine compartment on

arnings on handling the battery on

ay in the "magic eye" on the top of the

in the window, tap the window gently until

shown in the corresponding engine compart-

cated on the top of the battery changes colour,

te and electrolyte level of the battery.

rs:

us.

the battery must be replaced. Contact a

altea_EN Seite 241 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

charge. Never short the battery terminals. High-energy sparks can cause injury.

A highly explosive mixture of gases is released when the battery is under charge. The batteries should be charged in a well-ventilated room only.

Keep children away from acid and batteries.

Before working on the electrical system, you must switch off the engine, the ignition and all consumers. The negative cable on the battery must be disconnected. When a light bulb is changed, you need only switch off the light.

Deactivate the anti-theft alarm by unlocking the vehicle before you disconnect the battery! The alarm will otherwise be triggered.

When disconnecting the battery from the vehicle electrical system, disconnect first the negative cable and then the positive cable.

Switch off all electrical consumers before reconnecting the battery. Reconnect first the positive cable and then the negative cable. Never reverse the polarity of the connections. This could cause an electrical fire.

Never charge a frozen battery, or one which has thawed. This could result in explosions and chemical burns. Always replace a battery which has frozen. A flat battery can freeze at temperatures around 0

Ensure that the vent hose is always connected to the battery.

Never use a defective battery. This may be fatally explosive. Replace a damaged battery immediately.

Caution Never disconnect the battery if the ignition is switched on or if the engine

is running. This could damage the electrical system or electronic compo-

nents.

Do not expose the battery to direct sunlight over a long period of time, as

the intense ultraviolet radiation can damage the battery housing.

If the vehicle is left stand

the battery from frost. If it fr

Checking the electroly

The electrolyte level sh

mileage vehicles, in ho

Open the bonnet and o

Safety instructions on

page 226 in W

page 240.

Check the colour displ

battery.

If there are air bubbles

they disperse.

The position of the battery is

ment diagram page 285.

The magic eye indicator, lo

depending on the charge sta

There are two different colou

Black: correct charge stat

Transparent/clear yellow:

specialist workshop.

WARNING (continued)

Checking and refilling levels242

vironment nces such as sulphuric acid and lead. They

tely and must not be disposed of with ordinary

altea_EN Seite 242 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Charging and changing the vehicle battery

The battery is maintenance-free and is checked during the

inspection service. All work on the vehicle battery requires

specialist knowledge.

If you often drive short distances or if the vehicle is not driven for long

periods, the battery should be checked by a qualified workshop between the

scheduled services.

If the battery has discharged and you have problems starting the vehicle, the

battery might be damaged. If this happens, we recommend you have the

vehicle battery checked by an Authorised Service Centre where it will be re-

charged or replaced.

Charging the battery

The vehicle battery should be charged by a qualified workshop only, as

batteries using special technology have been installed and they must be

charged in a controlled environment.

Replacing a vehicle battery

The battery has been developed to suit the conditions of its location and has

special safety features.

Genuine SEAT batteries fulfil the maintenance, performance and safety spec-

ifications of your vehicle.

WARNING

We recommend you use only maintenance-free or cycle free leak-proof batteries which comply with the standards T 825 06 and VW 7 50 73. This standard applies as of 2001.

Before starting any work on the batteries, you must read and observe the warnings in Warnings on handling the battery on page 240.

For the sake of the en Batteries contain toxic substa

must be disposed of appropria

household waste.

Wheels and tyres 243

Safety Fir Technical Data

ften not readily visible. If you notice unusual

one side, this may indicate that one of the tyres

be checked immediately by an Authorised

attern

indicates the direction of rotation on tyres with

erve the direction of rotation indicated when

tees optimum grip and helps to avoid aqua-

wear.

aximum grip in the first 500 km. Drive particu- f accident.

d tyres. This may cause an accident.

ration or if the vehicle pulls to one side when ediately and check the tyres for damage.

e can be seen on the sticker on the

inflation pressure from the sticker. The

r tyres. For Winter tyres, you must add 0.2

on the sticker.

altea_EN Seite 243 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Wheels and tyres

Wheels

General notes

Avoiding damage

If you have to drive over a kerb or similar obstacle, drive very

slowly and as near as possible at a right angle to the kerb.

Keep grease, oil and fuel off the tyres.

Inspect the tyres regularly for damage (cuts, cracks or blisters,

etc.). Remove any foreign objects embedded in the treads.

Storing tyres

Mark tyres when you remove them to indicate the direction of

rotation. This ensures you will be able to install them correctly

when you replace them.

When removed, the wheels and/or tyres should be stored in a

cool, dry and preferably dark location.

Store tyres in a vertical position if they are not fitted on wheel

rims.

New tyres

New tyres have to be run in page 200.

The tread depth of new tyres may vary, according to the type and make of tyre

and the tread pattern.

Concealed damage

Damage to tyres and rims is o

vibrations or the car pulling to

is damaged. The tyres should

Service Centre.

Tyres with directional tread p

An arrow on the tyre sidewall

directional tread. Always obs

fitting the wheel. This guaran

planing, excessive noise and

WARNING

New tyres do not have m larly carefully to avoid risk o

Never drive with damage

If you notice unusual vib driving, stop the vehicle imm

Checking tyre pressure

The correct tyre pressur

inside of the tank flap.

1. Read the required tyre

values refer to Summe

bar to the values given

Wheels and tyres244

g

oring system constantly checks the

nsors of the ABS wheels. It operates by

ency spectrum of each wheel.

e genuine SEAT tyres. In addition, check and

.

re changed or one or more tyres are changed,

pressing the SET switch on the central console.

the event of a loss of pressure by means of

instrument cluster display. The system uses

epends on tyre temperature. Tyre pressure

ch 10C in tyre temperature increase. The tyre

eing driven and the tyre pressure will rise

ou should only adjust the tyre pressures when

ly at ambient temperature).

e monitoring system works reliably, you should

t the tyre pressures at regular intervals and

ference values) in the system.

el is attached to the inside of the fuel tank flap.

e when the tyres are hot. This may damage or accident!

tyre flexes a lot more at high speeds and the tyre. Under these conditions, the tyre tyre may burst. Risk of accident!

altea_EN Seite 244 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

2. The tyre pressures should only be checked when the tyres are

cold. The slightly raised pressures of warm tyres must not be

reduced.

3. Adjust the tyre pressure to the load you are carrying.

Tyre pressure

The correct tyre pressure is especially important at high speeds. The pressure

should therefore be checked at least once a month and before starting a

journey.

The sticker with the tyre pressure values can be found on the inside of the

tank flap. The tyre pressure values given are for cold tyres. The slightly raised

pressures of warm tyres must not be reduced .

WARNING

Check the tyre pressure at least once per month. Checking tyre pressure value is very important. If the tyre pressure is too high or too low, there is an increased danger of accidents - particularly at high speeds.

A tyre can easily burst if the pressure is too low, causing an accident!

At continuously high speeds, a tyre with insufficient pressure flexes more. In this way it becomes too hot, and this can cause tread separation and tyre blow-out. Always observe the recommended tyre pressures.

If the tyre pressure is too low or too high, the tyres will wear prema- turely and the vehicle will not handle well. Risk of accident!

For the sake of the environment Under-inflated tyres will increase fuel consumption.

Tyre pressure monitorin

The tyre pressure monit

pressure of the tyres.

The system uses the speed se

analysing the speed and frequ

For optimum performance, us

adjust tyre pressures regularly

Whenever the tyre pressures a

the system should be Reset by

The system warns the driver in

symbols and messages in the

ESP page 195.

Note that tyre pressure also d

increases about 0.1 bar for ea

heats up while the vehicle is b

accordingly. For this reason, y

they are cold (i.e. approximate

To ensure that the tyre pressur

check and, if necessary, adjus

store the correct pressures (re

A tyre pressure information lab

WARNING

Never adjust tyre pressur even burst the tyres. Risk of

An insufficiently inflated causes significant heating of bead may be released or the

Wheels and tyres 245

Safety Fir Technical Data

s dependent on tyre pressure, driving

Fig. 173 Tyre tread wear indicators

Fig. 174 Diagram for changing wheels

altea_EN Seite 245 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

For the sake of the environment Under-inflated tyres lead to increased fuel consumption and tyre wear.

Significant tyre pressure loss

The tyre symbol is displayed and indicates that the tyre pressure for a least

one tyre is insufficient.

Stop the vehicle.

Switch the engine off.

Check the tyre(s).

Change the wheel if necessary.

Tyre service life

The service life of tyres i

style and fitting.

Wheels and tyres246

ccidents if a tyre bursts during driving!

d at the latest when the tread is worn down to lure to do so could result in an accident. Worn speeds on wet roads. There is also a greater

eds, a tyre with insufficient pressure flexes eat. This can cause tread separation and tyre lways observe the recommended tyre pres-

ar, you should have the running gear checked tre.

il, fuel and brake fluid away from tyres.

s must be replaced immediately!

vironment se fuel consumption.

you to continue driving even with a

ajority of cases.

ti-puncture23) tyres from the factory indi-

re on the instrument panel.

ountry.

altea_EN Seite 246 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Wear indicators

The original tyres on your vehicle have 1.6 mm high tread wear indicators

page 245, fig. 173, running across the tread. Depending on the make,

there will be six to eight of them evenly spaced around the tyre. Markings on

the tyre sidewall (for instance the letters TWI or other symbols) indicate the

positions of the tread wear indicators. The minimum tread depth required by

law is 1.6 mm (measured in the tread grooves next to the tread wear indica-

tors). Worn tyres must be replaced. Different figures may apply in export

countries .

Tyre pressure

Incorrect tyre pressure causes premature wear and could cause tyre blow-out.

For this reason, the tyre pressure should be checked at least once per month

page 243.

Driving style

Fast cornering, heavy acceleration and hard braking all increase tyre wear.

Changing wheels around

If the front tyres are worn considerably more than the rear ones it is advisable

to change them around as shown page 245, fig. 174. All the tyres will then

last for about the same time.

Wheel balance

The wheels on new vehicles are balanced. However, various factors encoun-

tered in normal driving can cause them to become unbalanced, which results

in steering vibration.

Unbalanced wheels should be rebalanced, as they otherwise cause excessive

wear on steering, suspension and tyres. A wheel must also be rebalanced

when a new tyre is fitted.

Incorrect wheel alignment

Incorrect wheel alignment causes excessive tyre wear, impairing the safety of

the vehicle. If tyres show excessive wear, you should have the wheel align-

ment checked by an Authorised Service Centre.

WARNING

There is a serious danger of a

The tyres must be replace the tread wear indicators. Fai tyres do not grip well at high risk of aquaplaning

At continuously high spe more. This causes it to overh blow-out. Risk of accident. A sures.

If tyres show excessive we by an Authorised Service Cen

Keep chemicals such as o

Damaged wheels and tyre

For the sake of the en Under-inflated tyres will increa

Anti-puncture tyres

Anti-puncture tyres allow

punctured tyre, in the m

Vehicles equipped with an

cate the loss of tyre pressu

23) Depending upon version and c

Wheels and tyres 247

Safety Fir Technical Data

e of the tyres,

,

to continue driving even using anti-puncture

n severely damaged in an accident, etc. If a tyre

re is a risk that parts of the tread can be thrown

fuel lines, brake pipes or fuel filler.

driving if severe vibrations occur, or if the wheel

off smoke.

conditions, the driving quality of the vehicle is

speed of 80 km/h is subject to road and observe legal requirements when doing so.

pid manoeuvres, and brake earlier than usual.

cles (for example kerbs) or potholes.

ng driven in emergency conditions, the driving aired and there is a risk of accident.

not deflate on losing pressure because they

ed sides. Therefore defects in the tyre can not be

tion.

used on front tyres used in emergency

altea_EN Seite 247 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Driving with anti-puncture tyres (emergency gear)

Leave the ESP/TCS (electronic stabilisation programme)

switched on, or switch on page 194.

Continue driving carefully and slowly (80 km/h maximum).

Avoid sudden manoeuvres and sharp turns.

Avoid driving over obstacles (for example kerbs) or potholes.

Look out for the ESP/TCS intervening often, smoke coming from

the tyres or the smell of rubber, the vehicle vibrating or a clat-

tering noise. If any of these occur, stop the vehicle.

The anti-puncture tyres have a tag on the side of the tyre, with the description:

DSST, Eufonia, RFT, ROF, RSC, SSR or ZP.

The sides of this type of tyre are reinforced. When the tyres lose air they are

supported on the sides (emergency driving).

The loss of pressure in the tyre is shown on the instrument panel. You can

then drive a maximum of 80 km and if the circumstances are favourable (for

example, low load), even more.

The damaged tyre should be changed as soon as possible. The rim should be

checked in a specialist workshop to detect possible damage and replace it if

necessary. We recommend you contact Technical Service. If more than one

tyre is being used under emergency conditions, this reduces the distance

which can be travelled.

Starting driving in emergency conditions

When the loss in tyre pressure is displayed on the instrument panel, this

implies that at least one tyre is being driven in emergency conditions .

End of emergency operation

Do not drive on if:

smoke is coming from on

there is a smell of rubber

the vehicle vibrates,

there is a rattling noise.

When is it no longer possible tyres?

If one of the tyres has bee

has been badly damaged the

off and cause damage to the

It is also advisable to stop

starts overheating and gives

WARNING

When driving in emergency considerably impaired.

The maximum permitted weather conditions. Please

Avoid sharp turns and ra

Avoid driving over obsta

If one or more tyres is bei quality of the vehicle is imp

Note The anti-puncture tyres do

are supported on the reinforc

detected with a visual inspec

Snow chains must not be

conditions.

Wheels and tyres248

as well as the proper facilities for disposing of

has full information on the technical require-

ging tyres, wheels or wheel trims.

se only wheels and tyres which have been odel. Failure to do so could impair vehicle

on tyres that are more than six years old. If should drive slowly and with extra care at all

se with an unknown history of use.

ed, you must ensure that the flow of air to the could cause them to overheat.

tted with radial tyres of the same type, size e same tread pattern.

vironment according to the laws in the country concerned.

not generally possible to use the wheels from

pply to wheels of the same model. The use of

t been approved by SEAT for use with your

icle's type approval for use on public roads.

same as the tyres that are mounted on the

er tyres - you should only use the spare tyre for

e with extra care. Refit the normal road wheel

altea_EN Seite 248 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

New tyres and wheels

New tyres and wheels have to be run-in.

The tyres and wheel rims are an essential part of the vehicle's design. The

tyres and rims approved by SEAT are specially matched to the characteristics

of the vehicle and make a major contribution to good road holding and safe

handling .

Tyres should be replaced at least in pairs and not individually (i.e. both front

tyres or both rear tyres together). A knowledge of tyre designations makes it

easier to choose the correct tyres. Radial tyres have the tyre designations

marked on the sidewall, for example:

195/65 R15 91T

This contains the following information:

195 Tyre width in mm

65 Height/width ratio in %

R Tyre construction: Radial

15 Rim diameter in inches

91 Load rating code

T Speed rating

The tyres could also have the following information:

A direction of rotation symbol

Reinforced denotes heavy-duty tyres.

The manufacturing date is also indicated on the tyre sidewall (possibly only

on the inner side of the wheel).

DOT... 1103... means, for example, that the tyre was produced in the 11th

week of 2003.

We recommend that work on tyres and wheels is carried out by an Authorised

Service Centre. They are familiar with the procedure and have the necessary

special tools and spare parts

the old tyres.

Any Authorised Service Centre

ments when installing or chan

WARNING

We recommend that you u approved by SEAT for your m handling. Risk of accident.

Avoid running the vehicle you have no alternative, you times.

Never use old tyres or tho

If wheel trims are retrofitt brakes is not restricted. This

All four wheels must be fi (rolling circumference) and th

For the sake of the en Old tyres must be disposed of

Note For technical reasons, it is

other vehicles. This can also a

wheels or tyres which have no

model may invalidate the veh

If the spare tyre is not the

vehicle - for example with wint

a short period of time and driv

as soon as possible.

Wheels and tyres 249

Safety Fir Technical Data

e the vehicles handling on snow and

res will considerably improve the vehicles

mer tyres (width, rubber compound, tread

and snow.

to a pressure 0.2 bar higher than the pressures

ee sticker on tank flap).

all four wheels.

ter tyre sizes can be found in the vehicle's regis-

radial winter tyres. All tyre sizes listed in the

pply to winter tyres.

veness when the tread is worn down to a depth

e 248, New tyres and wheels determines the

ter tyres:

hich can exceed the speed rating of the fitted

e sticker in the driver's field of view. These

ur Authorised Service Centre. The legal require-

e followed.

d for unnecessarily long periods. Vehicles with

hen the roads are free of snow and ice.

refer to the notes on the spare wheel

wheels.

altea_EN Seite 249 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Wheel bolts

Wheel bolts must be tightened to the correct torque.

The design of wheel bolts is matched to the rims. If different wheel rims are

fitted, the correct wheel bolts with the right length and correctly shaped bolt

heads must be used. This ensures that wheels are fitted securely and that the

brake system functions correctly.

In certain circumstances, you may not use wheel bolts from a different car -

even if it is the same model page 218.

After the wheels have been changed, the tightening torque of the wheel bolts

should be checked as soon as possible with a torque wrench . The tight-

ening torque for steel and alloy wheels is 120 Nm.

WARNING

If the wheel bolts are not tightened correctly, the wheel could become loose while driving. Risk of accident.

The wheel bolts must be clean and turn easily. Never apply grease or oil to them.

Use only wheel bolts which belong to the wheel.

If the torque of the wheel bolts is too low, they could loosen whilst the vehicle is in motion. Risk of accident! If the tightening torque is too high, the wheel bolts and threads can be damaged.

Caution The prescribed torque for wheel bolts for steel and alloy wheels is 120 Nm.

Winter tyres

Winter tyres will improv

ice.

In winter conditions winter ty

handling. The design of sum

pattern) gives less grip on ice

Winter tyres must be inflated

specified for summer tyres (s

Winter tyres must be fitted on

Information on permitted win tration documents. Use only

vehicle documentation also a

Winter tyres lose their effecti

of 4 mm.

The speed rating code pag

following speed limits for win

Q max. 160 km/h

S max. 180 km/h

T max. 190 km/h

H max. 210 km/h

In some countries, vehicles w

tyre must have an appropriat

stickers are available from yo

ments of each country must b

Do not have winter tyres fitte

summer tyres handle better w

If you have a flat tyre, please

page 248, New tyres and

Wheels and tyres250

ed limit for using snow chains is 50 km/h. The

ntry should be followed.

k your Approved Service Centre for information

and snow chain size.

altea_EN Seite 250 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

WARNING

The maximum speed for the winter tyres must not be exceeded. Otherwise, this could lead to tyre damage and thus, an accident risk.

For the sake of the environment Fit your summer tyres in good time. They are quieter, do not wear so quickly

and reduce fuel consumption.

Snow chains

Snow chains are only permitted on the front wheels and only for tyres

195/65R15 and 205/55R16. These tyres may only be fitted with fine-pitch

link chains which do not protrude more than 15 mm page 284.

Snow chains must have fine-pitch links which do not protrude more than 9

mm, including tension device.

Remove wheel hub covers and trim rings before fitting snow chains. For safety

reasons cover caps, available in any Authorised Service Centre, must then be

fitted over the wheel bolts.

WARNING

Snow chains should be correctly tightened in accordance with the manu- facturer's instructions. This will prevent the chains coming into contact with the wheel housing.

Caution You must remove the snow chains to drive on roads which are free of snow.

Otherwise they will impair handling, damage the tyres and wear out very

quickly.

Note In some countries, the spe

legal requirements of the cou

We recommend that you as

about appropriate wheel, tyre

If and when 251

Safety Fir Technical Data

factory is only designed for changing wheels t attempt to use it for lifting heavier vehicles .

m, level ground.

hen the vehicle is on the jack. Risk of accident.

t underneath the vehicle, this must be secured se, there is a risk of injury.

altea_EN Seite 251 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

If and when

Tools, tyre repair kit and spare wheel

Vehicle Tools

The vehicle onboard tools are located under the floor panel in

the luggage compartment.

Lift the cover of the luggage compartment, by pulling it up with a

finger in the fitting.

Take the onboard tools out of the vehicle.

The tool kit includes:

Jack*

Hook for removing wheel covers* or hub caps*

Box spanner for wheel bolts*

Reversible screwdriver with handle (including hexagonal interior) for the

wheel bolts. The screwdriver is a combination tool.

Towing eye

Adapter for the anti-theft wheel bolts*

Some of the items listed are only provided in certain models / model years,

or are optional extras.

WARNING

Do not use the hexagonal socket in the screwdriver handle to tighten the wheel bolts as with this it is not possible to tighten the bolts to the required torque. Risk of accident.

The jack supplied by the on this model. On no accoun or other loads. Risk of injury

Use the jack only on a fir

Never start the engine w

If work is to be carried ou by suitable stands. Otherwi

WARNING (continued)

If and when252

ains must not be used on the compact tempo-

on one of the front wheels when using snow

rary spare in place of one of the rear wheels.

hains to the wheel taken from the rear and use

tured front wheel.

e checked and corrected as soon as possible. for dimensions 125/70R16 125/70R18 ther tyre dimensions please refer to the label

so could result in an accident.

0 km/h. Higher speeds can cause an accident.

, hard braking and fast cornering. Risk of acci-

mpact spare tyres at the same time, risk of

mal summer or winter tyre) may be fitted on wheel rim.

hicles not including a spare wheel) is

anel in the luggage compartment.

the Tyre Mobility System Tyre repair kit.

container with sealing compound to repair the

generate the required tyre pressure. The kit will

altea_EN Seite 252 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Compact temporary spare wheel* (emergency wheel)

The compact spare wheel (emergency wheel for vehicles

without the anti-puncture kit) should only be used when

strictly necessary.

The temporary spare wheel is stored under the floor panel in the luggage

compartment and is attached by a thumbnut.

How to use the compact temporary spare wheel

Should you ever have a punctured tyre, the compact temporary spare wheel

is only intended for temporary use until you can reach a workshop. The

standard-size road wheel should be replaced as soon as possible.

Please note the following restrictions when using the compact temporary

spare wheel. This spare wheel has been specially designed for your vehicle,

thus, it cannot be changed with the spare wheel from another vehicle.

No other type of tyre (normal summer or winter tyre) may be fitted on the

compact temporary spare wheel rim.

Snow chains

For technical reasons, snow ch

rary spare wheel.

If you should have a puncture

chains, fit the compact tempo

You can then attach the snow c

this wheel to replace the punc

WARNING

The tyre pressures must b The emergency tyre pressure 135/90R16 is 4.2 bar; for all o on the fuel cap. Failure to do

Do not drive faster than 8

Avoid heavy acceleration dent.

Never use two or more co accident.

No other type of tyre (nor the compact temporary spare

Tyre repair kit*

The tyre repair kit (for ve

stored under the floor p

Your vehicle is equipped with

The tyre repair kit consists of a

puncture and a compressor to

Fig. 175 Luggage compartment. Access to the spare wheel

If and when 253

Safety Fir Technical Data

s on and place the warning triangle in position. nd also warns other road users.

on a gradient, block the wheel opposite the

ing a stone or similar object under it to prevent

.

ents when doing so.

ribed below

er. Also refer to page 254, fig. 176.

ts.

jack in the corresponding zone.

then put on the spare wheel.

s firmly with the box spanner.

altea_EN Seite 253 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

reliably seal punctures up to a size of about 4 mm caused by the penetration

of a foreign body into the tyre.

Note Seek professional assistance if the repair of a tyre puncture is not

possible with the sealing compound.

Wheel change

Preparation work

What you must do before changing a wheel.

If you have a flat tyre or puncture, park the vehicle as far away

from the flow of traffic as possible. Choose a location that is as

level as possible.

All passengers should leave the vehicle. They should wait in a

safe area (for instance behind the roadside crash barrier).

Switch off the engine. Switch on the hazard warning lights.

Apply the handbrake firmly.

Engage the first gear, or put the selector lever to position P for

those vehicles with an automatic gearbox.

If you are towing a trailer, unhitch it from your vehicle.

Take the vehicle tools and the spare wheel out of the luggage

compartment.

WARNING

Put the hazard warning light This is for your own safety a

Caution If you have to change the tyre

wheel being changed by plac

the vehicle from rolling away

Note Please observe legal requirem

Changing a wheel

Change the wheel as desc

Remove the wheel cov

Slacken the wheel bol

Raise the car with the

Remove the wheel and

Lower the vehicle.

Tighten the wheel bolt

Replace the hub cap.

If and when254

removed to gain access to the wheel

ok from the tools into the designated

he bolt hole covers of the wheel cover

Fig. 176 Changing the wheel: Removing a hub cap

altea_EN Seite 254 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

After changing a wheel

After changing the wheel there are still tasks to complete.

Put the tools and jack back in the luggage compartment.

Place the wheel with the defective tyre in the luggage compart-

ment and secure it.

Check the tyre pressure of the newly fitted tyre as soon as

possible.

Have the tightening torque of the wheel bolts checked as soon as

possible with a torque wrench. The prescribed torque must be

120 Nm.

Note If you notice that the wheel bolts are corroded and difficult to turn when

changing a wheel, they must be replaced before having the wheel bolt torque

checked.

For your safety, drive at moderate speeds until the wheel bolt torque has

been checked.

Wheel trims

The wheel trims must be

bolts.

Removing

Insert the extraction ho ring, located in one of t

fig. 176.

Pull off the hub cap.

If and when 255

Safety Fir Technical Data

olts

e loosened before raising the vehicle.

far as it will go over the wheel bolt.

by the end turn it about one full turn to the

far as it will go over the wheel bolt.

close to the end and turn the bolt to the

.

to unscrew or tighten the anti-theft wheel

Fig. 177 Changing the wheel: loosen the wheel bolts

altea_EN Seite 255 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Wheel covers*

The wheel covers must be removed for access to the wheel

bolts

Removing

Remove the wheel cover using the wire hook.

Hook this into one of the cut-outs of the wheel cover.

Fitting

Fit the wheel cover onto the wheel rim by pressing it firmly. Put

pressure initially on the point of the cut-out for the valve. Then

press the wheel cover onto the steel rim so that it engages all

round.

Loosening the wheel b

The wheel bolts must b

Loosening

Fit the box spanner as

Grasp the box spanner

left fig. 177.

Tightening

Fit the box spanner as

Grasp the box spanner

right until it is secured

An adapter is required

bolts.

If and when256

altea_EN Seite 256 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

WARNING

Loosen the wheel bolts only about one turn before raising the vehicle with the jack, loosening the wheel bolts more than one turn can result in an acci- dent.

Note Do not use the hexagonal socket in the screwdriver handle to loosen or

tighten the wheel bolts.

If the wheel bolt is very tight, you may be able to loosen it by pushing

down the end of the spanner carefully with your foot. Hold on to the vehicle

for support and take care not to slip.

If and when 257

Safety Fir Technical Data

nt under the door sill closest to the wheel

78.

e jacking point and turn the crank until the

tly below the vertical rib under the door

e arm of the jack fits around the rib under

ovable base plate of the jack is flat on the

defective wheel is just clear of the ground.

r of the door sills mark the jacking points

jacking point for each wheel. Do not fit the jack

e jack may cause the vehicle to slip off the jack.

tted on solid ground offering good support. Use

cessary. On a hard, slippery surface (such as

ilar to prevent the jack from slipping.

at the base of the jack does not slip. Failure to dent.

ged if the jack is not applied at the correct a risk of injury since the jack can slip off engaged.

altea_EN Seite 257 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Raising the vehicle

In order to remove the wheel, the vehicle must be raised with

a jack.

Locate the jacking poi

to be changed fig. 1

Place the jack under th

arm of the jack is direc

sill.

Align the jack so that th

the door sill and the m

ground fig. 179.

Raise the jack until the

Recesses at the front and rea

fig. 178. There is only one

anywhere else.

An unstable surface under th

Therefore, the jack must be fi

a large and stable base, if ne

tiles) use a rubber mat or sim

WARNING

Take all precautions so th do so could result in an acci

The vehicle can be dama jacking points. There is also suddenly if it is not properly

Fig. 178 The jacking points

Fig. 179 Fitting the jack

If and when258

an and easily screwed. Before fitting the spare

ition and hub mounting surfaces. These

fitting the wheel.

crewdriver handle makes it easier to turn the

rewdriver blade should be removed when the

n of rotation are fitted, note the direction of

ket in the screwdriver handle to loosen or

uired to turn the anti-theft wheel

Fig. 181 Anti-theft wheel bolt

altea_EN Seite 258 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Removing and fitting the wheel

For removal and fitting the wheel, the following tasks must be

completed.

After loosening the wheel bolts and raising the vehicle with the jack,

change the wheel as described below:

Removing a wheel

Unscrew the bolts using the hexagonal tool in the handle of the

screwdriver (vehicle tool) and place them on a clean surface

fig. 180.

Fitting a wheel

Screw in the wheel bolts and tighten them lightly using the

hexagonal socket in the screwdriver handle.

The wheel bolts should be cle

wheel, inspect the wheel cond

surfaces must be clean before

The hexagonal socket in the s

wheel bolts. The reversible sc

tool is used for this purpose.

If tyres with a specific directio

rotation.

Note Do not use the hexagonal soc

tighten the wheel bolts.

Anti-theft wheel bolts*

A special adapter is req

bolts.

Fig. 180 Changing the wheel: Hexagonal socket in screwdriver handle to turn the wheel bolts

If and when 259

Safety Fir Technical Data

yre Mobility System)

d safety notes

a tyre repair kit: the Tyre Mobility System.

, a sealing compound and an air compressor are

artment under the floor panel.

reliably seal punctures caused by the penetra-

about 4 mm in diameter.

the foreign body from the tyre.

mpound are located on the sealing compound

e air compressor are included in an additional

a puncture with the sealing compound if the riving the car after the tyre has lost its air.

s and follow instructions concerning pound carefully.

80 km/h, avoid heavy acceleration, hard

paired with sealing compound are only suit- short period. Therefore, please drive carefully

ed workshop.

nvironment ainers should be disposed of at a proper facility.

altea_EN Seite 259 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Insert the adapter onto the wheel bolt and push it on as far as it

will go page 258, fig. 181.

Fit the box spanner as far as it will go over the adapter.

Loosen or tighten the wheel bolt as appropriate.

Error code

The code number of the anti-theft wheel bolt is stamped onto the front part of

the adaptor.

The code number should be noted and kept in a safe place, as it is only by

using the code number that a duplicate adaptor can be obtained from an

Authorised Service Centre.

Tyres with directional tread pattern

Tyres with directional tread pattern must be fitted so that they

rotate in the correct direction.

A directional tread pattern can be identified by arrows on the sidewall that

point in the direction of rotation. Always note the direction of rotation indi-

cated when fitting the wheel. This is important so that these tyres can give

maximum grip and avoid excessive noise, tread wear and aquaplaning.

If, in an emergency, you have to fit the spare wheel so it rotates in the wrong

direction, you must drive extremely carefully. The tyre will not give optimum

performance. This is particularly important when driving on wet roads.

To benefit from the advantages of tyres with this type of tread pattern, the

defective tyre should be replaced as soon as possible so that all tyres again

rotate in the correct direction.

Tyre repair kit* (T

General information an

Your vehicle is equipped with

In the event of a tyre puncture

located in the luggage comp

The Tyre Mobility System will

tion of a foreign body of up to

It is not necessary to remove

Instructions for the sealing co

container.

Notes for the proper use of th

instruction leaflet.

WARNING

Do not attempt to repair tyre has been damaged by d

Always observe warning compressor and sealing com

Do not drive faster than braking and fast cornering.

Tyres which have been re able for temporary use over a to the next available qualifi

For the sake of the e Used sealing compound cont

If and when260

on and place the warning triangle in position. d also warns other road users.

o repair a tyre on a slope.

ents when doing so.

escribe the procedures for repairing

nd

container give detailed information on

compound.

ssor and hose from the container.

onto the valve.

ble into a 12 volt power point.

monitor the pressure shown on the pres-

altea_EN Seite 260 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Note If sealant should leak out, leave it to dry. When it has dried, you can pull

it off like a piece of foil.

Observe the expiry date stated on the sealing compound can. Have the

sealing compound exchanged by a qualified workshop.

Seek professional assistance if the repair of a tyre puncture is not

possible with the sealing compound.

Preparation work

Certain steps must be taken before repairing a tyre.

If you have a flat tyre or puncture, park the vehicle as far away

from the flow of traffic as possible.

Apply the handbrake firmly.

Engage first gear, or put the selector lever to position P.

All passengers should leave the vehicle. They should wait in a

safe area (for instance behind the roadside crash barrier).

Check whether a repair is possible using the Tyre Mobility System

General information and safety notes.

Unscrew inflation cap from the affected wheel.

Take the tyre repair kit out of the luggage compartment.

WARNING

Put the hazard warning lights This is for your own safety an

Caution Take special care if you have t

Note Please observe legal requirem

Tyre repair

The following sections d

a tyre.

Using the sealing compou

The instructions on the

how to use the sealing

Inflating the tyre.

Remove the air compre

Screw the retaining nut

Plug the compressor ca

Turn on compressor and

sure gauge.

If and when 261

Safety Fir Technical Data

placed

Fig. 182 Left side of dash panel: Fuse box cover

Fig. 183 Fuse box cover in engine compartment

altea_EN Seite 261 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Completing the repair

Remove the compressor hose from the valve.

Fit the valve cap.

Unplug the compressor from the socket.

Return all tools to their proper storing location.

Note If the vehicle is equipped with tyre pressure control, enter the new tyre

pressures using the SET button on the central console.

The compressor should never be allowed to run for longer than 6

minutes.

Fuses

Changing a fuse

Blown fuses must be re

If and when262

s and never replace them with fuses with a ly could result in fire. This could also cause

electrical system.

ows again after a short time, the electrical

qualified workshop as soon as possible.

igher-rating fuse, you could cause damage to

cal system.

uses in the vehicle. These are available from

Amps

5

10

15

20

25

30

40

50

80

100

150

200

altea_EN Seite 262 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Fuse cover underneath the steering wheel

Switch off the ignition and the component concerned.

Identify the fuse for the failed component page 264.

Take the plastic clip from inside the fuse cover, fit it onto the

blown fuse and pull the fuse out.

Replace the blown fuse (which will have a melted metal strip)

with a new fuse of the same ampere rating.

Fuse cover in engine compartment

Switch off the ignition and its failed electrical component.

Prise off the fuse cover in the engine compartment by pressing

the tabs towards the centre of the cover page 261, fig. 183.

Identify the fuse for the failed component page 264.

Take the plastic clip from inside the fuse cover (at left-hand end

of the dash panel), fit it onto the blown fuse and pull the fuse out.

Replace the blown fuse (which will have a melted metal strip)

with a new fuse of the same ampere rating.

Carefully fit the fuse cover back on to ensure no water can enter

the fuse box.

The individual electrical circuits are protected by fuses. The fuses are located

behind a cover at the left-hand end of the dash panel and on the left-hand

side of the engine compartment.

The electric windows are protected by circuit breakers. These reset automat-

ically after a few seconds when the overload (caused for example by frozen

windows) has been corrected.

Fuses colour code

WARNING

Never repair damaged fuse higher rating. Failure to comp damage to other parts of the

Note If a newly replaced fuse bl

system must be checked by a

If you replace a fuse with h

another location in the electri

Always keep some spare f

SEAT dealers.

Colour

light brown

Red

Blue

Yellow

Natural (white)

Green

orange

Red

white

Blue

grey

violet

If and when 263

Safety Fir Technical Data

altea_EN Seite 263 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Apart from the fuses indicated in the following tables, there are others

which must be replaced by a Technical Service.

If and when264

ith START STOP 5

with START STOP 15

g assistant) / Gear lever/ ESP 10

sensor/ Alarm horn 5

sensor / Light switch 10

nstallation assistant 15

pling automatic gearbox 20

20

ng display) without START STOP 10

er motor 20

/ socket 20

40

it (coupling) 15

Consumer Amps

altea_EN Seite 264 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Fuses on left side of dash panel

Fuses

Number Consumer Amps

1 Vacant

2 Vacant

3 Vacant

4 Vacant

5 Vacant

6 Vacant

7 Vacant

8 Vacant

9 Airbag 5

10 RSE input (roof screen) 10

11 Vacant

12 Left xenon headlight 10

13

Instrument panel (oil level)/Switchboard wiring

(BCM)/Heater / ABS, ESP/ Park Pilot/ Gate-

way/Flow meter

5

14 Gearbox/Servosteering/Brake light sensor/

Trailer/ ABS, ESP/ Haldex/ Light switch 10

15

Heated windscreen / Instrument lighting / Diag-

nosis switchboard/Engine management/Addi-

tional heating/AFS headlamps/Park Pilot

10

16 Right xenon headlight 10

17 Engine management / RSE system with START

STOP 10

18 Kombi / levers w

19 Navigation/ radio

20 Park Pilot (Parkin

switchboard

21 Vacant

22 Volumetric alarm

23 Diagnosis / Rain

24 Trailer hook pre-i

25 Switchboard cou

26 Vacuum pump

27 RSE supply (Ceili

28 Rear window wip

29 Vacant

30 Cigarette lighter

31 Vacant

32 Vacant

33 Heater

34 Vacant

35 Vacant

36 Vacant

37 Vacant

38 Vacant

39 Trailer control un

Number

If and when 265

Safety Fir Technical Data

t, while correct at the time of printing, is subject

s should occur, please refer to the sticker on the

e correct information for your model.

mpartment, left part

Consumer Amps

ers 20

30

it 5

20

15

el/Steering column 5

40

15

Tom Navigator 5

ment 5

ment 10

ol unit 5

module supply 15

module supply 30

20

altea_EN Seite 265 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Some of the electrical items listed in the table are only fitted on certain

models or are optional extras.

Please note that the above lis

to alterations. If discrepancie

inside of the fuse cover for th

Fuses layout, engine co

Fuses

40 Trailer control unit (indicators, brakes and left

side) 20

41 Trailer control unit (fog light, reversing light and

right side) 20

42 BCM wiring switchboard 20

43 Trailer pre-installation 40

44 Rear window heater 25

45 Electric windows (front) 30

46 Rear electric windows 30

47 Engine (Fuel control unit, petrol relay) 15

48 Convenience controls 20

49 Heating controls 40

50 Heated seats 30

51 Sunroof 20

52 Headlight washer system 20

53 Trailer hook pre-installation assistant 20

54 Taxi (taximeter power supply) 5

55 Trailer hook pre-installation assistant 20

56 Taxi (taximeter power supply) 15

57 Telephone power supply with START STOP 10

58 Central locking control unit 30

Number Consumer Amps

Number

1 Windscreen wip

2 DQ200 gearbox

3 Cable control un

4 ABS

5 AQ gearbox

6 Instrument pan

7 Ignition key

8 Radio

9 Telephone/Tom

10 Engine manage

Engine manage

11 Vacant

12 Electronic contr

13 Petrol injection

Diesel injection

14 Coil

If and when266

t turn off the failed component.

ingerprints vaporise in the heat, causing a

condensation on the mirror surface, thus

by one of the same type. The type is inscribed

s part or on the base.

eep a box of spare bulbs in the vehicle. At the

bulbs, which are essential for road safety,

justing* )

ulb changes must be made by the SEAT dealer, given

e removed from the vehicle and a reset must be made

m incorporated.

times the light flux and have an average lifespan of 5

bulbs, this means that, except due to unusual circum-

ange the bulbs for the whole life of the vehicle.

altea_EN Seite 266 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Bulb change

General notes

Before changing any bulb, firs

Do not touch the bulb glass. F

reduction in the bulb life and

reducing efficiency.

A bulb should only be replaced

on the bulb, either on the glas

It is highly recommended to k

very least, the following spare

should be kept in the vehicle.

Main headlights

Dipped beam - H7

Main beam - H1

Position - W5W

Indicator - PY21W

Xenon headlights24) / self-ad

Dipped and full beam - D1S25

Daylight - P21W SLL

Position W5W

Indicators PY21W

15 Engine management 5

Pump relay 10

16 Right lighting 30

17 Horn 15

18 Vacant

19 Clean 30

20 Water pump 10

Pressure sensor pump for 1.8 engine 20

21a) Lambda probe 15

22 Brake pedal, speed sensor 5

23a)

Engine management 5

Engine management 10

Engine management 15

24 AKF, gearbox valve 10

25a) ABS pump 40

26 Left lighting 30

27a) Engine management 40

Engine management 50

28 Vacant

29a) Electric windows (front and back) 50

Electric windows (front) 30

30 Ignition key 50

a) Ampere rating according to motorisation

Number Consumer Amps

24) On this type of headlight, the b

that complex elements must b

on the automatic control syste 25) The Xenon bulbs discharge 2.5

times more than that of halogen

stances, there is no need to ch

If and when 267

Safety Fir Technical Data

Fig. 184 Main headlight lamps

altea_EN Seite 267 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Fog lights

Fog lights - H3

Upper rear light

Stop/Position - P21W26)

Indicator - R10W

Lower rear light

Fog light - P21W

Reverse light - P21W

Side indicator

Side indicator - W5W

Registration plate light

Registration plate light - C5W

Note Depending on weather conditions (cold or wet), the front lights, the fog

lights, the rear lights and the indicators may be temporarily misted. This has

no influence on the life expectancy of the lighting system. By switching on the

lights, the area through which the beam of light is projected will quickly be

demisted. However, the edges may continue to be misted.

Please check at regular intervals that all lighting (especially the exterior

lighting) on your vehicle is functioning properly. This is not only in the interest

of your own safety, but also in that of all other road users.

Due to the difficulty in accessing the lamps, any replacement work should

be done by a SEAT dealer. However, the following is a description of how to

change the lamps except for the fog lights* and interior lamps.

Main headlight lamps

Indicator

Dipped headlights

Main beam headlights

Side lights

26) Electronically controlled single filament bulb for Stop/side bulbs. If the bulb blows it

will not work in either position or Stop.

AA

AB

AC

AD

If and when268

Fig. 186 Dipped head- lights

Fig. 187 Dipped head- lights

altea_EN Seite 268 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Turn signal lamps

Raise the bonnet.

Rotate the lamp holder fig. 185 to the left and pull.

Remove the bulb by pressing on the lamp holder and rotating at

the same time to the left.

Installation is done in the reverse order.

Dipped beam lights

Raise the bonnet.

Fig. 185 Turn signal lamps

AA

If and when 269

Safety Fir Technical Data

g. 188 by pulling on this.

fig. 189 from the bulb.

. 189 inwards and to the right.

t the replacement so that it sits correctly

reflector.

the reverse order.

Fig. 189 Main beam headlights

AC

A1

A2

altea_EN Seite 269 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Remove the loops page 268, fig. 186 in the direction of

the arrow and remove the cover.

Remove the connector page 268, fig. 187 from the bulb.

Disengage the retainer spring page 268, fig. 187 pressing

inwards to the right.

Extract the bulb and fit the replacement so that the rim of the

attachment plate is on the reflector cut-out.

Main beam lights

Raise the bonnet.

Remove the cover fi

Remove the connector

Press the spring fig

Extract the bulb and fi

into the cut-out on the

Installation is done in

A1

A2

A3

Fig. 188 Main beam headlights

If and when270

fig. 191 outwards.

lling this out and inserting the replace-

he reverse order.

A1

altea_EN Seite 270 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Side lights

Raise the bonnet.

Remove the cover fig. 190 by pulling on this.

Extract the lamp holder

Replace the bulb by pu

ment.

Installation is done in t

Rear lights

Side lights

Brake lights

Turn signals

Reversing lights

Rear fog light

Fig. 190 Side lights

Fig. 191 Side lights

AD

If and when 271

Safety Fir Technical Data

e luggage compartment lateral panel.

ting fig. 193 securing the rear light.

r under the plastic fitting may help to

ar light from its casing taking care not to

er connector.

age 272, fig. 194 from the lamp holder

rotate to the left then fit the replacement.

in reverse order, taking special care when

. The metal contacts of the lamp holder

tly fitted with respect to the rear light

AB

AC

altea_EN Seite 271 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Side lights and brake lights

Open the tailgate.

Remove the bolts fig. 192 .

Remove the cover of th

Unscrew the plastic fit

Inserting a screwdrive

loosen it.

Partially remove the re

pull on the cable.

Remove the lamp hold

Unscrew the bolts p

and pull on this.

Press on the lamp and

To refit follow the steps

fitting the lamp holder

ends should be correc

contacts.

Fig. 192 Side lights and brake lights

Fig. 193 Side lights and brake lights

AA

If and when272

. 194 from the lamp holder and pull

mp holder using a screw driver in the

fig. 195.

p by pressing it down and rotating to the

erse order.

light

to the left, and remove it in the direction

.

ssing on it and rotating at the same time

AC

Fig. 196 Lamp on interior side of bumper

altea_EN Seite 272 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Turn indicators

Remove the diode from its housing page 271.

Unscrew the bolts fig

on this.

Pull out the indicator la

direction of the arrow

Fit the replacement lam

left.

Installation is in the rev

Reverse light / rear fog

Rotate the lamp holder

of the arrow fig. 196

Replace the bulb by pre

to the left

Fig. 194 Indicator light

Fig. 195 Indicator lights.

If and when 273

Safety Fir Technical Data

lights

essing on the inside edge of this -arrow-

screwdriver fig. 198.

Fig. 198 Luggage compartment light

Fig. 199 Luggage compartment light

altea_EN Seite 273 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Side indicators

Press the indicator to the left or to the right to remove the lamp.

Remove the lamp holder from the indicator.

Remove the failed glass bulb and replace with a new bulb.

Insert the lamp holder in the indicator guide until it clicks into

place.

First place the indicator in the opening in the bodywork, fixing

the tabs fig. 197, arrow .

Insert the bulb as shown by the arrow fig. 197.

Luggage compartment

Remove the bulb by pr

using the flat side of a

Fig. 197 Side indicator

A1

A2

If and when274

ully using the flat side of the screwdriver

e crack as shown by the arrow fig. 200.

ng it in the direction of the arrow and

Fig. 201 Registration light

altea_EN Seite 274 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Press the lamp sideways and remove from its housing

page 273, fig. 199.

Registration light

Remove the bulb, caref

as a lever inserted in th

Remove the bulb, movi

outwards fig. 201.Fig. 200 Registration light

If and when 275

Safety Fir Technical Data

ing it in the direction of the arrow and

ve a sufficient wire cross section.

ause of a discharged battery, the battery can be

nother vehicle to start the engine.

the standard DIN 72553 (see manufacturer's

ss section must be at least 25 mm2 for petrol

for diesel engines.

ch each other, otherwise electricity could flow as

s are connected.

ust be properly connected to the vehicle elec-

altea_EN Seite 275 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Sunroof light

Carefully remove the lamp, using the flat side of the screwdriver,

as shown in the figure fig. 203.

Remove the bulb, mov

outwards fig. 203.

Jump-starting

Jump leads

The jump lead must ha

If the engine fails to start bec

connected to the battery of a

Jump leads

Jump leads must comply with

documentation). The wire cro

engines and at least 35 mm2

Note The vehicles must not tou

soon as the positive terminal

The discharged battery m

trical system.

Fig. 202 Removing sunroof light

Fig. 203 Removing sunroof light

If and when276

f the black jump lead to a solid metal

lted on to the engine block, or onto the

e vehicle with the flat battery. Do not

ar the battery .

ch a way that they cannot come into

g parts in the engine compartment.

vehicle with the boosting battery and let

car with the flat battery and wait one or

ngine is running.

jump leads, switch off the headlights (if

er and rear window heater in the vehicle

s helps minimise voltage peaks which are

ds are disconnected.

ning, disconnect the leads in reverse

n above.

they have good metal-to-metal contact with

tch off the starter after about 10 seconds and

nute.

AX

altea_EN Seite 276 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

How to jump start: description

fig. 204 shows the flat battery and the charged battery.

Jump lead terminal connections

Switch off the ignition on both vehicles .

1. Connect one end of the red jump lead to the positive fig. 204

terminal of the vehicle with the flat battery .

2. Connect the other end of the red jump lead to the positive

terminal in the vehicle providing assistance.

3. Connect one end of the black jump lead to the negative terminal

on the battery of the vehicle providing assistance.

4. Connect the other end o

component which is bo

engine block itself of th

connect it to a point ne

5. Position the leads in su

contact with any movin

Starting

6. Start the engine of the

it run at idling speed.

7. Start the engine of the

two minutes until the e

Removing the jump leads

8. Before you remove the

they are switched on).

9. Turn on the heater blow

with the flat battery. Thi

generated when the lea

10. When the engine is run

order to the details give

Connect the battery clamps so

the battery terminals.

If the engine fails to start, swi

try again after about half a mi

Fig. 204 How to connect the jump leads

AA AB

A+

A+

A-

If and when 277

Safety Fir Technical Data

altea_EN Seite 277 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

WARNING

Please note the safety warnings referring to working in the engine compartment page 226, Working in the engine compartment.

The battery providing assistance must have the same voltage as the flat battery (12V) and approximately the same capacity (see imprint on battery). Failure to comply could result in an explosion.

Never use jump leads when one of the batteries is frozen. Danger of explosion! Even after the battery has thawed, battery acid could leak and cause chemical burns. If a battery freezes, it should be replaced.

Keep sparks, flames and lighted cigarettes away from batteries, danger of explosion. Failure to comply could result in an explosion.

Observe the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the jump leads.

Do not connect the negative cable from the other vehicle directly to the negative terminal of the flat battery. The gas emitted from the battery could be ignited by sparks. Danger of explosion.

Do not attach the negative cable from the other vehicle to parts of the fuel system or to the brake line.

The non-insulated parts of the battery clamps must not be allowed to touch. The jump lead attached to the positive battery terminal must not touch metal parts of the vehicle, this can cause a short circuit.

Position the leads in such a way that they cannot come into contact with any moving parts in the engine compartment.

Do not bend over the batteries. This could result in chemical burns.

Note The vehicles must not touch each other, otherwise electricity could flow as

soon as the positive terminals are connected.

If and when278

ng points if you use a tow-rope:

towing vehicle

il the tow-rope is taut. Then accelerate

s cautiously. If you are driving an auto-

te gently.

ke servo and power steering are not

ou are towing. Brake earlier than you

h a more gentle pressure on the brake.

towed vehicle

e remains taut at all times when towing.

ehicle with a tow-bar. You should only use a

tow-bar.

elastic to reduce the loading on both vehicles.

e made of synthetic fibre or similarly elastic

-bar only to the towing eyes provided or a

nce, especially when using a tow-rope. Both

the technique required for towing. Inexperi-

pt to tow-start or tow away another vehicle.

altea_EN Seite 278 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Towing and tow-starting

Tow-starting

The use of jump leads is preferable to tow-starting.

We recommend that you do not tow-start your vehicle. Jump-starting

is preferable page 275.

However, if your vehicle has to be tow-started:

Engage the 2nd or the 3rd gear.

Keep the clutch pressed down.

Switch the ignition on.

Once both vehicles are moving, release the clutch.

As soon as the engine starts, press the clutch and move the gear

lever into neutral. This helps to prevent driving into the towing

vehicle.

WARNING

The risk of accidents is high when tow-starting. The vehicle being towed can easily collide with the towing vehicle.

Caution When tow-starting, fuel could enter the catalytic converter and damage it.

Comments

Please observe the followi

Notes for the driver of the

Drive slowly at first unt

gradually.

Begin and change gear

matic vehicle, accelera

Remember that the bra

working in the vehicle y

would normally, but wit

Notes for the driver of the

Ensure that the tow-rop

Tow-rope or tow-bar

It is easier and safer to tow a v

tow-rope if you do not have a

A tow-rope should be slightly

It is advisable to use a tow-rop

material.

Attach the tow-rope or the tow

towing bracket.

Driving style

Towing requires some experie

drivers should be familiar with

enced drivers should not attem

If and when 279

Safety Fir Technical Data

ways be kept in the vehicle. Please refer to the

starting.

Fig. 205 The front right section of the vehicle: Fitting the front towing eye

Fig. 206 Fitting the towing eye to the rear of the vehicle

altea_EN Seite 279 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Do not pull too hard with the towing vehicle and take care to avoid jerking the

tow-rope. When towing on an unpaved road, there is always a risk of over-

loading and damaging the anchorage points.

The ignition of the vehicle being towed must be switched on to prevent the

steering wheel from locking and also to allow the use of the turn signals,

horn, windscreen wipers and washers.

As the brake servo does not work if the engine is not running, you must apply

considerably more pressure to the brake pedal than you normally would.

As the power assisted steering does not work if the engine is not running, you

will need more strength to steer than you normally would.

Towing vehicles with an automatic gearbox

Put the selector lever into position N.

Do not drive faster than 50 km/h when towing a vehicle.

Do not tow further than 50 km.

If a breakdown vehicle is used, the vehicle must be towed with the front

wheels raised.

Note Observe legal requirements when towing or tow-starting.

Switch on the hazard warning lights of both vehicles. However, observe

any regulations to the contrary.

For technical reasons, vehicles with an automatic gearbox must not be

tow-started.

If damage to your vehicle means that there is no lubricant in the gearbox,

you must raise the drive wheels while the vehicle is being towed.

If the vehicle has to be towed more than 50 km, the front wheels must be

raised during towing, and towing should be carried out by a qualified person.

The steering wheel is locked when the vehicle has no electrical power. The

vehicle must then be towed with the front wheels raised. Towing should be

carried out by a qualified person.

The towing eye should al

notes on page 278, Tow-

Trailer eyes

If and when280

altea_EN Seite 280 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Fitting the towing eye

Take the towing ring from the onboard tool set.

Remove the front cover by pressing down on its left-hand side.

Remove the cover of the screw hole, insert a screwdriver into the

lower slot and lever gently.

Screw the towing eye as shown by the arrow anti-clockwise to the

limit position in the front page 279, fig. 205 or rear

page 279, fig. 206 threaded hole.

General notes on the technical data 281

Safety Fir Technical Data

r, indication of the diesel combustion power.

e number, indication of the knock resistance

altea_EN Seite 281 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Technical Data

General notes on the technical data

Outstanding information

Important considerations

All data in the official vehicle documents take precedence

over this data.

All data provided in this manual are valid for the standard model in Spain. The

vehicle data card included in the Maintenance Programme or the vehicle

registration documents shows which engine is installed in the vehicle.

The figures may be different depending on if additional equipment is fitted,

for different models, for special vehicles and for other countries.

Abbreviations used in this paragraph of the Technical Data

Abbrevia- tion

Meaning

kW Kilowatt, engine power measurement.

bhp Brake horse power, formerly used to denote engine power

at rpm Revolutions per minute - engine speed.

Nm Newton metres, unit of engine torque.

l/100 km Fuel consumption in litres per 100 km.

g/km Carbon dioxide emissions in grams per km travelled.

CO2 Carbon dioxide

CN Cetane numbe

RON Research octan

of petrol.

Abbrevia- tion

Meaning

General notes on the technical data282

he inside of the spare wheel recess in the

rovided on the vehicle data sticker: fig. 207.

in the Maintenance Program.

r

ber (chassis number)

ne power output

letters

ior trim code

s

ided in the Maintenance Program.

km) / CO2 emissions (g/km) urban

km) / CO2 emissions (g/km) motorway

/ CO2 Emissions (g/km) mixed

altea_EN Seite 282 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Vehicle identification data

The most important data are given on the type plate and the

vehicle data sticker.

Vehicles for certain export countries do not have a type plate.

Type plate

The type plate is located on the left rib inside the engine compartment.

Vehicle identification number

The vehicle identification number (chassis number) can be read from outside

the vehicle through a viewer in the windscreen. This is located on the left-

hand side of the vehicle in the lower area of the windscreen. It is also located

on the right hand side of the engine compartment.

Vehicle data

The data sticker is placed on t

luggage compartment.

The following information is p

These data are also provided

Production control numbe

Vehicle identification num

Model code number

Model designation / engi

Engine and gearbox code

Paintwork number / inter

Optional equipment code

Consumption values

CO2 emissions values

Data from 2 to 9 are also prov

Consumption figures and CO2

Consumption (litres/100

Consumption (litres/100

Consumption (l/100 km)

Fig. 207 Vehicle data sticker boot

A1

A2

A3

A4

A5

A6

A7

A8

A9

AA

AB

AC

General notes on the technical data 283

Safety Fir Technical Data

vary from quoted test values, depending on

nd traffic conditions, the weather and the

ic model with a fuel tank filled to 90% capacity

he figure quoted includes 75 kg to allow for the

onal equipment fittings or for the addition of

e vehicle will increase .

tre of gravity may shift when transporting ct the vehicle's handling and lead to an acci- eed and driving style to suit road conditions

xle weight rating or the gross vehicle weight ad or the allowed total weight is exceeded, the vehicle may change, leading to accidents, ehicle.

altea_EN Seite 283 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Data on fuel consumption

Fuel consumption

The consumption and emission details shown on the vehicle

data sticker differ from one vehicle to another.

The fuel consumption and CO2 emissions of the vehicle can be found on the

vehicle data sticker.

The fuel consumption and emissions figures given are based on the vehicle

weight category, which is determined according to the engine/gearbox

combination and the equipment fitted.

The consumption and emission figures are calculated in accordance with the

EC test requirements 1999/100/EC. These test requirements specify a real-

istic test method based on normal everyday driving.

The following test conditions are applied:

Note Actual consumption may

personal driving style, road a

vehicle condition.

Weights

Kerb weight refers to the bas

and without optional extras. T

weight of the driver.

For special versions and opti

accessories, the weight of th

WARNING

Please note that the cen heavy objects; this may affe dent. Always adjust your sp and requirements.

Never exceed the gross a rating. If the allowed axle lo driving characteristics of the injuries and damage to the v

Urban cycle The urban cycle starts with an engine cold start. City driving

is then simulated.

Extra urban

cycle

In the extra urban cycle simulation the vehicle frequently

accelerates and brakes in all gears, as in normal everyday

driving. The road speed ranges from 0 to 120 km/h.

Total con-

sumption

The average total consumption is calculated with a weighting

of around 37% for the urban cycle and 63% for the extra

urban cycle.

CO2 emis-

sions

The exhaust gases are collected during both driving cycles to

calculate carbon dioxide emissions. The gas composition is

then analysed to evaluate the CO2 content and other emis-

sions.

General notes on the technical data284

ins, wheel bolts

ure values can be found on the inside of the

lues given there are for cold tyres. The slightly

s must not be reduced .

ly to the front wheels.

of this manual.

anged, the tightening torque of the wheel bolts

possible with a torque wrench . The tight-

y wheels is 120 Nm.

least once per month. Checking tyre pressure tyre pressure is too high or too low, there is

ents, particularly at high speeds.

bolts is too low, they could loosen while the ccident! If the tightening torque is too high,

can be damaged.

our Authorised Service Centre for information

and snow chain size.

altea_EN Seite 284 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Towing a trailer

Trailer weights

Trailer weights

The trailer weights and drawbar loads approved are selected in intensive

trials according to precisely defined criteria. The approved trailer weights are

valid for vehicles in the EU for maximum speeds of 80 km/h (in certain

circumstances up to 100 km/h). The figures may be different in other coun-

tries. All data in the official vehicle documents take precedence over these

data .

Drawbar load

The maximum permitted weight exerted by the trailer drawbar on the ball joint

of the towing bracket must not exceed 75 kg.

In the interest of road safety, we recommend that you always tow

approaching the maximum drawbar load. The response of the trailer on the

road will be poor if the drawbar load is too small.

If the maximum permissible drawbar load cannot be met (e.g. with small,

empty and light-weight single axle trailers or tandem axle trailers with an axle

base of less than 1 metre), at least 4% of the actual trailer weight is a legal

stipulation for a drawbar load.

WARNING

For safety reasons, do not exceed the 80 km/h limit. This is also valid in countries where higher speeds are permitted.

Never exceed the maximum trailer weights or the draw bar loading. If the permissible axle load or the permissible total weight is exceeded, the driving characteristics of the vehicle may change, leading to accidents, injuries and damage to the vehicle.

Wheels

Tyre pressure, snow cha

Tyre pressures

The sticker with the tyre press

tank flap. The tyre pressure va

raised pressures of warm tyre

Snow chains

Snow chains may be fitted on

Consult the chapter wheels

Wheel bolts

After the wheels have been ch

should be checked as soon as

ening torque for steel and allo

WARNING

Check the tyre pressure at value is very important. If the an increased danger of accid

If the torque of the wheel vehicle is in motion. Risk of a the wheel bolts and threads

Note We recommend that you ask y

about appropriate wheel, tyre

Technical Data 285

Safety Fir Technical Data

ions and restrictions on the technical data as of

altea_EN Seite 285 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Technical Data

Checking fluid levels

From time to time, the levels of the different fluids in the

vehicle must be checked. Never fill with incorrect fluids,

otherwise serious damage to the engine may be caused.

Coolant expansion tank

Windscreen washer fluid reservoir

Engine oil filler cap

Engine oil dipstick

Brake fluid reservoir

Vehicle battery (underneath the cover)

The checking and refilling of service fluids are carried out on the components

mentioned above. These operations are described in the page 226.

Overview

Further explanations, instruct

page 281 are given.

Fig. 208 Diagram for the location of the various elements

A1

A2

A3

A4

A5

A6

Technical Data286

ON or regular unleaded 91 RONa)

altea_EN Seite 286 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Petrol engine 1.4 63 kW (85 bhp)

Engine specifications

Performance figures

Weights

Trailer weights

Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 63 (85)/ 5000

Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 132/ 3600-3800

No. of cylinders, capacity in cm 3 4/ 1390

Fuel Premium unleaded 95 R

a) Slight power loss.

Maximum speed in km/h 169

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in seconds 9,7

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in seconds 14,8

Gross vehicle weight in kg 1886

Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1366

Front gross axle weight in kg 940

Rear gross axle weight in kg 984

Permitted roof load in kg 75

Trailer without brakes 680

With brakes, gradients up to 8% 1200

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1000

Technical Data 287

Safety Fir Technical Data

ON or regular unleaded 91 RONa)

altea_EN Seite 287 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Engine oil capacity

Petrol engine 1.4 92 kW (125 bhp)

Engine specifications

Performance figures

Weights

Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 2.8 litres

Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 92 (125)/ 5000

Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 200/ 1500-4000

No. of cylinders, capacity in cm 3 4/ 1390

Fuel Premium unleaded 95 R

a) With a slight power loss

Maximum speed in km/h 194

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in seconds 6,9

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in seconds 10,3

Gross vehicle weight in kg 1959

Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1439

Front gross axle weight in kg 1008

Rear gross axle weight in kg 987

Permitted roof load in kg 75

Technical Data288

Running on petrol

75 (102)/ 5600

148/ 3800

4/ 1595

Super 95 octane rating or Regular 91

octane ratinga)

Running on petrol

181

8,9

13,2

altea_EN Seite 288 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Trailer weights

Engine oil capacity

Petrol engine 1.6 75 kW (102 bhp)

Engine specifications

Performance figures

Trailer without brakes 710

With brakes, gradients up to 8% 1500

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1300

Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 3.3 litres

Running on LPG

Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 72 (98)/ 5600

Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 144/ 3800

No. of cylinders, capacity in cm 3 4/ 1595

Fuel LPG

a) Slight power loss.

Running on LPG

Maximum speed in km/h 178

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in seconds 9,2

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in seconds 13,8

Technical Data 289

Safety Fir Technical Data

ON or regular unleaded 91 RONa)

altea_EN Seite 289 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Weights

Trailer weights

Engine oil capacity

Petrol engine 1.8 l 118 kW (160 HP)

Engine specifications

Gross vehicle weight in kg 1951

Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1456

Gross front axle weight in kg 965

Gross rear axle weight in kg 1000

Permitted roof load in kg 75

Trailer without brakes 720

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1500

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1200

Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.1 litres

Power output in kW (HP) rpm 118 (160)4500-6200

Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 250/1500-4500

No. of cylinders, capacity in cm 3 4/1798

Fuel Premium unleaded 95 R

a) Slight power loss.

Technical Data290

Automatic

210

5,8

8,4

Automatic

2015

1495

1062

994

75

Automatic

740

1500

1400

altea_EN Seite 290 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Performance figures

Weights

Trailer weights

Engine oil capacity

Manual

Maximum speed in km/h 210

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in seconds 5,9

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in seconds 8,4

Manual

Gross vehicle weight in kg 1995

Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1475

Gross front axle weight in kg 1062

Gross rear axle weight in kg 994

Permitted roof load in kg 75

Manual

Trailer without brakes 730

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1500

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400

Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.6 litres

Technical Data 291

Safety Fir Technical Data

altea_EN Seite 291 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Diesel engine 1.9 l TDI 66 kW (90 bhp)

Engine specifications

Performance figures

Weights

Trailer weights

Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 66 (90)/ 4000

Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 210/1800

No. of cylinders, capacity in cm 3 4/1896

Fuel Min. 51 CNa)

a) Cetane- Number (cetane index) = Measure of the combustion power of the diesel

Maximum speed in km/h 183

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in seconds 8,4

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in seconds 12,6

Gross vehicle weight in kg 2000

Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1480

Front gross axle weight in kg 1045

Rear gross axle weight in kg 980

Permitted roof load in kg 75

Trailer without brakes 740

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1500

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400

Technical Data292

Automatic

183

8,1

12,5

Automatic

2030

1510

altea_EN Seite 292 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Engine oil capacity

Diesel engine 1.9 l TDI 77 kW (105 bhp)

Engine specifications

Performance figures

Weights

Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.3 litres

Power output in kW (HP) rpm 77 (105)/ 4000

Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 250/1900

No. of cylinders, capacity in cm 3 4/1896

Fuel Min. 51 CNa)

a) Cetane- Number (cetane index) = Measure of the combustion power of the diesel

Manual

Maximum speed in km/h 183

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in seconds 8,2

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in seconds 12,3

Manual

Gross vehicle weight in kg 2005

Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1480

Technical Data 293

Safety Fir Technical Data

1074

982

75

Automatic

750

1500

1400

altea_EN Seite 293 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Trailer weights

Engine oil capacity

Diesel engine 2.0 l TDI 103 kW (140 HP)

Engine specifications

Gross front axle weight in kg 1045

Gross rear axle weight in kg 983

Permitted roof load in kg 75

Manual

Trailer without brakes 740

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1500

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400

Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.3 litres

Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 103 (140)/ 4000

Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 320/ 1750 - 2500

No. of cylinders, capacity in cm 3 4/ 1968

Fuel Min. 51 CNa)

a) Cetane- Number (cetane index) = Measure of the diesel combustion power.

Technical Data294

Automatic

201

6,7

9,8

Automatic

2060

1540

1105

980

75

altea_EN Seite 294 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Performance figures

Weights

Trailer weights

Engine oil capacity

Manual

Maximum speed in km/h 201

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in seconds 6,9

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in seconds 9,9

Manual

Gross vehicle weight in kg 2025

Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1505

Gross front axle weight in kg 1070

Gross rear axle weight in kg 975

Permitted roof load in kg 75

Trailer without brakes 750

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1500

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400

Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.3 litres

Technical Data 295

Safety Fir Technical Data

altea_EN Seite 295 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Diesel engine 2.0l 125 kW (170 bhp)

Engine specifications

Performance figures

Weights

Trailer weights

Power output in kW (HP) rpm 125 (170)/ 4200

Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 350/ 1750-2500

No. of cylinders, capacity in cm 3 4/ 1968

Fuel Min. 51 CZ

Maximum speed in km/h 211

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in seconds 6.1

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in seconds 8.6

Gross vehicle weight in kg 2025

Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1505

Front gross axle weight in kg 1092

Rear gross axle weight in kg 982

Permitted roof load in kg 75

Trailer without brakes 750

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1500

Trailers with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400

Technical Data296

altea_EN Seite 296 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Engine oil capacity

Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.8 litres

Technical Data 297

Safety Fir Technical Data

m

Rear

1,509 mm

1,523 mm

altea_EN Seite 297 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

st Operating instructions Practical tips

Dimensions and capacities

Dimensions

Length, width 4,282 mm/ 1,768 m

Height at kerb weight 1,546 mm

Front and rear projection 916 mm/ 788 mm

Wheelbase 2,578 mm

Turning circle 10.7 m

Track widtha)

a) This data will change depending on the type of wheel rim.

Front

1,525 mm

1,539 mm

Capacities

Fuel tank 55 l. Reserve 7 l.

Windscreen washer fluid container with headlight washer 3 l/ 5.5 l

Tyre pressure

Summer-grade tyres:

The correct tyre pressure can be seen on the sticker on the inside of the tank flap.

Winter tyres:

The pressure of these tyres is the same as the summer tyre pressure plus 0.2 bar.

altea_EN Seite 298 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Index 299

tery

Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

Winter conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

tension device

Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

tension devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

diesel fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

ke assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

ke fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

ke pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

ke servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193, 200

ke system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

Brake servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

kes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

king distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

b changes

general notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

b defect

warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

zer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120, 169

altea_EN Seite 299 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Index

A ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

Acoustic signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Acoustic warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Adaptive headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Adjusting the seat belt height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

AFS (curve lights) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Air conditioner*

2C-Climatronic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Air conditioning system

General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Air conditioning* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Air recirculation mode

2C-Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Manual air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Airbag covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Curtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Alarm system

Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Alternator

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Ambient temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . 65, 73

Anti-freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Anti-lock brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Anti-puncture tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

Anti-theft alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Anti-theft wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

Aquaplaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

Ashtray* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Automatic anti-dazzle interior mirror*

Activating the anti-dazzle function . . . . . . 129

Deactivating anti-dazzle function . . . . . . . . 129

Automatic car wash tunnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

Automatic gearbox

Kick-down feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

Automatic gearbox / DSG automatic gearbox . 178

Automatic lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Automatic mode

2C-Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Automatic wiper/wash function for the rear window

128

Auxiliary audio connection: AUX-IN . . . . . . . . . 149

B Ball coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

BAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Bat

Belt

Belt

Bio

Bio

Bon

Bra

Bra

Bra

Bra

Bra

Bra

Bra

Bul

Bul

Buz

Index300

k . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

seat covers cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

es hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

pit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

rol lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

rol lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

rols

lectric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

ight switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

enience closing

liding/tilting roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

indows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

enience opening

indows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

ant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233, 234

oolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

ant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

ant level

arning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

ant Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

ant temperature

isplay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

afety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

e control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

e control system

arning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

e control*

urning off the cruise control system . . . . 190

altea_EN Seite 300 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

C Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

CD changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Automatic locking system for involuntary

unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Automatic speed dependent locking and un-

locking system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Emergency unlocking system . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Selective unlocking system* . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Unlocking system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Central locking button

Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Centre arm rest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Cetane number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

Changing gear

See Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Changing gear in Tiptronic mode . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Changing the lamps

Main headlight lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

rear lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Changing the main headlight lamps

dipped beam lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

main beam lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

Side lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

turn signal lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

Changing the rear lights

indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

luggage compartment lights . . . . . . . . . . . 273

rear fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

reverse light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

side lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

Changing windscreen wiper blades . . . . . . . . . 236

Chassis number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

Checking battery electrolyte level . . . . . . . . . . 241

Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Child seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Categorisation in groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Group 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Group 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Group 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Groups 0 and 0+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Child seats

on the front passenger seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Cigarette lighter* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Cleaning alloy wheel rims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Cleaning and caring for your vehicle . . . . . . . . 209

Cleaning chrome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

Cleaning engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Cleaning steel wheel rims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Cleaning windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

Climatic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Climatronic

General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Cloc

Cloth

Cloth

Cock

Cont

Cont

Cont

E

L

Conv

S

W

Conv

W

Cool

C

Cool

Cool

w

Cool

Cool

D

S

Cruis

Cruis

W

Cruis

T

Index 301

amic headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . 117

logical driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

nomical driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

trical sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

tronic differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

tronic immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86, 170

tronic stabilisation program . . . . . . . . . . . 195

tronic stabilisation programme . . . . . . . . . . 85

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

tronic stabilisation programme (ESP)

warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

rgency braking function . . . . . . . . . . 119, 193

rgency manual locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

rgency opening

Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

ssion control system

warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

ine

Running in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

ine compartment

Working in the engine compartment . . . . . 226

ine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

altea_EN Seite 301 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Curtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

D Danger of fitting a child seat on the front passenger

seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Dash panel cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Dash panel menu

Configuration menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Example of menu use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Lights and visibility menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Dash panel menus

Main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Vehicle status menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Daytime lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

activating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

deactivating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

Diesel engine

Winter driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Diesel engine particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

Differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

Differential lock fault (EDL)

warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Digital clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Dipped headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Disabling front passenger airbag

Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Disabling the airbag

Disabling front passenger airbag . . . . . . . . . 44

Display (without warning or information texts) . 61

Displays in the Multi-function display

Memory displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Disposal

Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Door lock cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

Door release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Doors

Childproof locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Drawer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Drinks holders at the front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Drive wheels traction control system . . . . . . . . 194

Driveshaft differential

XDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

Driving

Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

Economical/ Environmental . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

With a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

Driving programmes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Driving safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Driving with an automatic gearbox / DSG automatic

gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Duplicate keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Dust filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Dynamic curve lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Dyn

E Eco

Eco

EDL

EDS

Elec

Elec

Elec

Elec

Elec

Elec

Eme

eme

Eme

Emi

Eng

Eng

Eng

Index302

iesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

etrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

level

dicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

arning message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Tank

pening the fuel tank flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

tank

ee Fuel reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

shift pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

ral overview of the engine compartment 285

e compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

plug system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

arning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

arning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83, 183

rd warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

altea_EN Seite 302 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Engine fault

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Engine management

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

Checking level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

Oil properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

Topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

Engine oil dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

Engine oil pressure

monitor indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

Environmental friendliness . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

Environmental tip

Avoiding pollution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

ESP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85, 195

Example of menu use

Program a speed limit warning . . . . . . . . . . 69

To activate and deactivate the speed limit

warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Example of the use of the menus

Open the Configuration menu with the MFD

lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Open the Configuration menu with the steering

wheel controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Examples of menu use

Open the main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Open the winter tyres menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

To close the winter tyres menu . . . . . . . . . . 69

Exhaust gasses purification system . . . . . . . . 201

Exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

F Fabric trim cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Fire extinguisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

First-aid kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Fog lights with cornering function . . . . . . . . . . 118

folding table* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Folding the seat backrests down . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Foot brake

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Four wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Front passenger airbag deactivation . . . . . . . . . 44

Front reading lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Front seat adjustment

Lumbar support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Frontal airbags

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Fuel

D

P

Fuel

In

Fuel

w

Fuel

O

Fuel

S

Fuel:

Fuse

G G 12

Gear

Gene

Glov

Glow

W

GRA

H Hand

W

Haza

Index 303

n beam headlights

Indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

n headlight lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

ntenance

airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

ual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

ual mode

2C-Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

IA-IN connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

age display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

ors

Exterior mirrors, electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Interior mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Make-up mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

ile telephones and radiotelephones . . . . 219

ti-function display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

ti-purpose* mobile stowage compartment 146

Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Uses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

ber of seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

ervations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

altea_EN Seite 303 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

head restraints

Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133, 134

adjustment of the head restraint angle . . . 134

Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

head restraints, correct adjustment . . . . . . . . . . 13

In-use and non-use positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Headlight flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Headlights

Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Heated front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Heated window

2C-Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

High pressure cleaners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

Hill-start aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

I Identification number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

Ignition key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Indicators

indication lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Information texts in the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Instrument and switch lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Instrument lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Interior front light, type 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Interior front light, type 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Intermittent wipe, windscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

J Jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

K Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

L Leather cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

LPG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60, 173, 221

LPG system

Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Filler neck adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Level indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 152

Luggage compartment net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

M Main beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113, 120

Mai

Mai

Mai

Man

Man

MED

MFD

Mile

Mirr

Mob

Mul

Mul

N Num

O Obs

Index304

elling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

stration light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

ote control key

uttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

ynchronising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

oving and fitting the wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

irs

irbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

acement keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

acement of parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

ounter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

rse gear

anual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

back function

liding/tilting roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

indows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

aerial* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

carrier* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

stowage compartment* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

er seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

ing in

ngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

ty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

ty equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

ty instructions

oolant temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

altea_EN Seite 304 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Octane number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

Oil change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

Oil properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

One-touch opening and closing

Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Opening and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Overview

Control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

P Paintwork

Polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

Parking aid acoustic system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

Parking lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Parking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

Parking system plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

Petrol additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

Petrol engines, starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Physical principles of a frontal collision . . . . . . 21

Plastic parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

Plastic parts cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Pollen filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Power steering system

warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Products for vehicle maintenance . . . . . . . . . . 209

R Radio frequency remote control

Changing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Radio navigation Steering wheel controls

audio + telephone version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

audio version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Radio wave remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Rain sensor* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Rear drink holder*

Armrest* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Rear fog light

Indication lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Rear interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Rear lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Rear reading lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Rear seat bench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Rear shelf

Storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Rear window heating

Heating element wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

Rear window wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Rear-view mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Recommended gear display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Refu

Regi

Rem

B

S

Rem

Repa

a

Repl

Repl

Rev c

Reve

M

Roll-

S

W

Roof

Roof

Roof

Rubb

Runn

E

S Safe

Safe

Safe

Safe

C

Index 305

ering wheel audio controls

audio + telephone version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

audio version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

ring wheel height adjustment . . . . . . . . . . 167

rage compartment

Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

wage area

Centre arm rest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Other stowage areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

wage compartment

Front passenger side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

wage in the luggage compartment . . . . . . . 142

visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

roof blind

Sliding/tilting roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

tch

Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

tches

Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Electrical exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Sliding/tilting roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

tching off the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Emergency opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

altea_EN Seite 305 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Safety notes

Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Belt tension devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Curtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Disabling front passenger airbag . . . . . . . . . 45

frontal airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Using child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Using seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Safety system- safe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

Seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132, 135, 137

Seat belt position

Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Seat belt release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Seat belt warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Incorrectly fastened . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Not worn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Seat belts cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

Seat belts protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Seat heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Selective opening* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Selector lever locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Service interval display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

servotronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Shoes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Side lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Sitting position

Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Front passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Incorrect sitting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Sitting position, occupants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Sliding/tilting roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250, 284

Soot accumulation in the diesel engine particulate

filter

Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

Starting Petrol engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170, 171

After the fuel tank has been run dry . . . . . . 171

Start-Stop

deactivating and activating . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Steam jets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Steering lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Ste

Stee

Sto

Sto

Sto

Sto

Sun

Sun

Sun

Swi

Swi

Swi

T Tail

Index306

cle paintwork

roducts for vehicle maintenance . . . . . . . 209

axing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

cle tools

torage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

cle wallet storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

cle washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

ilation slits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

metric sensor*

ctivation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

eactivation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

ing lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

ing lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

ing reports

ed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

ellow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

ing texts in the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

ing triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

her fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

hing by hand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

hing with high pressure cleaners . . . . . . . 211

r

arning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

r in the windscreen washer tank . . . . . . . 235

r indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

el bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255, 284

orque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

el change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

altea_EN Seite 306 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Tank

fuel level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

reserve indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

tank capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

TCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

TCS (Traction control system)

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Technical modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

The danger of not using the seat belt . . . . . . . . 22

Tightening torque of wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . 284

Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

Tow starting

Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

Towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

Towing bracket, fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

Towing eye . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

Tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

Traction control system

warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Trailer

Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Trailer eyes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

Trailer turn signals

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Trailer weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

Trips, checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80, 120

Type plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

Tyre Mobility-System (Tyre repair kit) . . . 252, 259

Tyre monitor indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Tyre pressure monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Tyre pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

Tyre repair kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252, 259

Tyres and wheels

Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

Tyres service life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Tyres tread depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

Tyres with directional tread pattern . . . . . . . . . 243

U Underbody sealant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Unlocking and locking

Personalisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

V Vehicle battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

Vehicle data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

Vehicle identification data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

Vehicle identification number . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

Vehicle Maintenance

Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

Vehicle modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

Vehi

P

W

Vehi

S

Vehi

Vehi

Vent

Volu

A

D

W Warn

Warn

Warn

R

Y

Warn

Warn

Was

Was

Was

Wate

w

Wate

Wea

Whe

T

Whe

Index 307

altea_EN Seite 307 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18

Wheel trims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243, 284

Why assume the correct sitting position? . . . . . 30

Why should head restraints be correctly adjusted?

13

Why to wear seat belts? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Why wear seat belts? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21, 30

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Windscreen washer fluid

Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Windscreen wiper blades

Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Changing blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

Changing the rear blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

Winter driving

Diesel engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

Wiper/wash automatic function . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Wooden trim cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Working in the engine compartment . . . . . . . . 226

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the Altea Seat works, you can view and download the Seat Altea Edition 07.09 2009 Hatchback Owner's Manual on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Owner's Manual for Seat Altea as well as other Seat manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Owner's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Seat Altea. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Seat Altea Edition 07.09 2009 Hatchback Owner's Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Seat Altea Edition 07.09 2009 Hatchback Owner's Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Seat Altea Edition 07.09 2009 Hatchback Owner's Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Seat Altea Edition 07.09 2009 Hatchback Owner's Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Seat Altea Edition 07.09 2009 Hatchback Owner's Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.